Home

LoggerNet User's Manual - Bad Request

1. GetRecord IIF IMP LOG LOG10 MaxSpa xl mm baie ee Select All Clear All Cancel Supported Loggers allows you to set up additional dataloggers to be programmed using the CRBasic Editor In the dialog window shown below the editor is set up for CR5000 and CR9000 dataloggers You could add the CR200 Series datalogger by selecting the language help and compiler files to be used in the Editor 10 x supported Loggers CR5000 C Program Files Campbellsci Logg C Program Files Campbellsci Logg CR5 C Program Files C CR39000 C Program Files Campbellsci Logg C Program Files Campbellsci Logg CR9 C PROGRA 14C OK Add New Logger Type Remove Logger Type Font brings up a font selection dialog to select the font typeface and size for the text in the CRBasic Editor Font style and color are set under Editor Preferences Background Color brings up the color selection dialog to set the color of the CRBasic program window 9 11 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 1 8 Available Wrap Text When Printing When this option is selected long lines that extend past the right margin will be wrapped to the next line This option affects printing as well as the Print Preview mode A check mark will appear next to the option in the menu when it is selected Display Last Window Used When this
2. s Setup Pale E3 File Edit Options Help n x gt E Add Root Add Delete Rename Tasks Seriall gig Loggerl Oxtd Be CRIOx CRIOX 3 0 Serial2 E OKLogger Hardware Schedule Final Storage Area 1 Final Storage Area 2 Clock l H r iea 1 IV Communications enabled H A AFRemote g CR510 a ComPort_4 Maximum time on line 00 d 00 h 10 m 00 s 000 ms a PHModem RemoteModem Maximum packet size 2048 Extra response time O00 s Security code jo Call back ID jo Apply 5 1 1 Adding Devices to the Network Begin adding devices to the device map in the order that they appear in your communications link Let s assume that your server computer is connected to the datalogger via a telephone modem You would first add a ComPort then the telephone modem the remote phone modem and the datalogger To add a ComPort to the network map either right click in the blank area of the network map click the Add Root button or choose Edit Add Root Once the ComPort is in place you can click the Add button or choose Edit Add from the menu to bring up the Add Device window Section 5 Setup gt o Add Device ale xi Device To Add CR9000 CR510TD CR1OT Place To Add Devic zg ComPort_1 iT MD9Base 5 Generic ay ComPort_2 5 PhoneRemote IPPort TAP Remote IPPort_2 Pal ComPort_3 zg ComPort_3_2 4 RFRemote IT MDIRemote ay PakBusPort B48 CR510TD PB Es CRICX
3. ccceesceseeseceseeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeereees 13 14 13 5 3 Show Card Module Directory ccccesseeseeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 16 13S A Get Arias eis eset ER A eesti eh O 13 16 135 GEENE Wope tacarvasdndasvandnssbes a AAE 13 17 e EREE EE E E E E E E E E E E 13 17 13 0 Erase ren e ee E E A E EEE EN TARERE 13 17 E30 Erase Datania et a TE A ETE G E E 13 17 13 6 2 Erase Data and Programs ssseesseesesseesersessreeessesresresersesseese 13 17 13 6 3 Erase and Test Card Module ccccccccessessesseeeteeeeeeneeeeees 13 17 13 7 The Menu Bar ersnieicce nrerin a i E 13 18 TSP Ea aA A AN E EOR 13 18 TITZ Options irse e e E E n E e E bende 13 19 Ta DE A N I A 13 19 13TA TOONS erii ea aeei EER AEEA EN EA TEER EER 13 19 EEE a i OE EE E A AIEE A E E S A AIE A A 13 20 e E E E TE EA A E E S 13 20 14 DataFiler aaananannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 14A d 14 1 DataFiler Requirement ccccesscssseecsssseeesessessseeesesneconsensesnseans 14 1 14 2 Using the DataFiler oo cc ccceccceesceesceseceseceseceeceseeeseceaecseceeeeeeaeeaes 14 1 14 2 1 Connecting to a Computer Running the LoggerNet Server Softwa E oiek e aE A A a 14 1 14 2 2 Setting Up the DataFiler ccc eecceeeseceseceeeeeeteeneenseenaes 14 2 14 2 3 Determining the Data Available in the Data Cache 14 3 14 24 The Collected Datas c asancea ici tint aiig hw lta 14 4 14 3 Communication Status cc ceeeceesceeec
4. 7 3 Monitoring Operational Logs NOTE Three operational logs are available that provide information on the communications between the LoggerNet server and the datalogger network Transaction Log Communication Log and Object State Log The information in these logs is used for troubleshooting communications links Each log is initially configured in the Status Monitor screen refer to Section 7 2 10 In the Status Monitor screen clicking the Server Logs button will bring up the LoggerNet logs display Selecting View Server Messages on the Options menu will also bring up the log display Individual log displays can be temporarily paused by selecting the Pause check box Examples of the log files and the details of the messages can be found in Appendix D Section 7 Status Monitor Server Logs X Transaction L 04 24 03 2 37 28 PM CR200Series 11 Clock check started 04 24 03 2 37 28 PM CR200Series 13 Clock checked 2003 04 24 14 37 33 835306368 2003 04 24 14 37 28 155 5 04 24 03 2 37 29 PM CR200Series 11 Clock check started 04 24 03 2 37 29 PM CR200Series 13 Clock checked 2003 04 24 14 37 34 835306368 2003 04 24 14 37 29 156 5 04 24 03 2 37 30 PM CR200Series 11 Clock check started Communication Log On1 tran 51 04 24 03 2 37 29 PM PakBusPort S received message stc 1 dest 4094 proto BMP5 type On97 tran 51 04 24 0
5. yx x Cancel gt gt Apply Help 6 17 Section 6 Connect 6 18 6 5 1 3 5 Cell Options 6 5 1 4 Rescale The appearance of the data traces can only be changed using the right click menu Right click the numeric cell of a trace on the graph and the following menu will appear Cell Options Rename Delete A Help Trace Options Style Symbol Style Solid Line v Rectangle Pixel Width Color fi isd New Color A Select Axis sets whether the data trace is displayed on the left or right axis The displayed graph will depend on the axis settings for the selected scale y Apply Style selects the style for the line Symbol Style selects the appearance of the individual data points Pixel Width sets the width of the trace line Wider traces are easier to see but may obscure other traces or small variations of the data New Color sets the color of the trace and the data points The user can choose from the Windows color palette for the color The color for this trace is shown in the color window Rescale is used only for Power of Ten Scaling Sometimes the scale factor for a field is fixed before the field has reached a maximum This may cause the data to be displayed partially or completely off the Graphical Display Clicking the Rescale button causes the graph to re evaluate the scale factors for all the fields and adjust them as necessary to keep
6. Message Text Add record failed Collect area skipped warning Collect area skipped error BMP 1 packet sent Message Parameters Table name Beginning record number End record number A reason for the failure Collect area name Collect area name The packet message type code 0 Packet Delivery Fault Notification 1 Status Warning Fault Notification 2 Network Description Transaction 3 Clock Check Set Transaction 4 Program Down load Transaction 5 Program Up load Transaction 7 Data Advise Command Transaction 8 Data Advise Notification Packet 9 Hole Collection Command Transaction 10 Control Command Set Variable Transaction 11 User I O Transaction Terminal Mode 12 Memory Image Down load Transaction 13 Memory Image Up load Transaction 14 Get Table Definitions Transaction 15 RF Test Transaction 16 Communication Status Notification Message Meaning The server was not able to write data records to the data storage area The specified collect area was skipped because the associated table has not been initialized by the server yet The specified collect area was skipped because the server could not initialize the associated table The specified BMP1 packet was sent to the serial communication interface The number specifies the type of message that was sent Appendix D Log Files User Response to Message This indicates a problem writing to files on the co
7. Start w Splitr LOGAN R By adding the Start w parameter to the command line that initiates Splitr no further commands will be processed until the LOGAN PAR file has finished execution 10 6 4 Command Line Switches Splitr has three switches that can be used to control how files are processed 10 6 4 1 Closing the Splitr exe Program After Execution R Switch Typically when Split is run after the file is processed the user must close the Screen Display window When Splitr exe is run from a command line the user must also close the Screen Display window unless the R switch is used 10 45 Section 10 Split 10 46 The syntax for this switch is SPLITR LOGAN R where LOGAN is the parameter file name The R switch should follow immediately after the parameter file name with no space between the two Ifa space is used the following message will be displayed There was a problem opening the input file File could not be found or may be in use 10 6 4 2 Running Splitr in a Hidden or Minimized State H Switch Splitr can be run in a minimized state so that the Screen Display window does not interrupt other processes on the computer The syntax for running Splitr minimized is SPLITR H LOGAN where LOGAN is the parameter file name The H switch must be positioned after SPLITR but before the parameter file name and a space is required between the executable name and the switch 10 6 4 3 Running Multiple Copies of
8. above except that the time stamp is not surrounded by quotes Monthly Summary Example NOTE The Date function can be used to produce a monthly summary of daily time series data by using Date for the interval in the time series function This will trigger time series output for the first day of each month The syntax is avg 7 date 3 2 where you want to take a monthly average of element 7 and the day of year is contained in element 3 and the year in element 2 If you have data recorded on a once per minute or once per hour basis it must first be processed into a 24 hour summary for this function to produce the output expected When Date and Edate are used within other functions they must be used with the older format Date doy y and Edate doy y instead of using the extended date functions For example AVG 1 Date 3 2 When used with table based data files the format would be AVG 1 Date 1 1 When producing a monthly summary and outputting the month along with the data you might want to set up the value for the month as month 1 to correctly reflect the month that the data actually represents Section 10 Split Split Functions Example The following is a parameter file that operates on the Mt Logan data with several of the Split features being utilized This first screen shows the input file and the select criteria that were programmed This example does calculations based on temperature and wind speed to determine the
9. 64 337 63 207 59 335 51 142 43 703 41 815 45 206 10 3 6 4 Summary of Select Line Syntax Rules A fixed numeric value must include a decimal poin notation There are some exceptions to this as noted below woe or be in scientific Scientific notation has the format mantissa E power of ten e g 3E5 3 x 10 Element numbers are entered without a decimal point Commas separate Select line parameters e g 2 3 3 4 3 2 6 Two decimal points are used to select consecutive elements between starting and ending elements e g 3 6 refers to the elements 3 4 5 and 6 10 37 Section 10 Split e A set is a group of two or more elements and or expressions separated by commas and enclosed by parentheses No member of a set can include parentheses Therefore a set cannot include a set or a function as one of its members For example VALID EXPRESSION INVALID EXPRESSION Arctan 2 3 Arctan 2 3 Arctan 2 3 3 4 4 5 Arctan 2 3 3 4 4 5 Arctan COS 2 Arctan COS 2 COS 3 e A single expression can operate on a set of elements For example the expression 3 6 8 2 0 is the same as 3 2 0 4 2 0 5 2 0 6 2 0 8 2 0 3 6 2 5 is the same as 3 2 4 3 5 4 6 5 e The element or expression that is the argument of a math or Time Series function must be enclosed in parentheses A range of elements can be specified resulting in as many outputs as elements e g Avg 3 5 7 will output 4 averag
10. 92 Collect area poll started final_storage_1 2002 03 06 11 31 00 010 CR23X_2 92 Collect area poll started ports_and_flags 2002 03 06 11 31 00 010 CR510TD 92 Collect area poll started ErrorLog 2002 03 06 11 31 00 010 CR510TD 92 Collect area poll started Hourly 2002 03 06 11 31 00 010 CR510TD 92 Collect area poll started OneMinute 2002 03 06 11 31 00 010 CR510TD 92 Collect area poll started TenSecond 2002 03 06 11 31 00 010 CR510TD 92 Collect area poll started TimeSet 2002 03 06 11 31 00 100 CR510TD 13 Clock checked 20020306 11 29 02 454 2002 03 06 11 31 00 290 CR510TD 41 Records received ErrorLog 5 5 2002 03 06 11 31 00 290 CR510TD 94 Collect area poll complete ErrorLog 0 2002 03 06 11 31 00 530 CR510TD 41 Records received Hourly 673 673 2002 03 06 11 31 00 530 CR510TD 94 Collect area poll complete Hourly 0 2002 03 06 11 31 00 731 CR510TD 41 Records received OneMinute 40459 40459 2002 03 06 11 31 00 731 CR510TD 94 Collect area poll complete OneMinute 3 2002 03 06 11 31 00 961 CR510TD 41 Records received TenSecond 242758 242758 D 1 3 3 Communications Status Log Format Each record in the communications status log includes two fields in addition to the timestamp and device name Severity A single character code that indicates the type of message The following values are legal
11. In this instance out of range data refers to data outside of the specified output range It is not to be confused with out of range data generated by the logger 10 3 6 2 Variables NOTE NOTE Section 10 Split Variables can be assigned names in the Select line For example x 4 5 6 3 0 means that x is equal to element 6 times the number 3 times element 5 subtracted from element 4 A numeric value is distinguished from an array element by the inclusion of a decimal point Variables must be declared before they can be used in the Select line A variable name must start with an alpha character can include numbers and must not exceed eight characters Variable names can start with the same character but they must not start with another complete variable name e g the variable XY is not valid if there is also the variable X A comma must follow each variable statement as with all parameters in the Select line Once the variables have been declared they can be used later in the Select line 1 x 4 5 6 3 0 y 6 3 2 3 6 7 7 x 6 Y Variables can be defined in the first four Input File s Select lines only but may be used in subsequent Input File s Select lines Illegal operations e g logarithm of a negative number will cause Split to store blanks for the Output It is possible to get a run time error error 0 1 if the floating point math exceeds the limits of the PC The greatest number that can be output is
12. NOTE The MD9 base modem has only a Hardware tab LoggerNet assumes an MD9 base modem address of 255 Therefore the MD9 base modem must have the hardware switch ID set to 255 for communication to work Communications Enabled Before communications can take place all devices in the chain must have the Communications Enabled box checked When this box is selected communication to the MD9 base is enabled Maximum Baud Rate Select the arrow to the right of this field to choose a maximum baud rate for communication with this device Note that the actual rate of communication may be limited by the capability of other devices in the communications chain 5 2 9 MD9 Remote The MD9 remote is the MD9 modem device that is connected to the datalogger at the field site It has a Hardware tab only Communications Enabled Before communications can take place all devices in the chain must have the Communications Enabled box checked When this box is selected communications to the MD9 modem are enabled Address The hardware for each MD9 modem is configured for a certain address using internal hardware switches This address acts as an identification for the device in an MD9 network Each MD9 modem in the network must have a unique address this number is entered in the Address field 5 2 10 PhoneBase The PhoneBase is a telephone modem connected to one of the server s ComPorts to provide access to other devices in the datalogger ne
13. s expression evaluator evaluates an expression and returns a number A conditional statement uses the number to decide which way to branch The conditional statement is false if the number is 0 and true if the number is not 0 For example If 6 then Y 0 is always true Y will be set to 0 any time the conditional statement is executed If 0 then Y 0 is always false Y will never be set to 0 by this conditional statement Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor The expression evaluator evaluates the expression X gt 5 and returns 1 if the expression is true and 0 if the expression is false W X gt Y will set W equal to 1 if X gt Y or will set W equal to 0 if X lt Y The datalogger uses 1 rather than some other non zero number because the and and or operators are the same for logical statements and binary bitwise comparisons The number 1 is expressed in binary with all bits equal to 1 the number 0 has all bits equal to 0 When 1 is anded with any other number the result is the other number ensuring that if the other number is non zero true the result will be non zero 9 6 Flags Any variable can be used as a flag as far as logical tests in CRBasic are concerned If the value of the variable is non zero the flag is high If the value of the variable is 0 the flag is low LoggerNet looks for the variable array with the name Flag when the option to display flag status is used in one of the real time sc
14. 16 2 2 4 Max Time Online The Max Time Online setting is used to force LoggerNet to terminate a connection if the maximum time limit is exceeded This is used to prevent a phone modem from getting stuck online and incurring extra long distance phone charges or inhibiting scheduled data collection from other stations In Section 16 Implementing Advanced Communications Links phone to MD9 systems this value should be long enough to allow data collection for the anticipated amount of data If the Max Time Online is reached LoggerNet will force the connection to close even if it is in the middle of collecting data 16 2 2 5 Grounding Depending on the configuration and distance of the MD9 network be sure to follow the grounding guidelines provided in the MD9 hardware manual Grounding issues have been known to prevent reliable communications and data collection 16 3 TCP IP to RF 16 3 1 Setup The development of Serial Server devices that allow serial communications devices to be connected to TCP IP networks now allows an RF network to be connected to the LoggerNet server over the Internet or across a Local Area Network A Serial Server has a standard TCP IP connection on one side and one or more serial ports typically RS232 on the other This type of network setup is typically used for organizations that have field offices or stations that are connected together by a TCP IP network This allows the LoggerNet server computer to be locat
15. CampbellSci loggeret 2 14 5 23 Section 5 Setup 5 5 1 Adding Tasks To add a task that will run based on a data collection event for a datalogger select the datalogger by clicking it Then click the Add After button or select Add After from the Edit menu A new task will appear attached to the selected datalogger You can then set up the conditions for the task with the options on the right side of the window You can create complex combinations of tasks by linking tasks to other tasks or multiple tasks to a datalogger A task linked to another task has no start options but will execute the specified action following the completion of the parent task Multiple tasks linked to a datalogger will execute based on the conditions specified for the start of the task This allows one task to be run after successful data collection and another if data collection fails To add a scheduled task click the Add button or select Add from the Edit menu A new task will be added to the list of tasks below the list of dataloggers You can then set up the conditions for the task with the options on the right side of the window To delete a task click to highlight it and click Delete or select Delete from the Edit menu The selected task will be deleted If there are any tasks linked to the task they will move up and take the place of the deleted task Tasks can be renamed by selecting the task and then clicking again on the task
16. Characters such as commas or tabs separate each field C Fixed width Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each field Start import at row 1 3 File Origin windows ANSI z Preview of file C Campbellsci LoggerNet20 CR23x _2_1 dat 11 112 2002 38 1252 47 00 13 14 24 79 6999 6999 1252 47 Faime ged fie ss Peds td a Oe aed es Deh eke tn la Einne ama de 255 so 000s te eke boot Ol dee MOS 2002 58 1253 15 00 13 14 240739 6999 259 00 485 ISH OS 2002 98 1253 25 00 13 14 240 79 6999 39 00 629 E 1 Appendix E Importing Files Into Excel Step 2 of 3 From the Delimiters group box select Comma and Space The Comma option directs Excel to place each data value which is separated by a comma into a separate column The Space option will separate the Date and the Time into two columns From the Text Qualifiers list box select None Select the Next button Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 2 x This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see how your text is affected in the preview below elimters J Treat consecutive delimiters as one I Semicolon MV Comma J Other E Text Qualifier i gt Cancel lt Back next gt Finish E 2 Step 3 of 3 Appendix E Importing Files Into Excel A quick look at the columns of data is provided in the Data Preview group box To complete the import select the Finish button Text Import Wizard
17. Cosine of x in degrees Exp x Natural Exponent function e Frac x Fractional portion of x Int x Integer portion of x Ln x Natural logarithm of x Sin x Sine of x in degrees SpaAveg x y Spatial average of elements x through y SpaMax x y Spatial maximum of elements x through y SpaMin x y Spatial minimum of elements x through y SpaSd x y Spatial standard deviation of elements x through y Sqrt x Square root of x The following array of ASCII data will be used for all Mathematical function examples 0105 0176 1200 07 89 55 10 12 45 270 5 Abs x returns the absolute or positive value of element x Examples Abs 4 7 89 Abs 4 5 434 74 Arctan x returns the arc tangent of element x in degrees Examples Arctan 7 89 788 Arctan 7 6 87 365 Cos x returns the cosine of element x in degrees Examples Cos 5 57215 Cos 5 6 73551 10 24 Section 10 Split Exp x returns the exponential base e to the power of element x Example Exp 4 00037 Frac x returns the fractional value of the element x Examples Frac 4 89 Frac 6 7 95 Int x returns the integer portion of the element x Examples Int 7 270 Int 5 6 685 Ln Qx returns the natural log of element x Examples Ln 6 2 5217 Ln 7 6 5 1 2 4337 Sin x returns the sine of element x in degrees Examples Sin 7 99996 Sin 7 2 5 50603 Spatial functions included under Mathematic
18. HTML One or more can be selected A report sent to a file has the extension of RPT If the report is sent to a printer the printer must be on line In all cases a PRN output file is created A basic HTML file can be created containing the formatted report data The HTML file can be used as a display of the formatted data output in a web browser NOTE To remove page breaks in the HTML file enable the No FF option Other The Other button provides access to the dialog box shown below Bad data Replace bad data with I Only display lines with bad data Processing I Trigger on Stop condition Special M Match files M Transpose file M No FF Break arrays M NoSummary M No Date Advance FIGURE 10 3 2 Other Output File Options 10 40 CAUTION Section 10 Split It allows the following settings to be modified Replace bad data with The text in the field to the right of this option is entered into the PRN output file data set if data are blank bad or out of range See Table 10 3 9 for definition of blank or bad data Whatever text string the user enters in the field will be entered if a blank or question mark is in the data or if data are out of range This option is useful when the Output file is imported into a spreadsheet program such as Excel TABLE 10 3 9 Definition of Blank or Bad Data for each Data File Format File Format Definition of Blank or Bad Data Printable
19. Hole collect failed started came Data polling complete 28 Data polling failed query start Directed data query continue Directed data query complete Message Parameters Message Meaning The hole collection request either timed out ora communication failure occurred Data collection by polling failed due to communication failure or a timeout The user requested data has been received by the server query failed Getting logger table definitions The server is getting the table definitions from the datalogger The server has received the datalogger table definitions The request to get table definitions has failed Received logger table definitions 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Failed to get logger table definitions Data collection by polling started polling completed has been started The requested data in the directed query could not fit in one block and the next part is being requested The directed query request failed User Response to Message Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Getting the datalogger table definitions will erase any data in the data cache Message Text Message Parameters Logger table definitions have changed Updating BMP 1
20. Options Editor Preferences Syntax Highlighting commented text will appear formatted differently than other lines of code CR5000 The following program is used to measure 4 thermocouples VARIABLE DECLARATION Dim TCTemp 4 Dimension TC measurement variable Alias TCTemp 1 EngineCoolantT Rename variables Alias TCTemp 2 BrakeFluidT Alias TCTemp 3 ManifoldT Alias TCTemp 4 CabinT 9 15 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor In the sample code above the commented text will be ignored by the datalogger compiler 9 3 Example Program The following program will serve as a programming example in this section to illustrate the concepts and program structure This is a program for a CR5000 datalogger Note that other dataloggers may have slightly different parameters for some instructions Const RevDiff 1 Const Del 0 Const Integ 250 Declare constants Const Mult 1 Const Offset 0 Public RefTemp Declare public variables Declarations Public TC 6 dimension array and Units Reffemp degC declare units Units TC DegC DataTable Temp 1 2000 DataInterval 0 100 mSec 10 Average 1 Reffemp FP2 0 Define Data Table Average 6 TC FP2 0 EndTable BeginProg Scan 10 mSec 3 0 PanelTemp RefTemp 250 ge Me sure TCDiff TC 6 mV20C 1 TypeT Reffemp RevDiff Del Integ Mult Offset Scan loop CallTable Temp F Call Data Table NextScan EndProg 9 3 1 Data Table
21. RainTip TOT 2002 02 13 16 29 00 10519 13 94 2002 02 13 16 28 07 0 2002 02 13 16 30 00 10520 13 94 2002 02 13 16 29 07 0 2002 02 13 16 31 00 10521 13 94 2002 02 13 16 30 09 0 2002 02 13 16 32 00 10522 13 94 2002 02 13 16 31 06 0 2002 02 13 16 33 00 10523 13 94 2002 02 13 16 32 06 0 2002 02 13 16 34 00 10524 13 94 2002 02 13 16 33 09 0 2002 02 13 16 35 00 10525 13 94 2002 02 13 16 34 06 0 2002 02 13 16 36 00 10526 13 94 2002 02 13 16 35 07 0 2002 02 13 16 37 00 10527 13 94 2002 02 13 16 36 08 0 TOAS5 Table Oriented ASCH type 5 format This format has a multi line header including the TOACI1 information along with unit specifiers and an indication of the output process used for each of the data values The data is written one record per line in comma separated ASCII text with the timestamp at the beginning of each line This file can be opened in Section 6 Connect LoggerNet View a text editor processed using Split or brought into a spreadsheet application TOAS5S CR5000 y n By y nn y rs OneMin TIMESTAMP RECORD bat_Avg temp_Avg counter_Avg curve Avg TESS RNG U ITUN mom Avg Avg Avg Avg 2002 02 13 16 29 00 11300 13 05 24 5 178 9 0 013 2002 02 13 16 30 00 11301 13 05 24 5 182 0 018 2002 02 13 16 31 00 11302 13 05 24 5 178 3 0 013 2002 02 13 16 32 00 11303 13 05 24 5 180 0 001 2002 02 13 16 33 00 11304 13 05 24 5 181 5 0 012 2002 02 13 16
22. Section 7 W The Status Monitor is used to monitor the health of datalogger network communications The integrity of the communications link can be verified quickly from the color depicted by a status icon for each device Columns can be set up to display information on communications quality and data collection For troubleshooting purposes windows are available to view operational log messages for the server as well as the low level communication between the datalogger and the server Task status can also be monitored 1 2 4 Edlog Section 8 za Edlog is a tool to create and edit datalogger programs for all Campbell Scientific dataloggers except the CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 Series Instructions are included for sensor measurement intermediate processing program and peripheral control and data storage The built in precompiler provides error checking and warns of potential problems in the program 1 3 Section 1 Introduction 1 2 5 CRBasic Editor Section 9 p The CRBasic Editor is a tool to create and edit programs for the CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 Series dataloggers Instructions are included for sensor measurement program and peripheral control and data storage 1 2 6 Split Section 10 RES Split is used to post process and generate reports from collected data files It can be used to separate mixed array data files from classic dataloggers into individual files based on the array ID Split can also be used to create files
23. The flexibility of the commands available within CoraScript and the independence from user interface considerations make CoraScript a valuable tool for testing troubleshooting and automating LoggerNet server operations Because the commands available in CoraScript operate directly on the LoggerNet server and not through a user interface there are no confirmation prompts for critical operations Care should be exercised in using the commands to avoid interrupting normal server operations There is an extensive on line help file available for CoraScript To bring up the help file type help on the command line Make sure and include the semicolon at the end and leave off the quotes Read through the directions and try some examples F 1 Appendix F CoraScript F 2 Useful CoraScript Operations The following sections provide an overview of some common and very useful commands available with CoraScript Some rules about formatting input and interpreting the responses e Always end the command with the semicolon character CoraScript uses the semicolon to mark the end of the command input and will not process anything until it is detected e Command parameters are often set using a combination of the parameter name and the value in this format name login Be sure to read the help for the command you are using e A response preceded by a plus sign indicates that the command was successfully processed e
24. The red labels cannot be changed with the Final Storage Label Editor The green labels are associated with user programmed sensor data To change the label click in the box and type in the new label Resolution shows whether the data will be stored in low or high resolution High resolution stores data as a 4 byte floating point number Low resolution uses a 2 byte number Inloc Name is the label of the input location that the final storage data is based on Inloc Address is the numeric label for the input location used for the final storage data value 8 21 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog NOTE If changes are made to measurement or output instructions after custom final storage labels have been created you should review the custom final storage labels to make sure the correct labels are still assigned to the desired output values Some program changes involving an increase or decrease in input locations or output values could cause a label to no longer correspond with the value being output The final storage labels created by Edlog can be restored by selecting the menu item Edit Restore Default Labels 8 4 Datalogger Settings Stored in the DLD file 8 22 Certain settings for the datalogger which are normally accessed through the datalogger s modes can be included in the DLD file These settings include options such as program security final storage allocation the type of labels saved in the DLD
25. additional operations Processing is accomplished through arithmetic operators math functions spatial functions and time series functions Element numbers may be entered individually e g 2 3 4 5 6 7 or in groups e g 2 7 if sequential Range limits lower to upper boundary conditions may be placed on elements or groups of elements specified in the Select or Copy lines For example 3 3 7 5 4 7 5 10 implies that element 3 is selected only if it is between 3 7 and 5 inclusive and elements 4 5 6 and 7 must be between 5 and 10 inclusive 10 21 Section 10 Split If range limits are used in the Select condition when Split is run any data which are outside of the specified range will be highlighted according to the options chosen for the output file Table 10 3 5 summarizes what each option produces on the screen and in the output file if out of range data are encountered This type of range testing is a quick way to identify data problems TABLE 10 3 5 Effects of Out of Range Values for Given Output Options Output Option Report None No other options defined default Report File or Printer no other options defined Report None replacement text abc in Replace bad data with field See Section 10 3 6 1 Report File or Printer comment in Replace bad data with field Report None Display only bad data option enabled Report File or Printer Display only bad data option ena
26. first connect to a datalogger then click on the Send button A standard file select dialog box will come up so you can choose the file to send The Files of Type selector at the bottom of the dialog can be used to filter the files that are displayed This filter is set to the appropriate file type for each datalogger automatically dld for CR7 21X CR10 X CR510 and CR23X dataloggers and CR for the CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 Series dataloggers After selecting a datalogger program file a warning will appear to remind you that data may be lost when the new program is sent For array dataloggers data is not lost if the memory configuration does not change sending a new program to table based dataloggers always clears all data memory If there is any data in the datalogger that has not been collected click Cancel to stop the program send and collect the needed data If OK is selected at the warning the progress bar will come up with the program transfer progress Once the program has been sent the text changes to Compiling Program When the datalogger finishes compiling the program the progress box will close If a program downloaded to the datalogger sets or changes the active security code make sure to change the security setting for the datalogger in Setup screen Section 5 2 5 1 Otherwise access to the datalogger may be limited or completely denied 6 4 2 CR200 Series Programs As noted above programs for the CR200 Ser
27. hh mm 4 3 2 Section 10 Split with the No Date Advance enabled you would get the output 151 22 00 1 701 193 6 151 23 00 1 476 31 99 151 00 00 1 123 106 2 If you were to enter edate mm dd yy 4 3 2 4 6 7 with the No Date Advance disabled you would get the output 05 31 02 2200 1 701 193 6 05 31 02 2300 1 476 31 99 06 01 02 2400 1 123 106 2 10 3 7 2 Report Headings A report is output to a printer or file with the extension RPT Headings are not included in the standard output to disk PRN or user named extension output file However a report can be labeled with a header by entering text into the Report Heading field A report heading can have several lines but it is limited to a total of 253 characters including backslashes and carriage returns characters break the report heading into multiple lines When Time Series functions are used in the Select field without an interval they appear as a final summary at the end of the report They can be labeled by entering a title into the Time Series Heading field at the bottom of the Output File page Time Series interval summaries cannot be assigned individual titles PCDATE within the Report Heading inserts the computer s current date Month Day Year For the European format Day Month Year enter PCEDATE 10 3 7 3 Column Headings Up to three lines per column can be entered as column headings These headings are limited to a length of one less t
28. information This format is easily imported into spreadsheet applications Starting Record Information The Starting Record Information is applicable if the Collect Mode is Newest Number of Records or Specific Records For Newest Number of Records enter a value into the Number of Records field Data collection will include the number of records specified prior to and including the last record stored i e back up X number of records from the last record stored and collect all records from there For Specific Records enter values into the Starting Record and Number of Records fields The Starting Record is the first record that will be collected from the datalogger data collection will continue until the number of records specified have been received Starting Date Time and Ending Date Time The Starting Date Time and Ending Date Time fields are used when the Collect Mode is Data from Selected Date and Time The two fields are used to specify a range of records to collect based on the records time stamps To complete a date field type in a date directly or click the arrow to the right of the field to display a calendar from which to choose a date To complete a time field type in the time directly or use the arrows to the right of the field to increase or decrease the highlighted time value 14 2 3 Determining the Data Available in the Data Cache When a datalogger is selected in the Stations list you can press the Vie
29. name The name will turn into a text edit box and you can create your own task name There is also a right click menu that will allow the same Add Add After and Delete functions as described above 5 5 2 Logger Event Tasks 5 24 There are eight data collection events that can be selected to trigger a task linked to a datalogger Clicking the drop down list button to the right of the event brings up a list of these events as shown in the screen shot below These events allow flexibility in deciding when a linked task should be run Logger Event Event After Any Scheduled Call x After Any Scheduled Call After Successful Call After Failed Scheduled Call After Any Call After Some Not All Data After Any Data Collected On Call back After Call back e After Any Scheduled Call The task will run each time scheduled data collection is attempted This will run whether or not the attempt succeeded or data was collected Section 5 Setup e After Successful Call The task will run each time the datalogger is successfully contacted This could be for data collection or any other communication with the datalogger e After Failed Scheduled Call The task will run only when a scheduled data collection fails to communicate with the datalogger This is useful for building in an alert or notification utility to warn the user of the failure e After Any Call The task is run any time LoggerNet attempts to c
30. total output returns the standard deviation of element x over a full data set or every n value Examples Sd 3 3 6593 std dev temp for day Sd 3 8 1 011 Sd temp for 8 hours 1 1182 Sd temp for 8 hours 4 965 Sd temp for 8 hours returns a sample of element x every n value Examples Smpl 4 8 23 98 RH every 8 hours 24 31 RH every 8 hours 37 13 RH every 8 hours SmpIMax x y n looks for a maximum value in element x and samples SmpIMin x y n element y when the maximum is found If an n value is specified then it outputs the sample on a maximum every n value otherwise it outputs the sample on a maximum at the end of file Examples Smp Max 5 3 55 48 on max wind speed sample temperature SmplMax 5 3 6 8 56 57 307 3 60 93 317 5 55 48 338 7 on max wind speed sample temperature and wind direction every 8 hours looks for a minimum value in element x and samples element y when the minimum is found If ann value is specified then it outputs the sample on a minimum every n value otherwise it outputs the sample on a minimum at the end of file Examples SmpIMin 3 5 11 86 on min temp sample wind speed SmpIMin 3 5 6 8 8 99 317 7 5 458 312 11 86 351 6 on min temperature sample wind speed and wind direction every 8 hours 10 29 Section 10 Split Total x n returns the total of element x over a data set or every n value Examples Total 5 211 36 daily wi
31. 01 0112 02 2002 09 074 1 10 1638 01 0109 02 2002 03 0038 04 1639 05 15 00 06 13 20 07 24 79 08 073 9 03 0038 04 1639 05 25 00 06 13 20 07 24 79 08 073 9 03 0038 04 1639 05 35 00 06 13 20 07 24 79 08 074 0 03 0038 04 1639 05 45 00 06 13 20 07 24 79 08 074 0 03 0038 04 1639 05 55 00 06 13 20 07 24 79 08 074 0 03 0038 04 1640 05 0 000 06 13 20 07 24 79 08 074 0 11 18 00 12 13 19 03 0038 04 1640 05 5 000 06 13 20 07 24 78 08 074 0 Binary writes the data to a file in a binary format The advantage of the binary format is that it is more compact so the size of the file is much smaller than for the ASCII based files The disadvantage is that it s unreadable except using View or by processing with Split Collect Mode The collect mode allows you to choose how much data to collect when getting data from the datalogger Data Logged Since Last Call When LoggerNet calls the datalogger to collect data it will try to get all of the data stored by the datalogger since the previous call If this is the first call to a datalogger there might be a lot of historical data stored When Collect All on First Call is checked LoggerNet will collect all data in the datalogger the first time data is collected If Collect All on First Call is not checked the first call to the datalogger will collect the number of arrays specified This allows you to avoid keeping communications tied up while all the historical data is collected Mos
32. 26 10 47 AM 02 26 11 17 AM 4 b workspace Size 640 480 Server Name localhost YW As seen in the example screen above different types of graphic components can be combined to create an attractive real time display Company logos maps or any image stored in a standard graphic file format can be placed on the screen Many images have been included with RTMC and others can be added as needed 12 2 1 The RTMC Workspace The RTMC workspace is a fixed size container for holding one or more display screens As new display screens are added they appear as tabs in the project The display screen is a container for the various display components that make up each tab of the real time display 12 2 Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC The size of the workspace and the run time window can be changed by selecting Project Change Workspace Size 12 2 2 Display Components NOTE Display components are the objects that are used to display data To adda component to the workspace click an item in the Display Components List in the RTMC window and then click anywhere in the workspace The component s Properties window is automatically displayed when the object is first placed in the work area The Properties window is used to set colors scale values text etc and to assign the data value to be displayed by the component When a display component is linked to a data value the value will be automatically updated on
33. 3 25 42 75 1 101 279 1414 12 68 24 75 75 2 25 42 75 2 101 279 1415 12 68 24 77 75 4 25 49 75 1 101 279 1416 12 68 24 77 75 4 25 55 75 2 101 279 1417 12 68 24 78 75 4 25 42 75 2 101 279 1418 12 68 24 80 75 3 25 35 75 2 ASCII with Array IDs As Stored NOTE This format is ASCII with Array Identifiers Each data value is preceded by an identifier indicating its position in the array This format requires the most disk space on the computer and can be difficult to use in some data analysis packages An example of this format is 01 0101 02 0279 03 1413 04 12 68 05 24 75 06 075 3 07 25 42 08 075 1 01 0101 02 0279 03 1414 04 12 68 05 24 75 06 075 2 07 25 42 08 075 2 01 0101 02 0279 03 1415 04 12 68 05 24 77 06 075 4 07 25 49 08 075 1 01 0101 02 0279 03 1416 04 12 68 05 24 77 06 075 4 07 25 55 08 075 2 01 0101 02 0279 03 1417 04 12 68 05 24 78 06 075 4 07 25 42 08 075 2 01 0101 02 0279 03 1418 04 12 68 05 24 80 06 075 3 07 25 35 08 075 2 This format is also ambiguous for arrays of 100 or more data values It is therefore not recommended unless sending the raw data directly to a printer When this option is used the software does not perform any decoding on the data in the card or module Data are read out of the module and written to disk as it is 8 bit data If data has been stored from a datalogger in a binary format this option writes the data to disk in the same format This is the most compact format
34. A quick look at the columns of data is provided in the Data Preview group box Highlight the column with the year month day and from the Column Data Format group box select the Date option From the drop down list box to the right of this option select the YMD format To complete the import select the Finish button This screen lets you select each column and set column data Format the Data Format General General converts numeric values to numbers date Text values to dates and all remaining values to text 9 Date z Do not import column Skip Data preview WMD Genera General General Genera TO CR10T FiveSecond RECNBR aLe 31 45 mji6 31 50 Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish As imported the Date and Time fields have a quotation mark in the field TOACI1 __ CR10T FiveSecond J f TMSTAMP RECNBR counter SineOut IntTemp_C BattVolt Appendix E Importing Files Into Excel The quotation marks can be removed by using Excel s Search and Replace feature From the Excel menu select Edit Replace In the Find What field type in a quotation mark Leave the Replace With field blank and select the Replace All button Replace 21x Find what _ Replace with Close Replace Search By Rows Match case Ere J Find entire cells only eplace Al If headers have been imported with the data the column headings will be off by
35. ASCII 229 Comma Separated ASCII blank or any character except numeral or space Field Formatted blank or double quotation marks Only display lines with bad data Outputs only those arrays containing one or more Out of Range elements Ifa report is generated an asterisk precedes the Out of Range value in the RPT file Trigger on Stop condition Changes the meaning of Stop Condition to trigger Time Series processing output The Stop Condition is included in the Time Series processing if it satisfies the Copy line If the Trigger on Stop Condition is selected a Time Series output will occur each time the Stop Condition is met See Select line elements Section 10 3 3 2 Match files This option compares two files of the same data If good data exists in one and not the other question marks then Split will fill the OUTPUT file with the good data This is used to get a more complete record from an error ridden file e g one recorded at freezing temperatures by reading a tape twice and running both files through Split For the Match files option to produce a correct Output File the differences between the two Input Files can only be question marks Both files must have the same Start Condition or the beginning of both files must be the same Transpose file Transposes the rows and columns of the input file Only one Input File can be transposed at a time and no Select options can be specified A maximum of 26 arrays
36. Axis Settings 2x Scales IV Automatic M Zuto henge Maximum 85 1 WV Auto Change Minimum 6 999 Change Desired Increment 0 T Inverted T Logarithmic IV Visible X Allows you to set the number of points that are displayed across the width of the graph Select the arrow to the right of this field to invoke a drop down list box to select the number of points Data Labels Feature Data Labels allow you to get the exact numeric value and timestamp for a data point on the graph Click a data point to display a data label for that point One data label is displayed for each trace on the graph Zoom Feature The Zoom feature allows you to zoom in on a particular area of a graph by holding the left mouse button and dragging the mouse cursor from left to right over the area to be zoomed To return to normal view click the Zoom Cancel button or hold the mouse button and drag the cursor from right to left SN Returns a zoomed graph to normal view You can use the scroll bar at the bottom of the graph to scroll forward or backward in time 11 6 Section 11 View 11 5 Printing Options All printing is done through the Print Preview screen Bring up the screen by clicking the Print Preview button Print Preview for the Data Panel will display the pages of text as they will be printed You can view any of the pages and select the pages you want to print 11 5 1 Printing Text To print nume
37. Cursor on Parameter lt Ctrl gt Left Arrow Move Instruction 1 Tab left Cursor on Parameter or Move from Input Location label to Input Location number 8 13 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog 8 14 8 1 2 1 Editing Comments Instructions and Expressions 8 1 2 2 Cut Copy NOTE To edit Comments Expressions and Instruction parameters move the cursor to the appropriate text and retype it To delete an instruction when the cursor is somewhere within the instruction select Edit Delete Instruction or press lt Shift gt Del An instruction or block of instructions can also be selected and deleted with the delete key The entire instruction must be selected or an error message will be returned Paste and Clipboard Options Edit Cut Edit Copy and Edit Paste allow sections of the program to be moved or copied to another area of the program or between programs Edit Show Clipboard shows the contents of the clipboard You cannot move copy delete or comment out protected text Tables Execution Intervals or partial instructions To move copy or delete an Instruction the entire instruction including all of the parameters must be selected Cutting and pasting between datalogger programs should only be between programs for the same datalogger type Instructions and parameters may differ between dataloggers The compiler will catch many of these errors however this may be at the expense of much
38. Deviation The Allowed Clock Deviation field is used to specify the number of seconds the datalogger s clock can differ from the server s before the server resets the datalogger s clock NOTE 5 2 6 RFBase NOTE Section 5 Setup The Allowed Clock Deviation setting will prevent a manual clock set from being carried out if the difference between the datalogger s and server s clocks is less than the specified deviation The RF base modem acts as a gateway device that provides RF communication with the remote RF modems connected to dataloggers at the field site This option is not selected for RF400 radios Hardware Tab Communications Enabled Before communications can take place all devices in the chain must have the Communications Enabled box checked When this box is selected communication to the RF base is enabled Maximum Baud Rate Select the arrow to the right of this field to choose a maximum baud rate for communication with this device Note that the actual rate of communication may be limited by the capability of other devices in the communications chain 5 2 7 RFRemote The RF modem has only a Hardware tab Many of its settings are similar to the Hardware tabs for the other devices Communications Enabled Before communications can take place all devices in the chain must have the Communications Enabled box checked When this box is selected communication to the RF modem is enabled Address The hardware
39. Editing functions are available from the Input Location Editor s Edit menu and a hot key Insert lt F2 gt Inserts blank Input Locations This is used to provide space for new input labels between existing labels This automatically changes the Input Location numbers for all of the labels that are after the inserted location Delete lt F3 gt Deletes the Input Location label flags number of reads and writes and block information for a designated location number Wherever the datalogger program references a deleted location label the Input Location s number automatically becomes 0 Move lt F4 gt Moves the Input Location to a different number This may change several Input Location numbers Toggle Manual lt F5 gt Allows the programmer to manually toggle a location as in use This is used for burst mode indexed loops or other situations where it s not clear to Edlog that the locations are being written to Input Locations not marked as read write or manual are deleted by the Optimize command Optimize lt F6 gt Deletes Input Locations that aren t read written to or marked as Manual Optimize tries to reduce the total number of locations used by moving existing Input Location labels to fill in unused locations This might change several Input Location numbers Any changes in location number made by the Optimize command are reflected in the Edlog program Insert Block lt F7 gt Inserts and labels a
40. FSL file is 11 1 Section 11 View NOTE associated with a data file View uses information from the file to provide label names for the Data Panel column headings and Chart Panel traces For more information refer to Section 11 2 3 on FSL files Table Oriented ASCII TOA files do not use FSL files The data labels for each column of data is included as part of the data file View can be run as a stand alone program by double clicking the View exe file in Windows Explorer 11 2 2 Opening Other Types of Files To open a file that is not a data file e g DLD CSI PTI FSL LOG CRS or CR9 press the E icon or select File Open As Text from the menu Files opened in this mode are not processed for time stamps and thus cannot be graphed or displayed in the tabular format A file opened in this mode can be viewed only in its original format or in hex mode The Array Selection Array Definitions Tab options and Graph View options do not work This mode is most often used to open files other than data files or to quickly open data files but without any of View s graphing or time stamping capabilities In Text Mode data can be copied to the Windows clipboard and pasted into other applications 11 2 3 Final Storage Label FSL Files A final storage label FSL file is created by Edlog when an array based datalogger program is compiled It provides information about the output tables in the program and the labels
41. PROM Output Interval The output interval is the interval in which the datalogger writes data to Final Storage The output interval is defined by Instruction 84 in Edlog for table based dataloggers Output Processing Writing to final storage memory a sample or summary statistic of data measurements Output processing options include sending a sample average maximum minimum total or wind vector of data to Final Storage Each Output Processing data value is kept in a separate location within the datalogger This allows multiple output processing for each measurement For example you can average air temperature over a 60 second interval a one hour interval and a 24 hour interval Appendix A Glossary of Terms Overrun Errors Overrun errors occur when the actual program execution time exceeds the execution interval This causes program executions to be skipped When an overrun error occurs the Table Overrun parameter in the datalogger s status table is incremented by 1 Overruns This entry in the status table provides the number of table overruns that have occurred A table overrun occurs when the datalogger has insufficient time between execution intervals to complete one pass through the program This counter is incremented with each table overrun P Packet a unit of information sent between two BMP devices that are communicating Each packet can contain data messages programming etc Usually contains addressing an
42. Port of a PC Storage Module standard serial FIGURE 13 2 2 Connecting the Storage Module to a PC using an SC532 Interface If your computer is fitted with a PC card reader supporting Card Services protocol SMS can be used to interrogate the memory card in a similar way to interrogating a card in the CSM1 MCRI Storage Module Start SMS by clicking the Stg Module button of the LoggerNet toolbar The first time you use the program it will show the screen for the CSM1 MCRI1 Card Storage Module as in the screen in Figure 13 3 13 2 1 The Setup Screen The setup screen shown in Figure 13 2 3 is used to set the Communications COM Port and Baud Rate before communications between the module and computer are established 13 3 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS je SMS M E File Options Data Tools Help SM192 5M716 PE Card SM4M SM16M StatusBox COM Port Setup Ss Card Pointers _Dan Free Space eeu Storage Ref Painter COMI Display Pointer C COM2 DumpPainter C COM3 C COM4 Card Values Good Pages Baud Rate Battery 19200 Error Count Programs Status Setup Programs Data 4Erase Connect Update Status G Abort This is the status line FIGURE 13 2 3 Typical SETUP Screen and StatusBox for the CSM1 MCR1 Module 13 2 2 Establishing Communications For storage modules the first step is to establish communicatio
43. SMS Data from 21X and CR7 dataloggers with older PROMs and data from non datalogger devices are stored in the Storage Module using the Print Enable mode Full details of this storage method can be found in the SM192 716 Instruction Manual Baud Rate Print Enable Mode NOTE Encoding NOTE Module Address Display Pointer This is the printer baud rate when data are collected by the Printer Enable PE method For this method of collection you must ensure that the baud rate of the Storage Module and the datalogger are matched Most Campbell Scientific dataloggers have selectable baud rates You can select the baud rate using the Baud Rate setting box in the Print Enable Mode section The SM192 716 Instruction Manual gives further details The 76 800 9600 setting is the default after an SM reset In this setting the SM can automatically change from capturing data at 76 800 baud to capturing data at 9600 baud Baud rate errors baud rate mismatches between SM and datalogger cause the SM to increment its error counter and enter a low power standby state These check boxes allow you to select how data are encoded in the Print Enable method of data storage Encode ASCII is the normal default setting The Storage Module will encode incoming Printer Enable Method printable ASCII data and store it as Campbell Scientific Final Storage Format binary data No Encoding enables incoming data to be stored as is regardle
44. SineOut Test 0 48574 20020304 01 11 20 14 09 2067 68 03 107 0956 54 0 48575 20020304 01 11 30 14 09 2067 68 01 117 losg 54 0 48576 20020304 01 11 40 14 09 2067 67 99 127 0799 54 0 48577 20020304 01 11 50 141 20 67 67 96 137 o682 54 0 48578 20020304 01 12 00 14 1 20 67 67 98 147 10545 54 0 49579 20020304 01 1210 14 09 2067 6813 157 0391 54 Yv K E Disconnect Click the Connect button to connect to the LoggerNet server The dialog box shown below will be displayed If you are working on the same computer where LoggerNet is running leave the default Server Host Address as localhost The Server Port number should also be 6789 The Logon Name and Logon Password are only used with versions of LoggerNet that support security To connect to LoggerNet on another computer enter the computer network name or IP address as the Server Host Address When you click OK a list of the dataloggers in the network will be shown in the upper left window Logon Information x Server Host Address localhost Server Port 6789 Logon Name Logon Password Selecting a datalogger will list the names of the data tables or array IDs in the datalogger Note that if data collection has not been set up and enabled in the Setup Screen no data will be coming into the data cache Data Table Monitor 15 15 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide can only display and output data from the data
45. Splitr M Switch NOTE Multiple copies of Splitr can be run at one time by using the M switch This switch must appear immediately after Splitr For instance a batch file or LoggerNet task containing the lines SPLITR M Logan R SPLITR M Sinks R will open two copies of Splitr and process the two files simultaneously When using the M switch in a batch file under Windows NT you must begin each line of the batch file that runs an instance of Splitr with the start command Otherwise NT will wait until the first Splitr command has finished before proceeding to the next Section 11 View Q The View screen provides a way to look at the data LoggerNet collected from the dataloggers It will open data files DAT PRN CSV saved in a variety of formats including files from array based and table based dataloggers View can also open other CSI file types DLD CSI PTI FSL LOG CRS CR9 Data can be viewed numerically and up to two fields can be plotted on a graph Both numeric data and graphs can be sent to a printer Graphs can be saved to disk in BMP WMF or EMF format 11 1 Overview The View button on the LoggerNet Toolbar brings up the file view program This program can be used to look at any data file collected by LoggerNet from dataloggers and storage devices regardless of the format comma separated table oriented ASCII binary or printable Once a file is opened data can be printed g
46. The most important use of Data Table Monitor is to see what records are being stored in the data cache and to diagnose suspected data cache problems Data Table Monitor gets all the data available from the data cache that matches the export conditions As the server collects new records from the datalogger they are automatically displayed and sent to the data file This continues until Data Table Monitor is closed or data export is stopped One caution about the data file created by Data Table Monitor there are no limits to size or longevity If you plan to use the export to file feature on a regular basis make sure to either restart Data Table Monitor which overwrites the exported file or delete the files periodically The data export can easily be restarted by clicking the Start button This will delete the old file and start a new one To start Data Table Monitor open Windows Explorer and got to the Program Files CampbellSci LoggerNet directory Double click the Tablemon2 exe file The utility will start with a screen similar to the one shown below Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide LoggerNet Data Table Monitor loj xj Broker ID Table Name CR10T Active 19 10S5econd CR23X_2 Active 20 15Minute CR10x Active 21 ErrorLog CRS10TD Active 22 InLocs CR5000 Active 23 OneMinute BirchCreek Active 24 Status CRS000_2 Active 25 TimeSet Statistics Statistics 26 File Mark Record No Time Stamp Batt olt IntlempC TCTempF Count
47. Undo and Redo The device map is not saved or entered in LoggerNet until you click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen You can build a complete network and set up the configurations for all of the devices without applying However it is a 5 3 Section 5 Setup good idea to build the network map in stages and periodically apply changes If there is a problem with the computer any changes that have been applied have been saved and will not have to be entered again Changing the network map or any of the device settings enables the Undo button Clicking the Undo button will roll back each change in reverse order to the originally saved network and settings If you undo a change and really wanted to keep it you can click the Redo button and restore the change Once the changes to the network map and device settings have been applied they can no longer be rolled back using the Undo button Clicking the Cancel button before changes are applied will undo all of the changes to the network map and settings and restore the saved configuration 5 1 3 Renaming Network Devices The names of all of the devices can be changed as desired Rename a device by selecting the device and either clicking again with the left mouse button on the selected device clicking the Rename Device button or going to the menu item Edit Rename The name of the selected device will change to a text edit box and the new device name can be entered Valid name
48. While data collection is in progress Stop Collection will stop the collection This might be needed if the datalogger has a lot of uncollected data and it would take too long to get it all These functions are available by clicking the buttons or from the Options menu 7 2 5 Server Logs 7 2 6 View I O Server Logs brings up the LoggerNet log message viewer The windows can be resized and the scrolling display can be paused by clicking the Pause check box There are three logs kept by LoggerNet that track the operation of the server communications with the dataloggers and data collection A brief description of these logs and their messages is found in section 7 3 A more detailed description of the messages and their meanings is found in Appendix D Selecting a root level device and clicking the View I O button or selecting Options View I O brings up a Low Level Input Output monitor for examining serial communications between LoggerNet and a root level device Both hexadecimal and ASCH representations of the serial communications with a timestamp are seen in the log message window The R and T at the beginning of each line represent a message received or transmitted by LoggerNet The scrolling display can be paused by clicking the Pause check box A description of the Low Level I O log is outlined in Section 7 4 7 2 7 Task Status Task Status brings up a window similar to the one shown below to monitor the status and operation of
49. XP this number is about 5000 For most operations this should be more than enough to cover the open applications that use sockets One situation that does cause problems is using the IPPorts to communicate with dataloggers where the socket is being opened and closed quickly For example if you have 20 stations on IPPorts and you do normal data collection every 5 seconds 20 new sockets are created every 5 seconds The normal lifetime of the created socket is about 2 minutes leaving over 500 active sockets at a time If there are other applications that use sockets it is possible to exceed the allowed number of sockets To work around this problem either slow down the rate of data collection or keep the stations on line There is an application called Managecomms exe in the LoggerNet program file directory The documentation for this program is also included in an Adobe Acrobat PDF file Use this program to maintain an active connection to all of the stations so the sockets are open all the time Note that if you are using Windows 95 98 or ME the number of sockets defaults to about 100 Socket Error Messages When you get an error message that says Socket Error and a number check the chart below for the type of error that occurred and what to do about it Note that these error messages can show up either in pop up error boxes or as part of the LoggerNet Communications log Socket Error Number 10013 10024 10047 10055 10058
50. all integration times and settling times Processing will occur concurrent with this time so the sum of measure time and process time is not the time required in the scan instruction SkippedScan Number of skipped scans that have occurred while running the current program SlowProcTime Time required to process the current slow scan If the user has slow scans then this variable becomes an array with a value for the system slow scan and each of the user s scans MaxSlowProcTime The maximum Time required to process the current slow scan If the user has slow scans then this variable becomes an array with a value for the system slow scan and each of the user s scans LastSlowScan The last time that this slow scan executed If the user has slow scans then this variable becomes an array with a value for the system slow scan and each of the user s scans SkippedSlowScan The number of scans that have been skipped in this slow sequence If the user has slow scans then this variable becomes an array with a value for the system slow scan and each of the user s scans MeasureOps This is the number of task sequencer opcodes required to do all measurements in the system This value includes the Calibration opcodes compile time and the system slow sequence opcodes WatchdogErrors The number of Watchdog errors that have occurred while running this program This value can be reset from the keyboard by going to status and scrolling down to the va
51. all other arrays are hidden from view In the Array Selection list there are two symbols that can precede the arrays displayed in the list The check mark indicates the array is in the FSL file and is found in the data file being viewed The X indicates the array is in the FSL file but is not found in the data file If no symbol precedes the array the array is in the data file but is not listed in the FSL file 11 3 Section 11 View NOTE Array Selection only applies to array based dataloggers CR510 CR10X CR23X Table based dataloggers only store data for one table in each data file CR5000 CR9000 CR200 and CRxxx TD dataloggers store data in a table based format 11 3 2 Text View Options NOTE By default the Data Panel information is displayed in ASCII format comma separated printable ASCII and TOA files are displayed in the format they were saved to disk binary files are interpreted into ASCII format Press the hexadecimal button on the toolbar to display the text as hexadecimal characters This button is a toggle so if you press it again the display will return to the default view You can also display the text as hexadecimal characters by selecting View Hex from the menu Data displayed on the Data Panel can be changed to an adjustable tabular format by pressing the tab button 2 or selecting View Expand Tabs The tab button is a toggle that turns the tabular display on or off The column widths of the
52. and analyze data collected by LoggerNet into a file The applications and functionality of each product are briefly described below 1 1 1 LoggerNet Launching the Toolbar automatically starts the LoggerNet software server Some of the buttons on the Toolbar launch applications that connect to the server and allow you to set up the network or view the collected data Other buttons launch stand alone applications to perform other functions such as program editing This software design allows for easier future customizations 1 1 Section 1 Introduction and new features since the core communications software does not have to change It also allows simultaneous access by many computers to the same data without burdening the dataloggers with redundant communications demands The LoggerNet applications include a set of tools for you to work with the datalogger network and retrieve the data e Network configuration tools allow you to define and configure the dataloggers in the network how they are connected to the computer and what data should be collected You can also connect in real time to work with individual dataloggers These tools include the Setup window the Connect window and the Status window e Editors allow the creation and modification of datalogger programs The editors include Edlog and CRBasic e Other applications allow you to view and process the data collected from the dataloggers These include the file viewer Vie
53. and have a different memory allocation structure B 1 1 CR10X TD Family Table Based Dataloggers CR510 TD CRIOT CR10X TD and CR23X TD table based dataloggers store data from different intervals in different final storage tables Final storage tables are made up of records and fields Each row in a table represents a record and each column represents a field The number of fields in a record is determined by the output processing instructions in the datalogger program that follow the Data Table output instruction P84 Output Table refer to your datalogger user s manual for more information The total number of fields for each table will be the number of output processing instructions multiplied by the number of values stored by each of the output instructions The number of records to be kept in a table before the oldest data is overwritten can be fixed by the user or left for the datalogger to determine automatically With automatic allocation the datalogger tries to set the sizes of automatically allocated tables such that all of the tables will fill up at about the same time Once the sizes of the tables are determined the datalogger allocates available final storage to these tables Note that the tables are allocated by size with the smallest tables first For dataloggers with extended flash memory any tables that will not fit in SRAM memory are allocated to flash memory Flash memory is allocated in 64 K blocks therefore even a very
54. are also provided to view and set datalogger ports and flags along with the data in settable variables For graphical displays that can show historical data such as line charts RTMC will bring in and display the historical data available in LoggerNet s data storage RTMC also provides expressions to condition the collected data for display e g convert temperature in Celsius to Fahrenheit RTMC creates files that can be used with RTMC Run Time on another computer that is connected to the LoggerNet computer by a local area network LAN or the Internet 12 1 Overview NOTE Real Time Monitor and Control is an application that allows the user to quickly create graphical display screens that monitor real time data control set points and toggle ports and flags RTMC can combine data from multiple dataloggers on a single display As LoggerNet collects data from the dataloggers the displays in RTMC are automatically updated RTMC has two operating modes Development and Run Time The Development mode allows you to create and edit a real time graphic display screen to display the data collected from the dataloggers Once the screen is built and saved as a file the screen can be displayed using RTMC Run Time This allows graphic display screens to run on other computers with just the RTMC Run Time program Scheduled data collection must be enabled in LoggerNet or RTMC s display will never update 12 2 Development Mode RTMC Develop
55. are transposed per pass of Split To transpose a file containing more than 26 arrays several passes are required Change the Output file name and Start Condition for each pass Split may then be used to merge the multiple files No FF Suppresses form feeds and page breaks in RPT and HTML files When this option is selected a header appears on the first page only This 10 41 Section 10 Split option is used for printing reports on continuous feed paper or for displaying HTM files in a browser Break arrays This option breaks up the Output Array into new arrays that are 1 elements in each new array Split automatically assigns an array ID number equal to the first element in the first array Only one Input File may be specified Start Stop and Copy Conditions may be specified but the Select line must be left blank NOTE The Break Arrays function works only for array based data It is typically used when processing data from burst measurements Array ID 10 10 10 10 42 No Summary When producing reports that include time series processing based on an interval sometimes that interval will not divide evenly into the number of lines in the data file that is being processed For example you may be processing one minute data on a five minute interval and the data file has 103 lines thus there are 3 lines of data left over at the end of the report By default the summary average total maximum etc depending upo
56. associated with each output instruction The information in this file is used by View for column headers and to assign date and time values To add or change an FSL file association press the file open icon to the right of the FSL File field and select the desired FSL file View uses information from the FSL file to provide label names for the Data Panel column headings and Graph Panel traces After choosing a data file from File Open View will handle the FSL association in one of the following ways 1 Ifan FSL file exists that has the same name as the data file View automatically uses that FSL file 2 Ifno FSL file exists with the same name View will prompt you to select an FSL file If you choose to select an FSL file another file dialog box appears so you can select the FSL file If you choose not to select an FSL file View will still open the file Selecting an FSL file allows column headers and time stamps to be displayed 3 If you have opened a file before View keeps track of what option you chose for the FSL the first time it was opened and opens it with that FSL option It keeps this information for the last 50 files 11 3 Data Panel File Open Options Printing Options NOTE Array Selection Section 11 View When viewing numeric data in the Data Panel if more than one array ID exists in the data file View will display the header for the last array that has been selected with the mouse pointer
57. before the popup hint appears and the background color of the popup hint This is also used to set the number of spaces used when the CRBasic Editor automatically indents an instruction Editor Syntax Highlighting Parameter Hint Box Parameter Hint Color V Show Parameter Hints Delay In Milliseconds 1000 p Auto Indenting Number of Spaces OK Cancel Help 9 8 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor The Syntax Highlighting tab sets up the appearance of different text elements in the program using different font styles and colors You can customize the appearance of the text by giving normal text keywords comments operators and numbers each a different font style and color to make the program easier to read and edit Text colors and styles can be disabled by clearing the Syntax Highlighting check box Editor Options xj Editor Syntax Highlighting J Syntax Highlighting Normal Text T Bold Cancel Instruction Panel Preferences allows the user to define how the insert function will behave in the program Italic O Instruction Panel Options Insert AtCursor Whole Line On Inserting V Edit Parameters At Cursor Whole Line When At Cursor is selected inserted instructions will appear at the cursor location When Whole Line is selected a new line will be created for the instruction Note that the At Cursor o
58. block of Input Locations and marks them as Manual The locations are labeled in the same manner as reps Esc The escape key closes the Input Location Editor and updates the label assignments in the program 8 2 4 Input Location Anomalies In most instances Edlog will automatically assign Input Locations for locations which are generated by the datalogger program An example of this is Edlog s handling of Input Locations for the REPS parameter Though only one Input Location is specified if REPS is greater than 1 additional Input Locations are created by Edlog There are certain instructions that generate multiple Input Locations for which Edlog does not automatically allocate Input Locations The user should manually allocate these locations in the Input Location Editor These are e Instruction 15 Serial I O with Control Port e Instruction 23 Burst Measurement e Instruction 49 Spatial Maximum e Instruction 50 Spatial Minimum e Instruction 54 Block Move 8 19 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog e Instruction 75 Histogram e Instruction 80 Store Area e Instruction 81 Rainflow Histogram e Instruction 100 TDR Measurement e Instruction 101 SDM INT8 e Instruction 105 SDI 12 Recorder e Instruction 106 SDI 12 Sensor e Instruction 113 SDM SIO4 e Instruction 118 SDM CAN e Instruction 119 TDR100 e Instruction 120 Data Transfer to TGT e Instruction 127 HDR Goes Status and Diagno
59. cache Data Table Monitor displays and outputs all the data points from an array or table Click the Start button to bring up the Start Advise Options dialog This dialog gives you choices about which records to display and the data file in which to store them Start Advise Options xi Start Option Jat newest z Start file mark Start record number fo 0 Start offset 0 Begin date Offset from newest fi sec onds Order option Real time Se Export file C Campbellsci LoggerNet20 i Ok Cancel Start Option This selects the starting point for the data to be displayed and output to the file 15 16 At Record This option allows a selection of starting position based on the file mark and record number An entry of 0 in both fields will get all of the data in the data cache At Time This option allows a selection of the starting position based on the timestamp in the data The time and date are set in the Begin Date field All of the records available after this timestamp are output At Newest This option will set the starting position to the last record stored in the data cache This last record and any future records stored will be output After Newest This option will set the starting position to be the next record stored in the data cache Output begins with the next record stored in the data cache No historical records will be output Relative to Newest This option starts from the most re
60. cells and click the Options button The Cell Options dialog box allows you to set up how the data should appear and set visual alarms Display sets up the appearance of the numbers being displayed Number of Decimal Places to Display sets the number of digits to display to the right of the decimal point This can be used to show greater precision or present a cleaner appearance depending on the data need Set Data Justification sets whether the data will be displayed at the right or left side of the display box Update Interval controls how often LoggerNet will get updated Input Locations or Public table values from the datalogger if those fields are not part of scheduled data collection Setting this interval applies to all fields on the Numeric Display There are limits to the number of Input Locations that can be brought over from some of the dataloggers Older array based dataloggers can bring in 62 input location values at a time The newer array based dataloggers can bring in up to 500 input locations The CR10X TD family of dataloggers is limited to a maximum of 500 input locations by packet size and record format CR5000 and CR9000 dataloggers don t have practical limits for the number of Public Variables that can be requested or displayed Both array based and CR5000 9000 dataloggers will retrieve only the requested input locations or public variables CR10X TD type dataloggers must retrieve the whole input locations r
61. datalogger on this port Internet IP Address In this field enter the TCP IP address and port through which LoggerNet will communicate with the datalogger network The address is entered in the form HH HHH Alternately a valid machine name can be entered The port is in the form of A typical entry might be 123 123 123 123 1024 When entering the IP address do not use leading zeros for the address numbers For example use 123 123 2 34 instead of 123 123 002 034 Extra Response Time In this field specify the additional time that LoggerNet should delay before terminating the communications link if there is no response from the IPPort Additional time may be needed in instances where the communications link is noisy or network traffic is heavy 5 5 Section 5 Setup NOTE LoggerNet waits a certain amount of time for a response from each device in a communications path The extra response times defined for the communications link are cumulative Therefore the amount of time spent waiting for a device to respond is the sum of all Extra Response Times defined plus the default response time for each device in the link Add the minimum time necessary since very long response times can delay other scheduled events while waiting for a device that is not responding 5 2 3 TAPIPort Telephony API NOTE The TAPI port uses the phone modems that have been installed and configured in Windows This eliminates the need
62. determined by the field width Table 10 3 3 Column Widths option If the width is eleven or greater the maximum number is 99 999 999 for widths from eight through ten the maximum is 99 999 for widths less than eight the maximum is 9999 If a column is not large enough for a value it will be stored as a 9 999 99 999 or 99 999 999 based on the column width When Date and Edate are used within other functions they must be used with the older format Date doy y and Edate doy y instead of using the extended date functions as shown in the table For example AVG 1 Date 2 2002 0 The decimal is needed to indicate a fixed number Numbers without the decimal are interpreted as element IDs 10 23 Section 10 Split 10 3 6 3 Mathematical Functions Details and Examples TABLE 10 3 6 Split Operators and Math Functions OPERATORS OPERATOR PRECEDENCE ORDER 3 high 1 low raise to the power 3 Modulo divide of x by y 2 multiplication division 2 addition subtraction 1 EXAMPLES OF SYNTAX FOR MATHEMATICAL OPERATORS 3 5 multiply element 3 by element 5 3 5 divide element 3 by element 5 3 5 8 10 same as 3 8 4 9 5 10 3 5 add element 3 to element 5 3 5 subtract element 5 from element 3 3 9 5 8 7 10 same as 3 8 9 7 5 10 3 2 0 multiply element 3 by a fixed number 2 2 3 0 raise element 2 to the third power MATH FUNCTIONS Abs x Absolute value of x Arctan x Arc tangent of x in degrees Cos x
63. e S Status Indicates that the identified operation has successfully completed e W Warning Indicates that the server has attempted to retry the operation with the identified device e F Fault Indicates that the identified operation has failed and that the server has stopped retrying Description text providing more details about the event Communications Status Log Example D 18 3 6 2002 12 06 00 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 00 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 00 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 00 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 00 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 00 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 00 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 00 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 05 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 05 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 07 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 07 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 08 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 08 PM 3 6 2002 12 06 08 PM IPPort_2 S opening 192 168 8 129 3001 IPPort_2 S Provider opened IPPort_2 S Open succeeded IPPort_2 S Device dialed ComPort_2 S opening comm port com2 38400 ComPort_2 S Provider opened 38400 ComPort_2 S Open succeeded ComPort_2 S Device dialed CR23X_2 S Classic CmdA CR23X_2 S Classic CmdClockSet CR510TD W Unable to locate serial synch byte CR510TD S Serial packet 2 exchanged CR510TD S Serial packet 3 exchanged CR510TD S Serial packet 0 exchanged CR510TD S BMP1 packet received Message Text Serial packet X exchanged Classic Cmd BMP 1 packet received RPC packet exchanged Datalogger did not respond to en
64. expression Tdiff Temp TC_Avg 1 1 Temp TC_Avg 1 101 could be used in the example program to calculate the change in the 10 ms average temperature of the first thermocouple between the most recent average and the one that occurred a second 100 x 10 ms earlier 9 22 NOTE Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor In addition to accessing the data actually output in a table there are some pseudo fields related to the data table that can be retrieved Tablename record 1 n the record number of the record output n records ago Tablename output 1 1 1 if data were output to the table the last time the table was called 0 if data were not output Tablename timestamp m n element m of the timestamp output n records ago where timestamp 1 n microseconds since 1990 timestamp 2 n microseconds into the current year timestamp 3 n microseconds into the current month timestamp 4 n microseconds into the current day timestamp 5 n microseconds into the current hour timestamp 6 n microseconds into the current minute timestamp 7 n microseconds into the current second Tablename eventend 1 1 is only valid for a data table using the DataEvent instruction Tablename eventend 1 1 1 if the last record of an event occurred the last time the table was called 0 if the data table did not store a record or if it is in the middle of an event The values of Tablename output 1 1 and Tablename eventend
65. fields in the data cache it will be displayed on the graph Note that Input Location or Public table data does not have history stored in the data cache therefore no historical data will be displayed To delete data fields from the Graphical Display select the data fields on the Graphical Display and press the Delete button Existing data fields can be replaced by adding new data fields to the same cells 6 5 1 3 Graph Options To customize the Graphical Display press the Options button The Graph Display Options dialog box has four tabs Scaling Time Display Visual Display and Export 6 5 1 3 1 Graph Scaling Options The Graph Scaling Options are used to set up the scale for the right and left axes The axes can be scaled automatically fixed to a specific range or set to Power of Ten Scaling The left and right y axes can be set independently Data values can be set to graph relative to the right or left axis Section 6 5 1 3 5 The scales are only shown on the graph if there are data fields linked with them Section 6 Connect Graph Display Options 2x Scaling Time Display Visual Display Export Left Y Axis Right Y Axis Scaling Options Scaling Options Automatic Scaling Automatic Scaling Power of Ten Scaling Power of Ten Scaling Custom Scaling Custom Scaling Power of Ten Power of Ten C Oto10 C 0toi0 10to10 10to10 Custom Scaling Custom S
66. file power up and compilation settings and PakBus address and router settings When the new program is downloaded to the datalogger and compiled the settings will take affect These settings are accessed using Edlog s Options menu 8 4 1 Program Security Setting security in the datalogger allows you to restrict access to certain functions which helps ensure the program or data are not altered Security is unlocked in the datalogger when upon attempting to connect LoggerNet sends the code entered in the Setup window 8 4 1 1 Setting Passwords in the DLD NOTE In the Program Security Dialog Box there is a field for three levels of security Enter a non zero number in the appropriate field to enable security at the desired security level This number is used as a password to unlock the associated security level when needed If you choose to set level 02 level 01 must also be set Likewise if you set level 03 levels 01 and 02 must be set CR7 and 21X dataloggers have only 1 level of security 8 4 1 2 Disabling Passwords Passwords of 0000 disable the program security When you disable level 01 you also disable program security for levels 02 and 03 Similarly disabling level 02 disables level 03 All passwords are set to 0000 upon power up of the datalogger When the program is run security is enabled 8 4 2 Final Storage Area 2 The ring memory for CR10 CR10X CR510 and CR23X dataloggers can be divided into two final storag
67. in pixels of the run time display screen Default is 640 x 480 Change Server Connection allows you to connect to a LoggerNet server on the same or a remote PC The server name is the network name or IP address of the computer where LoggerNet is running If you are connecting to a version of LoggerNet that supports server security and security is enabled you will need to enter the username and password LoggerNet 2 1 does not support security The port number should always be 6789 Enable Connection Management tells LoggerNet to try and maintain an active communications link with the dataloggers for which data is being displayed by RTMC This might be beneficial if you are trying to display data in RTMC with a fast update rate over a communications link that takes time to establish such as a phone modem Rename Project changes the name of the project as shown on the component tree Screen Menu Screen Menu options work with the tabbed screens in the project The Screen Menu is also available by right clicking any blank area of the workspace Screen Properties brings up the dialog to choose the background image for the current screen Add Screen adds a new screen to the project Each screen appears as a tabbed page on the display When the project is run the user can click the tab to bring each screen to the front Delete Screen removes the current screen from the project If there are components on the screen they will also be
68. interval is the fastest that data measurements can be updated and data stored Depending on how the program is written sensor readings may occur at specified intervals and not on every program execution e Table Storage Interval or Output Data Interval Most data tables or final storage arrays are set up to store data records at regular intervals The data record consists of a record number and time stamp followed by the output processing i e sample average min max etc of the input location or variable values This interval must be a multiple of the program execution interval or storage intervals will be skipped For example if the program execution interval is 5 seconds and the table Section 5 Setup interval is set to 3 seconds there will only be an entry in the table every 15 seconds The interval specified determines the fastest rate the server can collect new data that is stored to the datalogger s final storage memory 5 4 1 1 2 Data Collection Setting Intervals The collection interval at which the LoggerNet server requests new data from the datalogger is set up on the Schedule tab for that datalogger in the Setup Screen Section 5 2 5 2 If the collection interval is faster than the rate at which data is being stored to a data table by the datalogger program data will not be collected every call but only at intervals when new data is available If data collection is enabled for input location data Inlocs on CR1
69. is enabled for communication PakBusPort is Dialed The computer running the LoggerNet server is included as a PakBus device in the network Because of the nature of broadcast messages within the Pakbus network the computer can keep the PakBus port open and therefore can listen for transmissions from other PakBus devices In most instances keeping this port open is not an issue However if there are other hardware or software components on your computer that must have access to the physical port to which the PakBus port is attached you will want to check the PakBus Port is Dialed box so that LoggerNet opens the port only when communication is initiated as part of scheduled data collection or manually by the user This way the port remains available for other uses except when it is in use by LoggerNet Maximum Baud Rate Select the arrow to the right of this field to choose a maximum baud rate for communication with this datalogger Note that the actual rate of communication may be limited by the capability of other devices in the communications chain Maximum Time on Line A time limit can be set for the length of time LoggerNet will stay connected to the datalogger on any scheduled call Once this time limit has been exceeded communications with the device will be terminated Setting the time to zero will disable this time limit This setting should be set to zero for most communications links other than phone modems 5 7 Secti
70. is correct choose Next or choose the Data Type that best describes your data riginal data type Choose the file type that best describes your data Delimited Characters such as commas or tabs separate each field Fi th Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each field Start import at row fi File Origin Windows ANSI e Preview of file C Campbellsci LoggerNet CR10T_Five5Second dat TOACI1 CR10T FiveSecond THSTAHP RECNBR counter SineOut IntTemp_C Bat 2002 01 17 16 31 45 19787 340 0 342 23 83 13 96 Cancel lt Back ne gt Finish E 4 Appendix E Importing Files Into Excel Step 2 of 3 From the Delimiters group box select Comma and Space The Comma option directs Excel to place each data value which is separated by a comma into a separate column The Space option will separate the Date and the Time into two columns From the Text Qualifiers list box select None Select the Next button Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 zix This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see how your text is affected in the preview below elimiters A r Tab I Semicolon MV Comma a M space I other Text Qualifier inone x ata preview CR10T FiveSecond RECNBR counter SineOut 231 19787 340 22 62 Cancel lt Back next gt Finish Appendix E Importing Files Into Excel E 6 Step 3 of 3
71. is the size in the number of scans of a buffer in RAM that holds the raw results of measurements Using a buffer allows the processing in the scan to at times lag behind the measurements without affecting the measurement timing see the scan instruction in the CR5000 help for more details Count is the number of scans to make before proceeding to the instruction following NextScan A count of 0 means to continue looping forever or until ExitScan In the example the scan is 1 millisecond three scans are buffered and the measurements and output continue indefinitely 9 4 Numerical Entries In addition to entering regular base 10 numbers there are 3 additional ways to represent numbers in a program scientific notation binary and hexadecimal Table 9 4 1 TABLE 9 4 1 Formats for Entering Numbers in CRBasic Format Example Value Standard 6 832 6 832 Scientific notation 5 67E 8 5 67X10 Binary amp B1101 13 Hexadecimal amp HFF 255 The binary format makes it easy to visualize operations where the ones and zeros translate into specific commands For example a block of ports can be set with a number the binary form of which represents the status of the ports 1 high 0 low To set ports 1 3 4 and 6 high and 2 5 7 and 8 low the number is amp B00101101 The least significant bit is on the right and represents port 1 This is much easier to visualize than entering 72 the decimal equivalent 9 19 Section 9 Datalogge
72. letter 1 Put the installation CD in the CD ROM drive The install application should come up automatically Skip to step 3 Ifthe install does not start then from the Windows system menu select Start Run 2 Type D Disk1 Setup exe in the Open field or use the Browse button to access the CD ROM drive and select the setup executable in the Disk folder 3 This activates the LoggerNet Installation Utility Follow the prompts on the screen to complete the installation Items are added to your computer s Start menu under Programs LoggerNet that start the Toolbar and some other selected utilities If the default directories are used LoggerNet executable files and help files are placed in the C Program Files CampbellSci LoggerNet directory The directory C CampbellSci LoggerNet is a working directory and contains the user s programs and data files along with files maintained by LoggerNet such as the binary data cache and configuration files 3 2 Allowing Remote Connections During installation you have the option of allowing or denying remote connections to the LoggerNet server This feature can be advantageous in some instances but it can also increase the vulnerability of your LoggerNet network Careful consideration should be given when deciding whether or not to allow remote connections LoggerNet is a 32 bit client server application and therefore the server can run on one computer while a client application can be run
73. limited to those in the Operator and Function list Table 8 1 1 below e Numbers and labels that appear immediately after a function must be enclosed in parentheses e Several operators and or functions can be used in one expression Operations and functions that are enclosed in parentheses are calculated first the inner most parentheses are evaluated first e To continue an expression to the next line end the first line with an underscore _ Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog TABLE 8 1 1 Operators and Functions Operators add o cosine angle in degrees Below are examples of valid expressions Zee Vee Ex es tee 2 Root SQRT ABS data avg datal data2 data3 data4 data5 5 length SQRT adj 2 opp 2 TempF TempC 1 8 32 The following section of an Edlog program uses an expression to convert temperature from Celsius to Fahrenheit Execution Interval 10 sec this instruction reads the temperature probe the output is in degrees C 1 Temperature 107 P11 01 1 REPS Channel Excitation Channel Loc TempC Mult Offset 8 9 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog the following expression converts TempC to ja temperature in degrees Fahrenheit TempF TempC 1 8 32 When this program is compiled the DLD file contains the following instructions The last 5 instructions calculate the expression 1 Temperature 107 P11 0
74. log This log file documents the state of the various transactions that occur between the LoggerNet server and devices in the datalogger network This is the most readable of the logs and contains event messages that are meaningful to most users Examples of these events are e Datalogger clock check set e Datalogger program downloads e Data collection The format and type of records in this log are strictly defined to make it possible for a software program to parse the log records Communications Status CommsX log This log file documents the quality of communications in the datalogger network Object State StateX log This log file documents the state of an object This is primarily for troubleshooting by software developers and the messages are relatively free in form Low Level I O IOXSerial Port_1 log A low level log file is associated with each root device in the datalogger network to record incoming and outgoing communications While the entire network can be monitored from a single messaging session of the transaction communications status or object state logs monitoring of the low level log is performed on a session with the root device for that log D 1 2 Enabling Log Files Use Status Monitor Edit Log Settings to enable logging of events to files If enabled the server will write log records to text files in the log file directory using the following file names depending on the log type e Trans
75. name and path for the output data file that contains the data collected from the datalogger Clicking the browse button at the right of the box will allow you to choose another directory or file name for the collected data The data from each table is stored in a separate output file Use Default File Name Checking this box will set the collected data file name to the default value which consists of the name of the station and the name of the table Included for Scheduled Collection If this box is checked the specified table is included in data collection This can be changed either by clicking the check box or double clicking the name of the table in the list File Output Option This option allows you to choose whether new data collected from the station is appended to the data file overwrites the old data in the data file or is not stored to a data file The default option is to append to the data file so the old data is not lost If the data file is used only for a real time display or such that only the last data collected is needed overwrite will replace the old data with the newly collected data If the data is only going to be used within LoggerNet for display on the Connect Screen graph or Numeric Display or for RTMC you can choose no output file and the data will only be kept in LoggerNet s internal data cache see Appendix C 2 for more about the data cache Output Format Select the format for the output fil
76. of the date or time elements in your data you can replace that part of the equation E 3 Appendix E Importing Files Into Excel with a number e g Year 2002 or for Hours Minutes and Seconds leave that part of the formula out Year 1900 365 1 Int Y ear 1901 4 Day Int T HHMM 100 24 HHMM 100 Int HHMM 100 100 60 24 Sec 60 60 24 Section of formula Y ear 1900 365 1 Int Year Delivers the number of days since the beginning of 1901 4 the 20 century through the end of last year taking into account leap years Day Adds the Julian date to the above to a fraction of a day Int THHMM 100 100 60 24 field to a fraction of a day Sec 60 60 24 Converts the seconds field in to a fraction of a day Once you have entered the formula for one cell you can apply it to multiple cells using Excel s Fill function Selecting the cells and using Format Cells can set the display format of the timestamp E 2 Table Based Data File Import Step 1 of 3 Select the Delimited option from the Original Data Type group box Using the arrow buttons to the right of the Start Import at Row field select the number of the first row of data to be imported If your data file has headers included you can import those or start the import at the first row of data typically row 3 Select the Next button Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 2 x The Text Wizard has determined that your data is Delimited If this
77. one since the date and time have been imported as two separate fields The headers can be highlighted and moved one cell to the right to correct this E 7 Appendix E Importing Files Into Excel E 8 Appendix F CoraScript F 1 CoraScript Fundamentals NOTE CoraScript is a command line interpreter that reads its commands as text from its standard input device and writes the results of those commands as text to its standard output device This style of input and output makes it possible to externally control the LoggerNet server operation using input and output redirection It also makes it possible to string together commands in scripts that can be executed from the command line The CoraScript command interpreter is started by executing the program file Cora_Cmd exe in a command prompt environment CoraScript is also available through the LoggerNet program files start menu under Tools When the script processor starts up it will output a response CoraScript 1 1 1 30 The numbers indicate the version number of the current CoraScript CoraScript is a batch processing interpreter It treats its input from the standard input device as a sequence of commands that are processed serially from the first to the last As a command is processed the results are written to the standard output device A command is defined as the text up to a semicolon The semicolon tells CoraScript that the command is complete and ready to execute
78. or a printer Split creates a parameter file filename PAR that saves all of your settings such as which data files are read what operations are performed on the data set and where the final results will be saved The parameter file may be saved and used again Input Files Section 10 3 1 must be formatted in Printable ASCII Comma Separated ASCH Field Formatted ASCII Final Storage Binary Format Table Oriented ASCII TOACH or TOAS Table Oriented Binary TOB or Raw A D data such as the results of a burst measurement Split can be used to convert a file of one format to a different format For example a Table Oriented ASCH file can be converted to the Comma Separated ASCII format used in array based datalogger data files This is useful to convert table based data files to work with applications that were written to work with array based files Output files generated by Split can be Field Formatted default Comma Separated ASCII or Printable ASCII Split lends itself to experimentation The processed data are displayed on the screen giving immediate feedback as to the effect of changes or new entries to the parameter file Split does not modify the original Input File 10 2 Getting Started The most common use of Split is to separate array data collected on a particular interval from a data file containing data output at several different intervals 10 1 Section 10 Split In the following example hourly data are s
79. or both The line color width and style for the trace are set in Cell Options Section 6 5 1 3 5 Title allows you to place a descriptive title on the graph Enter the text of the title in the text box then click the Show Title check box to make the title visible Click the Font button to choose the font style size and color for the title Section 6 Connect Graph Display Options 2 x Scaling Time Display Visual Display Export Display Options Trace Options Background Color m o renk Left Grid Color El f Points Only Right Grid Color El Both Title Environmental Station 34 Font vio Xena Daw 2 He 6 5 1 3 4 Graph Export Options Graph Export will save an image of the displayed graph to the clipboard a graphics file or will print the graph to a printer The file export can be saved either to a bitmap bmp or a windows metafile wmf format Most graphic file applications can import one or both of these formats The Margins setting provides for a border area around the graph These are specified in of the total linear measurement The size of the saved graph image depends on the size of the graph on the screen If the graph is maximized then the saved file will save the large image Graph Display Options 2 x Scaling Time Display Visual Display Export Margins 3 Print the Graph Copy to Clipboard 4 a Save to File
80. screen is connected to the datalogger The connection takes priority over other communication so other devices that share any part of the communication path will not be contacted even for scheduled data collection Max Time Online is disabled when a manual connection is established so this communications link will be active until the user disconnects or closes the Connect screen Once a connection is made to a datalogger with the Connect screen this connection takes precedence and will prevent communication with other devices sharing the same serial port or base modem To disconnect from the datalogger click the button that now reads Disconnect To select another datalogger you have to disconnect from the first one Double clicking another datalogger will disconnect from the first datalogger and select the new one without prompting You will need to click the Connect button to connect to the new datalogger If LoggerNet fails to make a connection to the datalogger it will time out and display an error message that it could not connect It will immediately attempt the connection again and will continue trying until the user clicks Cancel 6 2 Data Collection The Data Collection section of the Connect screen allows you to control some aspects of collecting data from the datalogger You can force a scheduled collection to occur or initiate a custom data collection This is also where you have access to view and set ports and flags 6
81. sees ae eeeeees 7 1 Fl Malt Sereen aE aeons edi eset el eee 7 1 7 2 Status Monitor Functions ccccecceescessceseceeeceeeceeceseceseceaecsaeenseeeeeaeeses 7 2 RZA Select COMM MS s 15 1seancevetty teenies Mateos ae AE 7 2 7 2 2 Toggle Collection OMO ffr e E E 7 5 73273 Reset DEVi onn eea i i ie e Aa EAE ER 7 6 7 2 4 Collect Now Stop Collect cccccccesscessesseesceeseeeseeeeceseenseenseesaes 7 6 T253 CLV ET LOGS a van Gans stoatiehinalemianer E a E T 7 6 LoggerNet Table of Contents TAO VIEW LO aE ah tiGe wel E titan Mi pehacepeoteaeast 7 6 TW Task Status tiy 3 05 Hanlon atin eaten seni neaiied Seek 7 6 7 2 8 Show Stations Only niccensis e ie 7 7 EA Pauise Schedul AEE Maced Sacto le taste ca eeaees 7 7 F210 LOS SE GS E E S eles 7 7 7 3 Monitoring Operational LOgS eeccescceseceseeeteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenarens 7 8 7 3 1 Transaction Log TRANS LOG ccecccceeeseceeeeeeeeneeteeeeeeseeeens 7 9 7 3 2 Communication Log COMMS LOG ecceseseceseteeeeeeteeeees 7 9 7 3 3 Object State Log STATES LOG e ossunssu meneere 7 9 7 4 Monitoring Low Level W O cee ceeeccseesceeeeceseceesecneveeceeeeceaeeeeeneees 7 10 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog 8 1 8 1 OVErVile Wises haseiseh bh esc hs GAG AA yo Rises Wk Wien Aes i 8 1 8 1 1 Creating a New Edlog Program ccccccceeseeseeesceeeeeeseeteeeneenees 8 2 8 1 2 Editing an Existing Program ccceeseeccceseeeeeeseeeeeeseesee
82. small table will take 64 K of flash memory If the table sizes specified by the user exceed the amount of memory available for that purpose in the datalogger an error will occur when the program is compiled by the datalogger B 1 Appendix B Table Based Dataloggers B 2 NOTE Event driven tables should have a fixed size rather than allowing them to be allocated automatically Event driven tables in CRI10X TD type dataloggers that are automatically allocated are assumed to have one record stored per execution interval in calculating the length Since the datalogger tries to make the tables fill up at the same time with programs using short execution intervals these event driven tables may take up most of the memory leaving very little for the other longer interval automatically allocated data tables B 1 2 CR5000 CR9000 Memory for Programs and Data Storage The datalogger memory for the CR5000 and CR9000 is divided between Random Access Memory RAM and Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EEPROM The EEPROM or flash memory is used to store the operating system and the user programs that have been saved in the datalogger When the datalogger powers up the program marked as Run on Power up is transferred to RAM and executes from there Additional storage is available using PCMCIA cards When a datalogger program is sent to the datalogger it is divided into two tasks that run simultaneously All of the prog
83. software is written using an advanced client server architecture The server is a software program that runs in the background handling all of the datalogger communications The server also takes care of storing the data and providing information to manage the datalogger network This is similar to the public library that connects to the information providers authors and publishers and brings the data books to a central repository library where the clients patrons can retrieve the data One significant benefit of the software design is that some client applications for instance RTMC can be run on any computer that is connected to the main computer by a TCP IP network connection Some examples of these networks are Local Area Network LAN Wide Area Network WAN or the Internet LoggerNet is an ideal solution for users desiring a reliable data collection system that is also flexible enough to meet the needs of a variety of users 1 1 LoggerNet Products Campbell Scientific offers two LoggerNet software packages LoggerNet and LoggerNetData Each of these packages is purchased separately LoggerNet is the main software application and comes with all of the applications needed to set up and configure a network of dataloggers including tools to write programs and monitor retrieved data LoggerNetData is a complementary product that includes applications that can be used on a remote computer to either monitor data or retrieve view
84. stamp of 2400 you will need to select the Other button Midnight at 2400 hours checkbox 10 3 2 2 Starting Relative to PC Time Included in the time synchronize function is the ability to start relative to the current PC TIME computer time This feature allows a PAR file to be run on new data files without changing the Start Conditions provided the Input Data File is collected at a fixed interval and Split is run at a fixed interval For example the same PAR file could be run every day to display the last 48 hours of data without changing the start conditions For example using a table based data file Start Condition 1 1 1 1 1200 1 In this instance Split will begin processing data when the date for both files is one less than the current date 1 1 1 1 1200 1 and the time is 1200 1 1 1 1 1200 1 As an expanded example assume that LoggerNet is used in scheduled data collection mode that automatically appends data to an archive file SplitR is executed using an after scheduled call task option in the Task Master In this case the frequency of data collection and data reduction is the same Time values in the data file day hrmn sec are different each time the data are collected but by telling Split where to Start reading relative to the PC clock the Start Conditions do not need to be changed To accommodate variations in the data collection and reduction frequencies an interval in minutes or seconds may be s
85. the SYS directory during normal operations The most critical files are the data cache table files and the device configuration files The data cache files contain all of the data that has been collected from the dataloggers by the LoggerNet server These files are kept open or active as long as data is being stored to the file The configuration files contain information about each device in the datalogger network including collection schedules device settings and other parameters These files are written to frequently to make sure that they reflect the current state and configuration of each device The configuration files are only opened as needed If computer system power is lost while the LoggerNet server is writing data to the active files the files can become corrupted making the files inaccessible to the server This is particularly a problem for Windows 95 and 98 machines using the FAT32 disk file formatting Windows NT 2000 and XP offer the choice of NTFS that provides a greater protection for this type of event Thus Windows NT 2000 and XP offer more robust operation While loss of power won t always cause a file problem having files backed up as described above will allow you to recover if a problem occurs Ifa file does get corrupted all of the server s working files need to be restored from backup to maintain the synchronization in the server state 3 4 3 Program Crashes If the communication server crashes ther
86. the keyboard display may have been used to manually make changes to the datalogger program Appendix C Software Organization NOTE If the datalogger program is re compiled without changing table definitions the record numbers will reset to zero causing the server to assume the datalogger record numbers have wrapped around This will result in the re collection of all of the data in the datalogger When a change in table definitions is detected the server stops data collection and indicates in the Collection State of Status Monitor that the table definitions have been changed Data collection cannot be restarted until either a new datalogger program is loaded into the datalogger by the server or updated table definitions are received from the datalogger Either of these actions causes the data in the data cache for that datalogger to be removed and new data cache tables set up based on the new table definitions for that datalogger LoggerNet will save the existing output data file with a modified name and create a new output data file C 3 Directory Organization ES Local Disk C Backup Campbellsci E LoggerNet D Data D Logs EE RTC H E Images sounds Fl sys ea L INIFILES The default installation of the LoggerNet software installs two directories the C CampbellSci LoggerNet working directory and C Program Files CampbellSci LoggerNet program directory C 3 1 C Campbe
87. the currently opened program If this a new program and has not been saved yet a Save As dialog will prompt you for the file name and location to save the file Bl Save and Download enabled only for the CR9000 Saves any changes to the currently opened program and opens PC9000 to send the file to the datalogger Ifthe CRBasic editor can t find PC9000 you will be prompted to browse for it E Print Prints the program listing of the currently open program Print Preview Opens a Print Preview screen that will show what the program will look like when printed You can check and set the margins and printer options e F Undo Each time the Undo button is clicked it will step back through the last changes made to the program EA Redo Cancels the undo and steps forward restoring the changes Cut Removes the selected part of the program and puts it on the clipboard to be pasted elsewhere Bo 9 5 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 6 9 1 5 Compile Copy Places a copy of the selected part of the program on the clipboard to be pasted elsewhere Le Paste Inserts a copy of the contents of the clipboard into the program at the cursor location Find Brings up a Find dialog to specify a text string to search for in the program listing Click the Find Next button or press F3 to go to successive occurrences of the text 5 E ar Replace Brings up a
88. the dataloggers When the Terminal Emulator screen comes up as shown click the drop down arrow to the right of the Select Device box to choose the device from the list of devices in the network map The correct baud rate for the link is automatically set The characters you type in the window are sent as ASCII text to the selected device The options that are available from this screen depend on the device you select 15 5 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide 15 6 NOTE Select Device CR23x_2 V All Caps Mode Open Terminal Clear Help Dataloggers The example above shows a terminal emulation session with a datalogger Once you have selected the datalogger click Open Terminal to start communications Array based dataloggers require you to type in the letters 7H 2178H for CR7 and 21X and press Enter to establish terminal emulation mode Table based dataloggers are ready for terminal emulation when they are first selected Just press Enter For a definition of commands that are available in terminal emulation mode see the datalogger operators manual or prompt sheet On CR5000 dataloggers type H when the prompt comes up and a list of options will be displayed Use caution while in terminal emulation mode You can change or disable operation of the datalogger with these commands ComPort You can use the Terminal Emulator to perform a communications test on a ComPort To perform a feedback test se
89. the list This will allow you to display only instructions of a specific type such as Measurement Control or Declarations This provides a smaller list to select from and makes it easier to find the instruction you want Switch back to All to see all of the instructions available You can create custom instruction filter lists as described in Section 9 1 7 Where the instruction is inserted depends upon the settings in the Instruction Panel Options box accessed via Options Instruction Panel Preferences If At Cursor is selected the instruction will be inserted directly at the cursor location Care should be taken when using this option so that new instructions are not inserted in the middle of existing ones If Whole Line is selected the instruction will be placed on the line where the cursor is located and the existing line will be moved down to the next line 9 2 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor NOTE Be careful using the At Cursor option since it is possible to insert the new instruction in the middle of an existing instruction If the On Inserting Edit Parameters check box is cleared Options Instruction Panel Preferences the Parameter dialog box will not be displayed when an instruction is inserted 9 1 2 Parameter Dialog Box The Parameter dialog box will appear when an instruction is added that has one or more parameters or when the cursor is placed on an existing instruction and the right mouse
90. the readable area of the card either by typing the location directly into the window or by using the up down arrows to increment the value The green arrow moves the pointer to successive filemarks If the Display Pointer points to a filemark or the start of a program no data will be output in response to the Get One request It must be moved past the filemark to get further data Further details on Filemarks and Pointers can be found in the relevant Storage Module Manual and the on line help system This is a format code for the card currently in use It is an internal reference for use by Campbell Scientific and so has no significance for the end user The PROM checksum calculates a unique signature for that PROM version For all storage devices the PROM checksum is displayed on the ADVANCED value can be shown by clicking the Re Calculate Checksum button Once displayed this value is retained and will normally remain until you disconnect or remove power from the storage module You can recheck the value at any time by clicking the Re Calculate Checksum button The SM192 716 ADVANCED STATUS screen is similar to the CSM1 screen but has additional configuration facilities These settings configure the storage module which has its own process that controls datalogger communications These settings don t affect getting data out to the PC These settings are listed below Print Enable Mode Section 13 Storage Module Software
91. time and confusion 8 1 3 Library Files NOTE Library files can be created to store portions of programs which can then be inserted into a different program Library files are useful if you want to write different programs for the same sensor set or it you have several stations that have similar but not identical sensor sets To create a library file select the text to be stored and then select Edit Save To Library File When the window appears type in the library file name To insert a library file in a program move the cursor to the desired insertion point and select Edit Insert Library File Library files created for one type of datalogger type should not be used in programs for a different datalogger type i e a file for a CR10X TD should not be used in a program for a CR10X or a CR510 TD Instructions differ among dataloggers and bringing in an invalid instruction to a datalogger could result in errors 8 1 4 Documenting a DLD File As noted in Section 8 1 1 2 the CSI file is the file created by Edlog that is used to generate the DLD code and other files If for some reason your CSI file is missing you can import the DLD file into Edlog to create another editable CSI file From the Edlog menu select File Document DLD Select the DLD file to be imported and remember to save the file to create a new CSI file Programs created with the DOS versions of Edlog earlier than 6 0 were stored with the instruction descriptio
92. to 10 TCTemp 1 TCTemp I 1 8 32 Next I Aliases can also be created that will allow an element of an array or another data result to be referred to by a different name 9 2 3 Mathematical Expressions Mathematical expressions can be entered algebraically into program code to perform processing on measurements to be used for logical evaluation or to be used in place of some parameters As an example of Measurement Processing to convert a thermocouple measurement from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit you could use the following expression TCTempF TCTemp 1 1 8 32 Logical Evaluation expressions could be used to determine the flow of a program If TCTemp 1 gt 100 Then Call Subroutinel Else enter code for main program End If Many parameters will allow the entry of expressions In the following example the DataTable will be triggered and therefore data stored if TCTemp 1 gt 100 DataTable TempTable TCTemp 1 gt 100 5000 9 14 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 2 4 Measurement and Output Processing Instructions Measurement instructions are procedures that set up the measurement hardware to make a measurement and place the results in a variable or a variable array Output processing instructions are procedures that store the results of measurements or calculated values Output processing includes averaging saving maximum or minimum standard deviation FFT
93. to prevent the server from trying to access the files while they are being copied for the backup Once the files have been backed up the server and client applications may be restarted The most direct approach is to back up the entire working directory as shown below The default directory name is c CampbellSci LoggerNet E S Local Disk C GQ Campbelisci O LoggerNef B Logs DB RTMC E O Images O sounds sys E O bin O INIFILES Section 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures LoggerNet The collected data files and datalogger programs Most user files will be in this directory gt Logs The logs of server operations and communication RTMC The graphic and sound resource files for RTMC I SYS bin LoggerNet Server working directory these files are controlled by the server and should not be disturbed by the user except when backing up the system Tampering with these directories or files can cause unpredictable consequences and result in the loss of data Inifiles Initialization files created by various clients This will back up all of the working files for the server and the client applications along with any datalogger program files For a detailed description of the directories and the files see Section 4 5 6 Note that the above directories assume that the installation used the default directory structure suggested by
94. will backfill to plot whatever data is available in the data cache Select Update Interval defines how often the Input Locations or Public Table data are updated on the graph A shorter interval will increase the amount of communication taking place with the datalogger Final storage data will only update when collected by scheduled data collection 6 15 Section 6 Connect There are two Time Axis Display options for the X axis You can choose to Show Time and Date or Display Just Time Graph Display Options 7 x Scaling Time Display Visual Display Export Interval Options Select Graph Width Time Axis Displa 00d 00h 10m 00s H C Show Time and Date Select Update interval 00h 00 m 01 s 000 m Display Just Time 3 Apply 6 5 1 3 3 Graph Visual Display Options 6 16 The Visual Display Options allow the user set the appearance of the graph The colors for the grids and background as well as how the trace should appear can be set here A title can also be added to the graph Display Options Background Color selects the color of the graph background This is white by default Be careful to select a background color that does not make any of the data traces disappear Left Right Grid Color selects the color of the grid lines that go with the left or right scale axis Trace Options selects whether the trace will be displayed with the line plot the actual data points
95. wind chill Split Win Splitman PAR C CampbellsciLoggerNetMSTSPLIT Doo 4 mooo dd smpl Te 1 smpl Te 1 1 8 32 t 3 32 1 8 v 5 0 447 h sqrt 100 10 45 33 t Te 33 h 22 066 smpl t 1 smpl v 1 smpl h 1 10 35 Section 10 Split The following screen shows the output file setup including the column headings and the units Split Win Splitman PAR iol xi File Edit Labels Run Printer Help Input File s Output File Fil File Formal Browse hourly pm l Field i Other Printer None JV Screen Display Column Widths g Report and Column Headings Hourly Data Report Heading s sl ae e eel mee Seae f Eee Se E N E S E E a a eT ee E Temp Wind Wind Wind deg C Speed Chill Chill m s degC deg F Decimal Time Series Heading Insert Delete Add This PAR file produces a wind chill summary of the Mt Logan Peak data set The formula for calculating wind chill is given as follows Te 33 h 22 066 where Te Wind Chill equivalent temperature degrees C h 100V gt 10 45 V 33 T where h Kcalm hr wind chill index v wind speed in meters second T temperature in degrees C Note that at wind speeds between 0 to 4 mph 0 to 1 8 m s the wind chill should be ignored because this formula results in wind chill temperatures that are greater than the ambient tempera
96. 0X TD family dataloggers or Public tables on CR5000 or CR9000 type dataloggers the current values will be collected every time a scheduled collection occurs whether or not the values have been updated 5 4 1 1 3 Communications Path Considerations When setting up data collection intervals for the dataloggers you should consider the communications path to the datalogger and its affect on how often you can retrieve data Phone modems require anywhere from 10 30 seconds or more to establish communication negotiate baud rate and start transferring data Therefore it is not a good idea to schedule collection by phone modem more often than once every two minutes The time to make a call and start communications should be considered when you are collecting from multiple stations by phone Sufficient time should be allowed for the server to dial the station retrieve the data and then contact the next station There should be enough time between calls to the first station that the calls to the other stations using the same modem can be completed Otherwise the collection schedule will be delayed waiting for the previous stations to finish RF networks with repeaters also add time delays since each modem must be contacted and then pass the message on to the next RF modem and so on Each of these operations takes time so the time schedule for RF networks with repeaters should allow enough time for the link to be established with the datalogger an
97. 1 02 3 Z F P30 1 8 0 3 4 Z X Y P36 01 3 5 5 Errors That Can Occur With Expressions The following error codes and messages may occur when using expressions Code Error Message 100 Missing left parenthesis 101 Missing right parenthesis 102 Variable name expected 103 Number expected 104 Floating point numbers limited to 5 digits 107 Function expected 110 New line expected 111 Equal sign expected 8 10 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog Variable Name Expected This message occurs when the expression is not set equal to an Input Location label The label must be to the left of the expression and not enclosed in parentheses An expression that contains no equal sign causes compiler error 202 unrecognized text For Example Variable name expected is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions 5 el Veeten lambda COS theta 10 zee 2 bee These are correct ways of entering the above expressions five el Veet en lambda COS theta bee 10 zee 2 Number Expected Indicates one of the following situations 1 An expression with a or operator is missing a number or label before and or after the operator 2 An expression with a or operator does not have a number or label after the operator 3 An expression with an operator does not have a number after the only a fixed number is allowed immediately after the ope
98. 1 1 are only updated when the tables are called 9 23 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 24 Section 10 Split Fa Split is a tool that works with output data files dat collected from Campbell Scientific dataloggers It is used to post process data from table based and array based dataloggers Split can create reports based on collected data by filtering data based on time or conditions It can separate statistics perform calculations reformat files do data quality checking limit testing and generate tables with report and column headings It can also handle the time synchronization and merging of up to eight data files 10 1 Functional Overview Split is a tool to aid the use and analysis of data collected from Campbell Scientific dataloggers Its name comes from its function of splitting specific data from a larger data file Originally Split could only process array based files and it was used to split the arrays of a file into multiple files In addition to splitting out array data Split can filter output data based on time or conditions calculate statistics and new values reformat files or check data quality limit testing Split can generate tables with report and column headings as well as time synchronize and merge up to eight data files Input Files maximum of eight are read by Split specific operations are performed on the data and the results are output to a new Output File
99. 10060 10061 10065 Message Meaning Permission Denied The requested socket connection has refused the connection Too many open files Too many open sockets for the applications running Address family not supported by protocol family The socket being addressed does not support the type of connection being attempted No buffer space available Cannot create more temporary sockets Cannot send after socket shutdown A message was sent to a socket that has been closed Connection timed out Connection refused The LoggerNet server or an NL100 refused to allow the socket connection No route to host The application is trying to connect to a host address that isn t in the routing table Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide User Response to Message This is normally a network type of issue Check with your computer network operator This can occur when you have many applications that are using sockets running at the same time This message shows up when the LoggerNet Toolbar comes up but the server did not come up because TCP IP is not installed on the computer Install TCP IP and restart LoggerNet Section 2 2 The operating system cannot create any more socket connection See the text above about Maximum Number of Sockets Open This would be an indication that an application is not communicating well with the server Check the application Either the server has crashed and is not responding o
100. 2 1 Collect Now The Collect Now function is the equivalent of doing a scheduled data collection for the datalogger without waiting for the scheduled time Clicking the Collect Now button will initiate a call to the datalogger and any available data will be collected and stored as specified on the Setup screen This function is often used to manually update data collection to see the latest data in the Numeric Monitor or a Graph or before data files are copied for processing Once you have started data collection with Collect Now you can stop it by clicking the Cancel button on the animated screen This might be necessary if you started a data collection that is bringing in more data than you really wanted especially over a slow communications link 6 2 2 Custom Collection for Array based Dataloggers Clicking the Custom Collection button while connected to an array based datalogger brings up the dialog box shown below The options you can specify include the file format and whether to overwrite or append to the existing file how much data to collect and which final storage areas you want to collect NOTE Section 6 Connect Custom Collection x m File Format Binary tf ASCII Comma separated ASCII Printable File Mode Append To End Of File C Overwrite Existing File Collect C Collect All C Advanced Collect All Since Last Collection Last Number of Arrays fico Settings I Final Storage Ar
101. 2 File converter in under Programs LoggerNet Utilities prior to processing it with Split Split s default output file a PRN can be processed a second time if desired Section 10 Split Table 10 3 1 provides an example of Printable ASCII Comma Separated Field Formatted and Table Oriented ASCII input file types The data in the various formats are identical Each line of data represents an Output Array starting with an Output Array ID in this case 115 Each data point in the Output Array is referred to as an element The element number is given in the Printable ASCII format and implied in the other formats Data presented in Table 10 3 1 is used for example purposes in the following sections TABLE 10 3 1 Comma Separated Field Formatted Printable ASCII and Table Oriented ASCII Input File Format Types COMMA SEPARATED 115 189 1200 89 6 55 3 25 36 270 115 189 1300 91 3 61 5 27 25 255 4 115 189 1400 92 7 67 7 15 15 220 1 115 189 1500 94 1 69 20 35 260 6 FIELD FORMATTED 115 189 1200 89 6 55 3 25 36 270 115 189 1300 91 3 61 5 27 25 255 4 115 189 1400 92 7 67 7 15 15 220 1 115 189 1500 94 1 69 20 35 260 6 PRINTABLE ASCII 01 0115 02 0189 03 1200 04 089 6 05 055 3 06 25 36 07 270 0 01 0115 02 0189 03 1300 04 091 3 05 061 5 06 27 25 07 255 4 01 0115 02 0189 03 1400 04 092 7 05 067 7 06 15 15 07 220 1 0140115 02 0189 03 1500 04 094 1 05 069 0 06 20 35 07 260 6 Element Output Array ID 115 Element2 J
102. 208W Network 5 26 The convert utility converts a datalogger network that was created under PC208W version 3 0 or higher to a network that will work with LoggerNet This allows you to keep the network map and configurations as they were with the PC208W software and avoid starting over It is a good idea to make sure that data collection with PC208W is up to date and all the data from the dataloggers has been collected and saved into files To run convert shut down PC208W and bring up LoggerNet You should also make a backup copy of the PC208W files Make sure that the network map in LoggerNet Setup Screen is empty If you try to convert a network map onto an existing network an error message will remind you that the current network map is not blank Make sure to apply after you delete all the devices or they will all come back NOTE Section 5 Setup gt o Convert DND File Please select a dnd file to load into LoggerNet C PC208w PC208W dnd A OK X Cancel R Help ix Select Convert from PC208W Network from the Options menu on the Setup screen A pop up message will remind you that data collection should be up to date Then the dialog box shown above will come up allowing you to choose the PC208W network description file pc208w dnd you want to convert You can either type in the path or click the button to the right with the ellipsis that will allow you to browse for the file PC208W network descript
103. 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures 3 6 Section 4 The LoggerNet Toolbar This section provides an overview of the LoggerNet Toolbar and the associated applications Each of the applications is explained in detail in subsequent sections 4 1 The Toolbar The LoggerNet Toolbar has several functions The most important is starting the server that handles all communications with the dataloggers in the network As long as the Toolbar is running either visible or minimized the server is working and able to communicate with the dataloggers Shutting down the Toolbar also shuts down the server and suspends all communications with the dataloggers in the network NOTE When LoggerNet first starts scheduled data collection is delayed for several seconds This allows the user time to pause scheduled collection on the Status Monitor if desired To start LoggerNet double click the icon that was placed on your desktop You can also go to the start menu of the computer and under Programs LoggerNet select LoggerNet This will bring up the Toolbar as shown below and start the server a LoggerNet 2 1a Datalogger Support Software File Test Options Help onnect m Stg Module Status Clicking any of the Toolbar buttons will bring up the screen for that function An alternate way to bring up screens is to use the File Open menu at the top of the Toolbar The menu provides access to all of the availab
104. 3 2 37 29 PM CR200Series S BMP5 message received type 0x97 04 24 03 2 37 30 PM PakBusPort S sending message sre 4094 dest 1 proto BMPS type 0x17 tran 52 Object State Log arm transaction watchdog check set clock 11250 26960 PakBusTran release focus check set clock 26960 Release Transaction Focus check set clock PakBusTran closing check set clock Request Transaction Focus check set clock Transaction focus start check set clock arm transaction watchdog check set clock 11250 26967 7 3 1 Transaction Log TRAN LOG This log includes information on the transactions that occur between LoggerNet and the devices in the datalogger network Examples of these types of events are clock checks sets program downloads and data collection When saved to disk the file name for the log will be tran log where denotes the active log and tran1 log tran2 log etc denote historical logs 7 3 2 Communication Log COMMS LOG This log records information on the quality of communications in the datalogger network Three types of messages are recorded status messages warning messages and fault messages When saved to disk the file name for the log will be comms log where denotes the active log and comms1 log comms 2 log etc denote historical logs 7 3 3 Object State Log STATE LOG This log is used for troublesho
105. 34 00 11305 13 05 24 5 178 1 0 018 NOTE WARNING TOB1 Table Oriented Binary type 1 format This is a compressed binary format that can be converted by View or processed using Split Data Collection Select Tables Tables are selected by clicking the check box next to the table name The Select All check box provides a shortcut to select all the available tables in the datalogger Change File Name will bring up a file selection dialog to choose the directory and file name for the highlighted table To change the name of the file highlight the table by clicking the table name Then click Change File Name for the file dialog Each data table will be saved in its own file By default the file name is the name of the station and the name of the table Right click the file name will allow you to apply the directory for the selected file to all of the files You can have all the files stored to the same directory by changing the directory for one of the files and then right clicking the file and choosing Apply Directory to All The directories for all of the files will then point to the same place Reset Tables CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 Series dataloggers only lets you clear out the data and reinitialize the data tables in the datalogger and the data cache Clicking Reset Tables will bring up a list of the tables defined in the datalogger Select the tables you want to reset or click the Select All check box to get all of the tables an
106. 4 32 047 ComPort_1 Dev shutDown Shutting down Appendix E Importing Files into Excel Data files saved by LoggerNet can be imported into a spreadsheet program for analysis or manipulation Instructions are given below for importing a comma separated file into Microsoft Excel From the Excel menu select File Open Browse for the dat file that you want to import Excel will recognize the file as not being in an xls format and will invoke the Text Import Wizard The Text Import Wizard consists of three steps each having its own window E 1 Array Based Data File Import Array based data files are typically comma separated with the first column of each line being an array ID If time and date are included in the arrays they may be in columns 2 through 5 with some of the columns optional Excel will easily read the comma separated file Getting the different time columns pulled together into one timestamp field takes a little manipulation Step 1 of 3 Select the Delimited option from the Original Data Type group box Using the arrow buttons to the right of the Start Import at Row field select the number of the first row of data to be imported Select the Next button Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 The Text Wizard has determined that your data is Delimited If this is correct choose Next or choose the Data Type that best describes your data riginal data type Choose the file type that best describes your data CD d
107. 51 while the newest record number might be 50 In the data file however data would appear in correct sequence ordered by date time stamps 14 2 4 The Collected Data After data is collected for one or more tables a Summary window will show the table name in the datalogger the number of records stored the first and last timestamps of the collected data and the first and last record numbers of the collected data The stored file can be viewed by pressing the View Data File button The DataFiler uses LoggerNet s View utility to display the ASCII file Section 14 DataFiler 14 3 Communication Status A box in the lower right corner of the DataFiler s window provides an indication of the DataFiler s connection with the LoggerNet server When the DataFiler is in communication with the LoggerNet server the box will appear green and the IP address or computer name e g LocalHost will be displayed If communication with the server is lost for instance if LoggerNet is closed the box will appear red with the text No Connection If communication is lost but the DataFiler is attempting to reconnect the box will appear blue with the text Attempting Connection 14 5 Section 14 DataFiler 14 6 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide This section is provided as an aid to solving some of the common problems that might be encountered using the LoggerNet software This list is not comprehensive but should provide some insight and ability
108. 78 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 179 Time Air RH Mean Mean Std temp Wind Wind Dev deg Speed Vec of F mph Dir Dir 100 58 56 17 42 5 855 338 3 6 562 200 57 48 17 65 8 27 344 8 7 51 300 56 85 17 76 7 75 330 8 5 065 400 56 55 18 89 7 6 319 7 10 93 500 56 57 19 6 10 41 307 3 4 23 600 55 33 23 32 8 99 317 7 6 258 700 55 95 24 79 9 52 322 3 4 609 800 58 12 23 98 6 588 315 6 9 43 900 59 79 23 46 5 458 312 15 32 1000 61 09 24 12 4 622 299 3 18 3 1100 61 34 25 03 5 926 303 17 26 1200 60 61 27 46 6 815 309 7 18 71 1300 61 01 25 44 8 35 310 2 18 37 1400 60 93 25 48 10 92 317 5 12 68 1500 62 3 23 79 8 43 310 6 19 21 1600 63 75 24 31 8 88 321 4 15 22 1700 66 15 22 45 7 97 341 17 77 1800 67 33 23 06 6 758 344 1 20 74 1900 66 59 24 75 7 08 341 8 16 09 2000 64 52 26 03 8 76 337 2 14 91 2100 59 84 27 45 11 81 305 4 12 36 2200 56 19 35 46 15 62 316 7 19 01 2300 55 48 38 8 17 12 338 7 11 41 0 55 22 37 13 11 86 351 6 8 22 10 27 Section 10 Split 10 28 NOTE Avg x n Blanks x n Count x n returns the average of element x over a full data set or every n value Examples Avg 3 59 898 average daily temp Avg 3 4 57 36 average 4 hour temp 56 493 average 4 hour temp 60 708 average 4 hour temp 61 998 average 4 hour temp 66 148 average 4 hour temp 56 683 average 4 hour temp returns the number of blanks or bad data in element x over a full data set or every nth value Ref
109. A response preceded by a minus sign indicates that the command failed and will usually be accompanied by a reason for the failure F 2 1 Connecting to the LoggerNet Server Before you can execute any commands a connection to the LoggerNet server must be established The connect command sets up the server context in which subsequent commands will operate until the end of the script is reached or another connect command is processed The following segment shows a sample use of the connect command connect the name of the command localhost specifies the server s host address name bilbo specifies the logon name optional password baggins specifies the password optional marks the end of the command This command would normally appear on one line as follows connect localhost name bilbo password baggins For a more detailed explanation of the interpretation of the symbols and syntax refer to the CoraScript help F 2 2 Checking and Setting Device Settings The current value of any of the configuration settings for a device is available using the get device setting command Devices are referred to by the name as shown in the Setup screen network map and settings are referenced by number The setting numbers and their meanings are described in the CoraScript help To set the configuration setting for any device use the set device setting command As with get device setting the device is referred to by name
110. Consider Table 10 3 2 below TABLE 10 3 2 Example of Event Driven Test Data Set r Data from arrays 100 12 1 10 32 6 output during the 101 92 7 67 7 first test 102 56 1 48 7 98 220 1 200 100 12 5 9 89 30 1 _ Second test 102 56 2 50 100 5 210 6 200 ee i 200 This table contains four different output arrays 100 101 102 and 200 During the first test data was output from all three conditional arrays 100 101 and 102 with 200 signaling the end of the test During the second test data was Section 10 Split output from arrays 100 and 102 During the third test data was output from arrays 100 and 101 To process these files using the C option the parameter file would be set up as follows assuming the name of our data file is Data_1 DAT First Input File Data_1 DAT 1 Stop condition C 1 200 Copy 1 100 Select 1 2 3 4 Second Input File Data_1 DAT 2 Stop condition C 1 200 Copy 1 101 Select 1 2 3 Third Input File Data_1 DAT 3 Stop condition C 1 200 Copy 1 102 Select 1 2 3 4 5 Fourth end of test Input File Data_1 DAT 4 Stop condition C 1 200 Copy 1 200 Select leave blank NOTE The number after the data file name is inserted automatically by Split TABLE 10 3 3 Processed Data File Using Option C 100 12 1 10 32 6 101 92 7 102 56 1 48 7 98 220 1 100 12 5 9 89 30 1 102 56 2 50 100 5 210 6 100 13 1 10 1 33 1 101 94 1 69 When Spl
111. Datalogger warning and fault messages should be investigated using the datalogger operators manual or contacting an applications engineer at Campbell Scientific Determine the reason for the timeout This is usually due to a problem with the communications path between the PC and the datalogger Appendix D Log Files Message Text Terminal emulation transaction complete Terminal emulation transaction failed Set variable started Set variable complete Set variable failed Table resized Program file send start Program file send status Program file send complete Program file send failed Message Parameters Message Meaning Terminal emulation response message has been received from the datalogger The expected terminal emulation response from the datalogger was not received The message to set an input location flag or port has been sent to the datalogger The datalogger has acknowledged the set of an input location flag or port The datalogger failed to acknowledge the set variable message The size of the table storage area in the data cache has been changed The server is sending a program to the datalogger The actual program segments will appear as BMP1 message type 4 The datalogger has received the program segment The datalogger has compiled the program The datalogger did not acknowledge the receipt of the program the program did not compile or com
112. EA EE 10 45 10 6 3 Using Splitr exe in Batch Files 0 ccceeeceeseeseeeteeeeeeneeenes 10 45 10 6 4 Command Line Switches s ssessesesseeseesesseeeessrseresessreressese 10 45 V MW eiea a E EE E E 11 1 LL SOVELVIC Wists a aa N E E A aS enn date tutte taty 11 1 11 2 Openinga Filenin nace E ee ee eR 11 1 11 2 1 Opening a Data Fil ss ornoen iiini 11 1 11 2 2 Opening Other Types of Files 0 0 cecceceeseeseeeeeeeeeeseeereneeens 11 2 11 2 3 Final Storage Label FSL Files 2 0 0 0 ccccecseesseeteeeeeeereeerees 11 2 11 3 Data Patel roes es ceivssGecaces och euch hash E ttaseaed Reece 11 3 11321 Array Selections nseri e 11 3 11 3 2 Text View Options seseseseseesssesssesseseesersesstenessrsresseseesesseese 11 4 11 3 3 Changing the Font cc cceeseeseeecceeeceeeceecseeeeeeneeeeeeeerenrens 11 4 ITEA GraphsPane lit 22 2 Sete ee ee ee ee ees 11 4 11 5 Printing Options ses 2sccescccesscadededecicevesceacctouetecencceescatdlecieciee E E eaves 11 7 a e O Printing Text E E AE heii cosiese tha ee had 11 7 1 5 2 Printing Grapns ec cones conitee cone ki Hen oan ite 11 7 1 6 Advariced Topicsss cnc4fasttkn esate aii AHL 11 7 11 6 1 Assigning Data Files to View ccccccesseesseesseeseeesceeeeeeeeereerens 11 7 11 6 2 Array Definitions Array based dataloggers only 11 8 LoggerNet Table of Contents 12 Real Time Monitor and Control 0 12 1 D2 HOV ORVIe Wh edisesde noses ete E EE e
113. Find and Replace dialog that allows you to specify a text string to search for and a text string to replace it with You can replace all occurrences of the text or check them one at a time to make sure they should be replaced Ep Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the text string specified in the Find dialog Compile Starts the compiler to check the current program for errors and consistency Compile results and errors will be displayed in the message area at the bottom of the screen lip Iolo Previous Error Moves the cursor to the part of the program where the previous error was identified Next Error Moves the cursor to the part of the program where the next error was identified Instruction Panel Controls whether the Instruction Panel is displayed Hiding the Instruction Panel can allow more room in the window to view the program listing a E E Compile is a function provided by the CRBasic Editor to help the programmer catch problems with the datalogger program Compile is available from the toolbar and the Compile menu When the Compile function is invoked the CRBasic Editor checks the program for syntax errors and other inconsistencies The results of the check will be displayed in a message window at the bottom of the main window If an error can be traced to a specific line in the program the line number will be listed before the error You can double click an error preceded by a line number and
114. IC INC CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC is not responsible for problems caused by computer hardware computer operating systems or the use of CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC s software with non CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC software ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED AND EXCLUDED CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT OR OTHER SIMILAR DAMAGES EVEN IF CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY COSTS INCURRED AS A RESULT OF LOST PROFITS OR REVENUE LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE LOSS OF DATA COST OF RE CREATING LOST DATA THE COST OF ANY SUBSTITUTE PROGRAM CLAIMS BY ANY PARTY OTHER THAN LICENSEE OR FOR OTHER SIMILAR COSTS LICENSEE S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IS SET FORTH IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC S AGGREGATE LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION E G CONTRACT TORT COMPUTER MALPRACTICE FRAUD AND OR OTHERWISE IS LIMITED TO THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY THE LICENSEE CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC 815 W 1800 N Campbell Scientific Canada Corp Campbell Scientific Ltd Logan UT 84321 1784 11564 149th Street Campbell Park USA Edmonton Alberta TSM 1W7 80 Hathern Road Phone 435 753 2342 CANADA Shepshed Loughborough FAX 435 750 9540 Pho
115. IGURE 10 2 1 Data File 10 2 Section 10 Split When Edlog compiled Birch dld it also created the Final Storage Label file Birch fsl that lists the final storage locations for each data element Figure 10 2 2 g Edlog 32 CR23xX C Campbellsci LoggerNet20 BIRCH1 FSL view Onis Ie m E4 fq File Edit Search Compile Display Options Window Help l x e H index InLoc Ed InLoc Pick FSL Edit 4 Label Jo Storage Label File for BIRCH CSI Date 1 2 2661 Time 12 68 11 66 Output_Table 66 66 Min 1 6 L 2 Year_RIM L Day_RIM L Hour_Minute_RIM L BattVolt L BattUolt_MIN L BattVolt_Hr_Min_MIN L Enc1_RH_MAX L Enc1_RH_Hr_Min_MAX L 16 LogrTemp_MAX L 11 LogrTemp_Hr_Min_MAX L 24 Output_Table 1446 66 Min 1 24 L 2 Year_RIM L Day_RIM L Hour_Minute_RIM L BattVolt L BattVolt_MIN L BattVolt_Hr_Min_MIN L Enc1_RH_MAX L Enc1_RH_Hr_Min_MAX L LogrTemp_MAX L LogrTemp_Hr_Min_MAX L AirTemp_AUG L AirTemp_MAX L AirTemp_Hr_Min_MAX L AirTemp_MIN L AirTemp_Hr_Min_MIN L Output_Table 15 66 Min 199 L FIGURE 10 2 2 FSL file 10 3 Section 10 Split Split ersion 2 0 32 bit Edit Labels Run Printer Help 5 Output File 15 x Input Data File Start Condition Stop Condition gl File Info Browse Auto Detect Offsets Options Copy pC Select 10 4 NOTE FIGURE 10 2 3 Input File Template When you start Split a bla
116. IP address This is the Internet Protocol address that is used by LoggerNet to communicate with the serial server This address must be unique on the network where it is running and is typically assigned by a network administrator An IP address is typically entered as four numbers separated by periods As an example 198 199 32 45 would be an IP address Do not use leading zeros for any of the numbers in the IP address An address of 198 192 035 002 would cause an error in the network configuration Section 16 Implementing Advanced Communications Links Subnet Mask This setting is used to limit the search applicability area for IP addresses If both the server and the serial server are in the same low level subnet this would be set to 255 255 255 0 Consult with the network administrator for the proper setting Default Gateway This specifies the IP address of the router for the local computer network Consult with the computer network administrator for the proper setting Baud Rate This specifies the baud rate used by the serial server to communicate with the serial device attached to the COM port The RF base communicates at a baud rate of 9600 IP Port ID This specifies the port ID used by the serial server to direct serial communications This must be set even on devices with only one port This number is entered as part of the IP address in Setup for the IPPort device For example if the port ID was specified to be 3201 usin
117. If you find the problem listed try the suggested remedies If your problem is not listed or the remedies don t fix the problem contact Campbell Scientific for technical assistance 15 1 1 Starting LoggerNet and Connecting to the Server Problem Cannot start LoggerNet on a laptop computer Error message LoggerNet was unable to start the communications server Socket Failure creation 10047 Remedy 1 If the computer is sometimes used on a computer network and no network card is installed TCP IP services may not be starting Try starting the computer with the network adapter card installed Remedy 2 If remedy 1 doesn t work you will need to configure a non existent dialup service with a fixed IP address There is a description of this procedure in Section 2 2 15 1 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide 15 2 Problem Message indicating Server Connection Lost Remedy This message indicates that the main communications software has stopped responding to the user interface screens You need to close down all of the applications along with the Toolbar and start over 15 1 2 Socket Errors The LoggerNet Server uses TCP IP sockets for communications Various problems can occur with these socket connections Some of the most common errors and remedies are listed below Maximum Number of Sockets Open The Windows operating system has limits on the number of socket connections that can be held open For Windows NT 2000
118. Indicator showing the file names is displayed at the bottom right of the display 13 5 5 Get New 13 5 6 Get One 13 6 Erase Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS This option collects new data files starting from the position of the storage module dump pointer This pointer marks where data was last collected and is automatically moved after each successful collection of data This option can be used to collect any new data files stored in the card or module since data was last read As the file is read to the disk a Progress Indicator showing the file name is displayed at the bottom right of the display See the relevant Storage Module Manuals and on line help system for further details about Filemarks and Pointers in memory This option collects one data file starting at the specified location of the display pointer You can position the display pointer to any starting position required by using the ADVANCED STATUS INFORMATION screen see section 13 2 This option is used mainly for re collecting old data that has already been collected or to recover data from a corrupted card As the file is saved to disk a Progress Indicator showing the file name is displayed at the bottom right of the display Clicking the ERASE tab will bring up the ERASE OPTIONS screen This gives control over how data is erased or cleared from the card or module 13 6 1 Erase Data This option erases data by removing the references to the dat
119. LOGGERNET USER S MANUAL Version 2 1 REVISION 9 03 COPYRIGHT c 1999 2003 CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC License for Use This software is protected by both United States copyright law and international copyright treaty provisions The installation and use of this software constitutes an agreement to abide by the provisions of this license agreement You may make a copy of this software on a second computer for the sole purpose of backing up CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC software and protecting your investment from loss This software may not be sold included or redistributed in any other software or altered in any way without prior written permission from Campbell Scientific All copyright notices and labeling must be left intact Limited Warranty CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC warrants that the installation media on which the accompanying computer software is recorded and the documentation provided with it are free from physical defects in materials and workmanship under normal use CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC warrants that the computer software itself will perform substantially in accordance with the specifications set forth in the instruction manual published by CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC The recommended minimum hardware for LoggerNet is a 300 MHz Pentium II processor with 64 megabytes of RAM and a screen area of at least 800x600 LoggerNet uses the features of Windows NT 2000 or XP that maximize the reliability of unattended scheduled data co
120. LoggerNet s data cache and store the collected data to a file on a remote computer DataFiler does not collect data from a datalogger directly but from the data cache Therefore data collection must occur in LoggerNet either by a scheduled or manual data collection for the data to be available to the DataFiler 1 3 Getting Help for LoggerNet Applications Detailed information on each application is included in the later sections Additionally each application has an on line help system On line help can be accessed by pressing the F1 key or by selecting Help from the application s menu A troubleshooting guide is provided in Section 14 of this manual If you are unable to resolve your problem after reviewing the above noted resources contact your Campbell Scientific Representative or Campbell Scientific directly 1 4 Windows Conventions For the past 15 years Microsoft has been working to establish a standard for the operation of graphical user interfaces There are numerous conventions and expectations about the way a software program looks and behaves running under Microsoft Windows With LoggerNet Campbell Scientific has adopted as many of these conventions as reasonable This manual describes a collection of screens dialogs and functions to work with a network of dataloggers As with most Windows based software there is almost always more than one way to access the function you want We encourage you to look around and experimen
121. MDI anesore pan t cock E EEE ER EE 16 3 16 2 BE i t EPEE A EE E E E EE E A T es 16 3 16 2 2 Operational Considerations sssssssseessseseessesersreseeserseseessesees 16 4 16 32 TOPP to RE ee a A E eas ahead A 16 5 16351 Setup E E E weiss 16 5 16 3 2 Operational Considerations csccesceesseeceeesceeseeseeeteeeeensees 16 5 16 3 3 Special Considerations ceccceseesseeeseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteensees 16 6 Appendices A Glossary of Terms eene ee eter eens A 1 B Table Based Dataloggers eeees B 1 B 1 Memory Allocation for Final Storage e seseeeseeeeeseeessrsersseserserseree B 1 B 1 1 CR10X TD Family Table Based Dataloggers eseee B 1 B 1 2 CR5000 CR9000 Memory for Programs and Data Storage B 2 B 1 3 CR200 Series Dataloggers ssssesesesseesssreeessesetsresersesseseessese B 3 B 2 Converting an Array Based Program to a CR10X TD Table Based Program using Edlog ccceccsseesseesseeseeseeeesceeeceeeeseenseeseenseenseeses B 3 B 2 1 Steps for Program Conversion sessssseessssreeesseserseesersessreeessese B 3 B 2 2 Program Instruction Changes c cccccesccssecececsseeseeeneeseeesseeeeeees B 4 B 3 Table Data OVervieW eesseesccsesssceseeecesecetesecaeesecnaeeeceaecatenecaeeatenee B 5 B 4 Default Lables henn tet ao aed en Ee aa B 7 C Software Organization 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 1 C 1 LoggerNet Client Architecture
122. Program Area Size is the total capacity that the module has for datalogger program storage Clicking the PROGRAMS tab brings up the PROGRAM CONTROL OPTION screen The screen is very similar for the storage devices and the PC Card It is essentially an interface for extracting programs saving programs or clearing programs from the storage device The screen in Figure 13 4 1 shows the program selection check boxes and the program manipulation buttons Datalogger programs can be stored in a card or module for subsequent downloading into a datalogger The programs are stored in the same memory space available for data storage and are stored in up to eight memory locations With the correct version of datalogger operating system the program in location 8 can be automatically loaded compiled and run in a datalogger on power up of the datalogger See appropriate Storage Module Instruction Manual for more details CSM1 MCR1 5M192 5M716 Pc Card SM4M SM16M Programs Program Status qeevencesesenssseoey M Prog 1 Used Prog2 Free Prog3 Free l Prog4 Free l Prog5 Free l Prog6 Free l Prog Free l Prog8 Free Clear Store Read Programs AD ata Erase FIGURE 13 4 1 PROGRAMS Screen 13 11 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 12 13 4 1 Program Location 13 4 2 Clear 13 4 3 Store 13 4 4 Read There are eight memory locations available The Program Status box will either e Disp
123. Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC 12 10 12 2 4 3 Functions The following functions show the use and placement of the numbers the function operates on The parentheses are not required unless there are two or more parameter values e g ATN2 y x Function ABS x Description Returns the absolute value of a number ACOS x Returns the arc cosine of a number x AND y ASIN x ATN x ATN2 y x cos x COSH x CSGN x xJEQV y EXP x FIX x FRAC x IIF x y z x IMP y INT x LOG x LOG10 x x MOD y NOT x x OR y Performs a logical conjunction on two numbers Returns the arc sine of a number Returns the arc tangent of a number Returns the arctangent of y x Returns the cosine of a number Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number Changes the sign of a number by multiplying by 1 0 Performs a logical equivalence on two numbers Returns e raised to the x power Returns the integer portion of a number If the number is a negative the first negative integer greater than or equal to the number is returned Returns the fraction part of a number Evaluates an expression x and returns one value if true y a different value if false z Performs a logical implication on two numbers Returns the integer portion of a number If the number is a negative the first negative integer less than or equal to the number is returned Returns the natural log of a number Returns the
124. Response to Message Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Determine the reason for communication failure Temporary communication problems may cause the collection state to change between normal and primary Appendix D Log Files User Response to Message Data collection on the Check communications primary data with the datalogger by collection interval trying to check the failed clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Data collection on the Check communications secondary data with the datalogger by collection interval trying to check the Message Text Message Parameters Message Meaning Primary retry collection attempt failed Secondary retry collection attempt failed failed clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Device restore from file failed Device save to file succeeded Device save to file failed Packet delivery failed D 10 Device restore On server startup a from file device previously succeeded entered in the network map has been restored Fault code 1 Incompatible BMP 1 device or malformed packet 2 Routing failure unrecognized station number 3 Temporarily out of resources 4 Link failure On server startup a device in the network map could not be restored The update to the device configuration file was successful The update to the de
125. Scheduled polling succeeded Collect area first poll Table mount failed Scheduled polling failed D 14 Message Parameters Collect area name Collect area name Collect area name Table name Operating system information regarding the failure Message Meaning Data has been received from an array based datalogger for the specified collect area Data collection for the specified collect area has successfully completed Data collection for the specified collect area failed This message is posted either the first time data is collected for a collect area or holes were lost for the datalogger The server was not able to create a data collection area from the stored table configuration file or new table definitions This could be the result of trying to create table files that are too large for the computer system User Response to Message Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 If this is not the first poll for the collect area this message indicates that data that had been stored in the datalogger was lost before it could be collected Check the computer operating system integrity Verify that the LoggerNet system configuration files exist and the directory has not been corrupted
126. See also Data Table Table based Dataloggers Table based dataloggers store each record of data that follows an output instruction in a table Each separate occurrence of an output instruction directs the datalogger to store the data in a separate table Refer to Appendix B for additional information on table based dataloggers Table Definitions List of data available from a datalogger The datalogger supplies this list on request The tables are based on the datalogger programming The LoggerNet server must have a current version of the table definitions to collect data from the datalogger Throughput The rate at which a measurement can be made scaled to engineering units and the reading stored in Final Storage Time Stamp The date and time when data are stored in the datalogger TMStamp An entry in the status table that shows the date and time the status information was recorded Transaction The exchange of data or information between two devices or programs For example setting of the clock in a datalogger is a transaction between the server and the datalogger U Uncollectable Hole Occurs when a hole in the data cache cannot be collected from the datalogger before the data table wraps around and the records are overwritten V Variable Name Edlog uses variable names in expressions Variables are another name for input location labels For instance in the equation TempF TempC 1 8 32 TempC is an input l
127. Start up The currently executing program is indicated by the Run Now or Run Always attribute The Run Now attribute is the active program Run on Start up is the program that will run when the datalogger powers up Run Always is a combination of both attributes 6 22 Section 6 Connect JO Send Format Refresh Retrieve Properties Run Options Stop Program Help Devices Files _File Name Run Attribute Size Modified Attributes al CRD CONFIG DAT RW MMSF46V1 CR5 RW SIMPLE CR5 Rw COUNTER CR5 Rw TC_TEMP CR5 Run Now Rw TCTEMP S CR5 RW TCDIFF CR5 RW 100RECOR CR5 Run On Start up Rw CR5000 CR5 RW SUBSCAN2 CR5 Rw PORTSET CR5 Rw DELAYTES CR5 Rw MENUTEST CR5 RW QUICKTEM CR5 RW GETREC CR5 Rw CSIGN CR5 Rw FAST STO CR5 Rw nd There are several options to work with the files and directories on the CR5000 and CR9000 dataloggers Send is used to transfer files from the computer to the datalogger Clicking the Send button brings up a standard file selection dialog box A new file can be chosen to send to the highlighted device On the example screen above the CPU is the selected device Datalogger programs and data files can be sent to the datalogger Format is used to format the selected device Just like the formatting a disk on a computer all of the files on the device are deleted and the device is initialized Refresh will update the list of files for the selected device This is used whe
128. Step 3 of 3 2 xi This screen lets you select each column and set Column data format the Data Format General converts numeric values to numbers date C Text values to dates and all remaining values to text Date mov General Do not import column Skip Data preview Cancel lt Back Converting to Excel Format Date and Time Once the data file has been imported into Excel the time fields are still displayed as comma separated numbers such as Year Day of Year and Hours Minutes in HHMM format Split can take array based data files and convert the year day of year and hours minutes fields into a standard timestamp format that Excel will read directly See Section 10 3 5 3 You can also enter formulas as described below to convert the timestamp fields in the array data to the decimal format used by Excel Microsoft s database MS Access and spreadsheet MS Excel programs store dates and times as real numbers where the integer portion of the number represents the number of days since some base date usually January 1 1900 and the fractional portion represents the time of day For example June 1 2000 at 10 00 a m would be stored as 36678 41667 This formula will take the comma separated date and time fields and convert them to the decimal date use by Excel The variables shown in brackets should be replaced by the cell location for that data If you don t have all
129. TD PB CR23XTD PB Add Now ene cR500 cR510 CR10 CR10 _21 CR23 CRFX cR5000 cR3000 CRS10TD CR10T CR10XTD CR23XTD PhoneBase RFBase Generic RFRemote PakBusPort When you select an item from the left side of the Add Device window valid connections will be displayed in the right hand column Highlight the device where you want to attach the new device and click the Add Now button Continue to add devices in this manner until your network map is complete An alternative to the Add Device window is to press the right mouse button while your cursor is on a device within the main device map window A shortcut menu like the one shown will appear that will provide a list of valid devices for connection to the device you have right clicked For instance if you right click within the white space of the device map the list will present options for root devices such as ComPorts or IPPorts When you right click a ComPort only valid connections for ComPorts will be presented To delete a device from the network map select the device and either click the Delete button or select Delete from the Edit menu This will delete the device and any devices that were connected below it A keyboard shortcut Ctrl D will also delete the selected device Once all devices are added to the device map complete the tabs associated with each device Refer to Section 5 2 for information on setting up devices 5 1 2 Applying Changes
130. TE Event driven tables should have a fixed size rather than allowing them to be allocated automatically Event driven tables that are automatically allocated are assumed to have one record stored per second in calculating the length Since the datalogger tries to make the tables fill up at the same time these event driven tables will take up most of the memory leaving very little for the other longer interval automatically allocated data tables The output processing instructions included in a data table declaration determine the values output in the table The table must be called by the program in order for the output processing to take place That is each time a new measurement is made the data table is called When the table is called the output processing instructions within the table process the current inputs If the trigger conditions for the data table are true the processed values are output to the data table In the example below several averages are output Average Reps Source DataType DisableVar Average 1 RefTemp fp2 0 Average 6 TC 1 fp2 0 Average is an output processing instruction that will output the average of a variable over the output interval The parameters are repetitions the number of elements in an array to calculate averages for the Source variable or array to average the data format to store the result in Table 9 3 1 and a disable variable that allows excluding readings from the average if conditions a
131. Table Oriented ASCII TOA files do not use FSL files Data label information is included directly in the data file Data Panel is the text display for data files or other files opened by View Data can be viewed as comma separated values tab separated values in columns or in hexadecimal format Text View Options Array Definitions fe Campbell Scientific Yiew32 Data Panel C Campbellsci LoggerNet20 CR23xX dat loj x File View Help A ALA rf aei EE EE P A All arrays 117 Year RIM Day_RTM Hour_Minute_ RTM Seconds_RTM BattYqlt MIN Batt olt 12 2002 38 1252 47 00 13 14 24 79 6999 6999 1252 47 00 13 14 a 09 2007 38 1252 55 00 13 14 24 79 6999 9 00 156 09 20 2 38 1253 5 000 13 14 24 79 6999 19 00 326 109 2 02 38 1253 15 00 13 14 24 79 6999 29 00 485 109 2002 38 1253 25 00 13 14 24 79 6999 39 00 629 10942002 38 1253 35 00 13 14 24 79 6999 49 00 755 194 2002 38 1253 45 00 13 14 24 79 6999 59 00 857 09 2002 38 1253 55 00 13 14 24 79 6999 69 00 934 112 2002 38 1254 000 13 14 24 79 6999 6999 1252 48 00 13 14 109 2002 38 1254 5 000 13 14 24 80 6999 79 0 982 ey fe AEE EA ce cee nee eee Graph View Options 11 3 1 Array Selection When a data file is first opened all the arrays in that file will be displayed in the Data Panel You can display print or graph elements from only one array by picking the array from the Array Selection list This essentially acts as a filter so that
132. To manually indent an instruction place the cursor on one of the instruction s parameters and press either lt Ctrl gt 1right arrow or lt Ctrl gt left arrow the instruction is indented the direction the arrow is pointing The Display Rebuild Indention menu item resets all existing indentions and rebuilds automatic indentions Automatic indentions may need to be rebuilt when editing instructions causes the indentions to misalign 8 2 Input Locations 8 16 An input location is the space in datalogger memory where the most recent value is stored for each sensor Each time a sensor is scanned the input location is overwritten with a new value Input locations are referenced in the datalogger by number In an Edlog program each Input Location has an Input Location number and a label that appear whenever the Input Location is referenced in the program Edlog automatically assigns Input Location numbers as labels are entered Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog 8 2 1 Entering Input Locations When a parameter requires an Input Location the cursor automatically advances to where the label is keyed in When a new label is entered the next available Input Location number is automatically assigned to that label To select an existing label from a list press the right mouse button or lt F6 gt You may prefer to enter all input locations into the Edlog program before writing the program This makes all the labels availab
133. USignature The Operating System signature The value should match the value obtained by running the CSI sig program on the name obj operating system file DLDSignature Signature of the current running program file ProgSignature Signature of the compiled binary data structure for the current program This value is independent of comments added or non functional changes to the program file PC CardBytesFree Gives the number of bytes free on the PC Card Appendix B Table Based Dataloggers Table B 1 Example of Status Table Entries CR10T MemoryFree Amount in bytes of unallocated memory on the CPU SRAM The user may not be able to allocate all of free memory for data tables as final storage must be contiguous As memory is allocated and freed there may be holes that are unusable for final storage but that will show up as free bytes DLDBytesFree Amount of free space in the CPU RAM disk that is used to store program files ProcessTime Time in microseconds that it took to run through processing on the last scan Time is measured from the end of the EndScan instruction after the measurement event is set to the beginning of the EndScan before the wait for the measurement event begins for the subsequent scan MaxProcTime The maximum time required to run through processing for the current scan This value is reset when the scan exits MeasureTime The time required by the hardware to make the measurements in this scan The sum of
134. a files and erasing all filemarks Only DATA from the card or module is affected Any programs are temporarily off loaded to disk all pointers to data and programs on the card module memory are erased and the pointers reset The programs are then copied back to the card or module Before any data is erased you will have the chance to cancel the option 13 6 2 Erase Data and Programs This option will completely erase see above all data and programs from the card or module You will have the opportunity to cancel the option before the card module is erased 13 6 3 Erase and Test Card Module This option is similar to the Erase Data and Programs option except that a full integrity test is carried out on the card or module This option takes considerably longer than the simple Erase Data option and all memory location values are reset 13 17 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS CAUTION Do not disconnect an SM4M SM16M module from the SC532 or datalogger until the full memory test is complete Doing so will corrupt the module s flash memory and make it unusable until a full memory test is performed 13 7 The Menu Bar 13 18 13 7 1 File Terminal Emulator Show Directory Exit The Menu Bar appears along the top of all SMS screens with four options which can be accessed either by clicking with the mouse or from the keyboard by pressing lt Alt gt Underlined Character F O D T or H Each option pr
135. a full featured programming language providing the power and flexibility to set up complex datalogger programs to support demanding measurement tasks Datalogger programs can also be created using the PC9000 program generator software that is included with the CR5000 and CR9000 and SCWIN can be used for CR200 programming The program generator and SCWIN are not included as part of LoggerNet and will not be covered in this manual SCWIN can be downloaded from our website See Section 8 for information about Edlog the program editor for other Campbell Scientific dataloggers 9 1 Overview The CRBasic Editor is a programming tool for the CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 dataloggers It is intended for use by experienced datalogger programmers who need more flexibility and control over the datalogger operation This programming language is similar in syntax program flow and logic to the Structured BASIC programming language As shown below the CRBasic Editor s main window is divided into three parts the program entry window the Instruction Panel and the message area The Instruction Panel on the right side is a list that comprises the instructions for a particular datalogger in the CRBasic language Instructions can be selected from this list or entered directly into the program entry window on the left The message area at the bottom shows results of the compile and any errors detected The CRBasic Editor has been designed with several feature
136. a momentary pushbutton to either raise or ground that pin Always make sure that the antenna is connected to the radio before attempting to transmit Serious damage to the radio can occur if transmitting without an antenna First test the sub link of the base station to the first repeater or field station Initially treat the base station as the transmitting station and the first field or repeater station as the receiving station Disconnect the radio s multicolored cable from the RF modem To start the test have the person at the base station initiate a radio transmission When the radio transmission is received if squelch is broken you will hear it on the speaker of the scanner If you don t hear the radio transmission the signal is getting lost in the ambient noise and will not be picked up If squelch is not broken then either the signal power is less than 115 dBm or something is wrong with the power supply antenna orientation or cable connections If squelch is broken on the receiving radio the site can be tested with the attenuation pads to determine the approximate signal power if it is between 115 and 95 dBm 15 13 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide Insert the attenuation pad s 20 dB between the scanner and antenna of the receiving station ONLY most attenuation pads have a limited current capacity Initiate radio transmission from the base station transceiver If squelch is broken at the receiving station this sub
137. a port flag or boolean value Any non zero number is On or True and zero 0 is Off or False In run time mode right click a toggle to change its state The option to change the state of a toggle with a double click can be enabled in the Properties window You can set the two graphic images and separate locations to set and read the value Image is used to place graphic images on the display Most types of graphic image file formats are supported including GIF JPG TIF PNG and BMP You can set the angle of rotation if you want the graphic at an angle or turned sideways Graph is used to display a line graph of one or more data values The time stamp on the X axis reflects the PC clock Note that a difference in the PC clock and the datalogger clock coupled with a small time window for the graph could result in no data being displayed You can add multiple traces to the graph set the background set right and left axis scales and colors for traces ComCheck is used to provide a visual and or audible alarm when data collection has failed a sufficient number of times to put the datalogger into a Primary or Secondary Retry mode In run time mode right clicking the component with your mouse will disable the audible alarm Time is used to display time and date You can set options to display the server time server time at last data collection station time station time of last record stored or PC time SetPoint Gauge TableD
138. ables that hold only one record such as the Input Locations table and the Status table would have only two records assigned in the data cache The storage in the data cache is designed to operate with ring memory just like the datalogger This means that records will be stored in the data cache area for that table until it has reached the maximum number of records the next data record will replace the oldest record in the storage table and so on C 1 Appendix C Software Organization C 2 C 2 2 Operation Normal data collection from the datalogger is done with polling based on the scheduled collection interval set up by the user This is the most efficient means of data collection for networks with rapid direct communications links When it is time for a scheduled data collection the server sends a data poll request to the datalogger to get all of the data stored in the selected tables since the last poll The tables to be collected are specified by the user in the Setup screen As each record is written to the data cache the server adds a filemark number to the record as it is stored This filemark number is used to identify discontinuities in the data The filemark number starts out as zero when the table for the data cache is created or re initialized This number is incremented each time a discontinuity is seen in the data records Such a discontinuity can occur when there is a gap in the record numbers because the data table f
139. about the alignment you choose Selecting Top Align for a group of components that are arranged vertically will cause all the components to end up on top of each other on Top Align lines up the selected components to the top of the first component selected oO Bottom Align lines up the selected components to the bottom of the first component selected 5 Left Align lines up the selected components with the left side of the first component selected S Right Align lines up the selected components with the right side of the first component selected Size allows you to set two or more objects to the same overall size width or height as the first object selected Select one or more components by using the cursor to click and drag a bounding box around the desired components The components can also be selected by selecting the first component and then selecting the other components while holding down the lt ctrl gt key The first 12 7 Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC 12 8 component is identified by the dark red boundary The other selected components have a light red boundary m Copy Size makes all the selected components the same size as the first component B Copy Width makes the width of the selected components the same as the first component Bt Copy Height makes the width of the selected components the same as the first component Ordering is used to manage the position of graphic objects on the wo
140. action Log TranX log e Communications Log CommsX log D 1 Appendix D Log Files e Object State Log StateX log e Low Level Log IOXSerial Port_1 log where X is for the currently active file and 0 1 2 etc for archived files The server stores the most recent log records in a file that has a character in the place of the version number When this file grows to the point that it will exceed the threshold set by the File Size setting for that log the server will rename the log file by replacing the dollar sign with a new version number At the same time that the server rolls over to a new log file the File Count parameter for that log will also be evaluated If there are more saved files for that log than are allowed by the File Count parameter the server will delete the oldest of these files until the count is less than or equal to the File Count D 1 3 Log File Message Formats D 1 3 1 General File Format Information The communications status transaction and object state logs all share the same basic file format Each record in a log file ends with a carriage return and line feed A single record will consist of two or more fields where each field is surrounded by quotation marks and separated by commas The two fields that will be present in all records are Timestamp The server time when the record was generated It will have the following format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS mmm where YYYY is the 4 di
141. adjustable tabular display can be changed by typing a number directly into the combo box or selecting the up or down arrow to change the value The range for the tab width is 8 to 27 character spaces The tabular format is unavailable for files opened using Open As Text 11 3 3 Changing the Font The font used for the text display can be changed with the font selection dialog Click the Font button or select View Font from the menu to change the font used for the printer and Data Panel display Only fixed width fonts can be selected to allow the data columns to line up Typical fonts include Courier Courier New Fixedsys Lucida Console MS LineDraw and Terminal Normal font options such as color bold underline and italic are also available 11 4 Graph Panel NOTE The Graph Panel is used to display a line graph of one or two data values The values to graph are selected in the Data Panel by clicking one column and then holding the lt ctrl gt key down while clicking the second The selected columns will be highlighted in blue and red The Graph Panel is unavailable for files opened using Open As Text You choose the type of graph by the button you click the Data Panel Toolbar Click the single axis graph button and the graph will be displayed with only one vertical axis Click the two axis graph button and the graph will be displayed with two axes one on each side Section 11 View The scale for the graph axes defaults
142. al element to use for the Stop Condition is time hrmn Assuming the third element of the hourly Output Array is hrmn and midnight is output as 0 the Stop Condition is entered as 3 0 or F 3 0 if the F option is used The Time Series processing is performed over a day defined by midnight to midnight If only hourly Output Arrays were contained in the Input File the Copy line could be left blank If other Output Arrays are present which need not be included in the Time Series processing a logical Copy condition would be the Output Array ID of the hourly output The Trigger on Stop Condition functions the same for multiple Input files as it does for a single Input File If the option is enabled on several Input Files and the Stop Conditions do not occur at the same point in each file when a file s Stop Condition is met its time series data are output and blanks are output for data selected from the other Input Files Say for example that you were interested in the average value of the first data point element 2 for each test in the data set listed in Table 10 3 2 The Input File template would look like that shown in Table 10 3 4 TABLE 10 3 4 Input File Entries to Process the First Data Point for each Test First Input File DATA_1 DAT 1 Stop Condition F 1 200 Select AVG 2 The Copy Condition tells Split which arrays should be used for the output data After the Start Condition is satisfied and before the Stop Conditio
143. al functions operate on a per Output Array basis The average maximum minimum and standard deviation of a specified group of elements within an array are calculated SpaAvg x y returns the spatial average of elements x through y Examples SpaAvg 1 7 258 74 SpaAvg 1 4 7 122 54 SpaMax x y returns the maximum value of elements x through y Examples SpaMax 1 7 1200 SpaMax 1 2 5 176 SpaMin x y returns the minimum value of elements x through y Examples SpaMin 1 7 7 89 SpaMin 1 2 5 55 1 SpaSd x y returns the standard deviation of elements x through y Examples SpaSd 1 7 394 57 SpaSd 5 2 1 49 607 Sqrt x returns the square root of element x Examples Sqrt 3 34 641 Sqrt 3 2 0 1200 10 25 Section 10 Split 10 3 6 4 Time Series Functions Details and Examples TABLE 10 3 7 Time Series Functions TIME SERIES FUNCTIONS Avg x n Average Blanks x n Number of blanks in element Count x n Number of data points in element Max x n Maximum Min x n Minimum RunTotal x n Running total Sd x n Standard deviation Smpl x n Sample raw value Smp IMax x y n Sample y on a maximum x SmpIMin x y n Sample y on a minimum x Total x n Totalize WAvg x n Unit vector mean wind direction in degrees NOTE x can be an element or a valid expression n is optional and is the number of arrays to include in the function Date and Edate can be used for th
144. allow the server to write the data output files Data collected from a datalogger could not be written to the data output file A client kept the communication link on line longer than the specified max time on line The name of a table was changed at the request of a client On CR5000 and CR9000 loggers this is a reset for the table in the datalogger and on the PC Appendix D Log Files Message Text Message Parameters Message Meaning User Response to Message Collect The account name of the The collection schedule reset logged in client schedule was reset by the indicated client Collect area The name of the collection One of the settings setting changed area The setting identifier for the specified for the setting that was collect area was changed The new value of changed The the setting The account identifiers for the name of the logged in setting can be found client in CoraScript help PakBus route A new PakBus route has been added to the routing table PakBus route A PakBus route has lost been lost and will be removed from the routing table PakBus station A new PakBus station was added to the network Call back begin A device has called in to the server starting the call back response Call back A datalogger that stopped called in to the server with call back is hanging up Client logged The login name of the A client application off client The reason the has closed or lost the sess
145. ally However this information is contained in the dld file as commented text When you download a program to a datalogger LoggerNet uses the input location and final storage information from this file If you communicate with a datalogger that already has a program in it you can use the Tools Associate NOTE Section 6 Connect Program option to select a dld file from which LoggerNet should get this information Programs created with Edlog version 2 0 and greater include both the input location information and the final storage information in the dld file Previous versions of Edlog stored only the input location information in the did If final storage information is not available for viewing in LoggerNet after associating the file you may need to recompile the program file with a version of Edlog that stores this information in the dld file If you are using Edlog Version 2 0 or greater and labels are still not available for use check Edlog s Options DLD File Labels menu item and ensure that labels are being stored in the file when the program is compiled 6 25 Section 6 Connect 6 26 Section 7 Status Monitor w The Status Monitor screen provides a way to monitor communications statistics for the datalogger network Statistics are displayed for data collection attempts and communication failures There are also functions available to monitor the log messages for the computer and the tasks that have been set u
146. alue is exceeded communication will be re attempted immediately Forcing the connection offline and back on quickly causes errors because not enough time is allowed for the serial server to reset the TCP IP socket 16 3 3 Special Considerations To implement TCP IP to RF communications a serial server has to be provided as the interface between TCP IP and the serial connection on the RF base There are a number of Serial Server devices available including the NL100 Network Link Interface manufactured by Campbell Scientific When connecting the RF Base to a Serial Server or the RS232 connector of the NL100 you will need to build or modify a serial cable to either cut or remove the RTS line The other standard serial communication lines need to be in place This special cable is needed to allow an RF base to work with the standard RS 232 Port on other Internet serial devices The drawing below depicts the cable needed pod N1 43 TxD 2 RxD 3 2 2 5 5 P RTS P ie A meat g 5 CTS 5 Campbell Scientific DSR RF232 fe Serial Server q 6 6 s RF Network Base 8 J20 DTR 20 38 DCD g8 l3 2 2 7 GND The serial server must be configured for this application before operation The basic settings that must be configured are listed below Depending on the specific serial server there may be other settings that must be configured for proper operation
147. ampbell Scientific application engineer for more help on troubleshooting links NOTE Using remote keyboard mode can result in loss of programs data or the ability to further communicate with a datalogger over a remote link for example by altering security settings or changing a program leading to memory resets or powering down a cellular phone Remember that keystrokes entered may not reach the datalogger intact That is the datalogger may not receive what you send 15 5 RF Communication Link Issues There are two sets of problems that can degrade RF communications The first is using combinations of RF components that do not work well together The second is deterioration or failure of the RF components in the system There are also situations where the equipment is performing as it should but marginal communications are due to poor line of sight or other environmental factors There are a number ways to test the operation of an RF system The three sections following illustrate things to look for and tests to perform to troubleshoot RF operations 15 5 1 Checking RF Components and Connections Before testing RF signal strength there are several things that should be done to verify that the right RF components are in place 1 Check that the RF modem has the correct switch ID set on the DIP switches This is a common problem and should be checked first 15 9 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide 15 10 2 Check the type and bran
148. an address of 8 is present and you set the target address to 1 you will still be able to connect to the storage module However if your module had an address of 1 and your target address was set to 5 you could not connect The above shows that the target address need not represent the actual address of the Storage Module The physical address of the Module is shown on the Advanced status page Changing the physical module address will not change the selected target address and in fact changing the physical address will not have any noticeable effect until you disconnect from the Storage Module NOTE While up to eight SM4M or SM16M storage modules can be addressed communications may be unreliable if more than four are connected to a datalogger at a time Connect Disconnect After connecting your storage module to your computer and selecting the required COM port and baud rate click the Connect button to establish communication between the computer and the storage module If everything is satisfactory a successful communications link will be established and the wording on the Connect button will change to Disconnect If your first attempt at connection fails and an error message Cannot connect to CSM1 or Communications Problems appears try to connect again by clicking the Connect button It may take some time up to 30 seconds to establish the connection The most likely cause of a failed communication link is
149. and data to be stored whenever the temperature TC 1 is greater than 100 9 7 2 Arrays of Multipliers and Offsets for Sensor Calibration If variable arrays are used for the multiplier and offset parameters in measurements that use repetitions the instruction will automatically step through the multiplier and offset arrays as it steps through the channels This allows a single measurement instruction to measure a series of individually calibrated sensors applying the correct calibration to each sensor If the multiplier and offset are not arrays the same multiplier and offset are used for each repetition VoltSE Dest Reps Range SEChan Delay Integ Mult Offset Calibration factors Mult 1 0 123 Offset 1 0 23 Mult 2 0 115 Offset 2 0 234 Mult 3 0 114 Offset 3 0 224 VoltSE Pressure 3 mV 1000 6 1 1 100 Mult Offset 9 8 Program Access to Data Tables Data stored in a table can be accessed from within the program The format used is Tablename Fieldname fieldname index records back Where Tablename is the name of the table in which the desired value is stored Fieldname is the name of the field in the table The fieldname is always an array even if it consists of only one variable the fieldname index must always be specified Records back is the number of records back in the data table from the current time 1 is the most recent record stored 2 is the record stored prior to the most recent For example the
150. and the setting by number F 2 Appendix F CoraScript F 2 3 Creating and using a Network Backup Script One of the most useful commands for network maintenance is create backup script Executing this command will create a script file of CoraScript commands that can be used to rebuild the existing datalogger network and configure all of the device settings It will not save or restore any data that has been collected but can serve as a means to restore the network map and settings To create the script enter the command along with a file name and path for the script file create backup script c temp mynetwork script This will write all of the commands necessary to build and configure the network map into the file mynetwork script To restore the network map remove all of the devices in the current map and then from a command prompt enter Cora_cmd exe lt c temp mynetwork script The less than symbol lt is redirection that tells the CoraScript executable to read commands from the specified file For more information about this command see the CoraScript help F 2 4 Hole Management There are several commands available with CoraScript to manage the hole collection process These functions are not available through the standard user interface applications See the CoraScript help for details about these commands List holes Purge holes Delete holes F 2 5 Scripting CoraScript Commands To automate network proces
151. art Hole collect response received Message Parameters Table name Beginning record number Ending record number Table name Beginning record number Ending record number Table name Beginning record number Ending record number Table name Beginning record number Ending record number Appendix D Log Files Message Meaning User Response to Message The message from the datalogger confirming the start of data advise has been received The message from the datalogger confirming the suspension of data advise has been received The attempt to start or stop a data advise with the datalogger has failed or the operation has timed out waiting for a response A hole or missed records has been detected in the data coming from the datalogger The missing records specified have been collected from the datalogger The missing records have been overwritten in the datalogger The hole collect request has been started This message won t go to the datalogger until the BMP 1 message is sent see message 104 The datalogger has returned the response to the hole collect request This will contain either the data or state that the hole is lost Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 The server will automatically try to collect the data if hole collection is enabled Appendix D Log Files Code Message Text
152. art Stop condition you will get the error message Cannot Paste There The Paste operation copied the numbers of each of the fields into the Select box Notice also that it pasted the Array ID into the copy condition 1 60 tells Split that in order to copy a line of data the first value in that line must be 60 Split uses the Array ID to discriminate between the hourly and daily data Now specify the Output File Without one specified Split will run and display results but no output file will be created Click the OUTPUT FILE tab Type in hourly for the name of the output file By default Split will use the file extension PRN creating the output file hourly prn The file hourly prn will overwrite any existing file with the same name unless the Append check box is selected The Labels option from the toolbar can also assist in labeling the output values Once again choose LABELS USE FINAL STORAGE LABELS and select array 60 and all the field names This time move the cursor to Line 1 of the first column of labels on the OUTPUT FILE tab and press Paste Figure 10 2 6 The labels from the final storage file will be pasted into each of the columns Data File Labels BIRCH FSL Output Arrays Field Names Batt olt_MIN Select File Battolt_Hr_Min_t Encl _RH_MAX Encl _RH_Hr_Min_ Paste LogrTemp_MAX LogrTemp_Hr_Mi Help AirTemp_MIN Done AirTemp_Hr_Min_ y Output Interval 60 000 Min F
153. arted When you start SMS the main window appears with tabbed configuration screens that give you access to the options you need for the type of storage module you have An example screen for the SM192 716 module is shown jp SMS Me xj File Options Data Tools Help CSM1 MCR1 SM192 SM716 PC Card SM4M SM16M Configuration and Advanced Status COM Port Setup Print Enable Mode Module Address Baud Rate fi Baud Rate 76800 3600 Display Pointer 9600 gt Encoding fs gt C No encoding Storage Mode Encode ASCII Ring Mode WV Via Datalogger Fill and Stop PROM Details Test Battery Ba PA F Version 2 UnLoaded OK Checksum 16278 Loaded OK oi wo w Advanced Setup APrograms Data Erase Disconnect Update Status Abort Standard and advanced status pages FIGURE 13 2 1 Typical SMS Screen CSM1 SM192 SM176 SM4M or SM16M Storage Modules usually require an SC532 interface plus a 7026 standard serial or SC25PS cable A basic connection diagram is shown in Figure 13 2 2 below If you are using an SC532A interface you will need a 9 pin to 9 pin serial cable instead of the 9 to 25 The Storage Module manuals give full details of connecting the modules to the computer NOTE The MCR1 Memory Card Reader does not require an SC532 interface 13 2 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS COM
154. as been selected clicking the Read button brings up a file selection menu for you to select the location in which to store the program on disk A progress indicator will confirm that the program is being read from the card or module Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 5 Data Clicking the DATA tab will bring up the DATA CONTROL OPTION screen as shown in Figure 13 5 1 below CSM1 MCR1 5M192 SM716 PC Card SM4M SM16M File Format Comma separated C ASCII with Array ID s C As Stored File Naming Options DATAQOO DAT IE Auto Name Control Auto Increment Name C Append to Current File C New Name for Each File Show Module Directory Get All Get New Data FIGURE 13 5 1 DATA CONTROL Screen 13 5 1 File Format Before you attempt to get collect any data you should select your preferred file format Comma Separated This format has array elements separated by commas No element identifiers are included and all leading zeros and trailing zeros after the decimal point are removed Each array is terminated with a carriage return and line feed Comma separated format is comparatively compact can be read when printed and can be imported into most data analysis packages e g if you use a CSV file extension Microsoft Excel will auto import the file 13 13 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 14 An example is given below 101 279 1413 12 68 24 75 75
155. at the Secondary Retry interval is in effect Check the date and time listed for the next data collection in the Status Monitor e Look at the collection state data for the datalogger in the Status Monitor This is displayed as one of four states Normal collection Primary retry Secondary retry Collection disabled Section 5 Setup e Check the Status window and ensure the Pause Schedule box is cleared e For table based dataloggers ensure the table definitions have been retrieved from the datalogger and are current 5 5 Task Master da The Task Master sets up and manages the optional user defined tasks associated with data collection Tasks can be set up to trigger data collection or execute batch file scripts or programs based on a variety of data collection events Tasks may also be scheduled based on time intervals Clicking the Tasks button or selecting Tasks from the Options menu brings up the Task Master window This window shows all of the dataloggers in the network and any tasks that have been defined Ifa task is attached to a datalogger as Task_1 in the example below the task execution will be based on a datalogger collection event Task_2 is not linked with a datalogger and will run as a scheduled event Task Master Paused bese Wate 04 24 03 H Base Ine After Any Scheduled Call 12 00 00 4M EVER Interval tc a C Program Files CampbellS ci LoggerNet 2 1 a SPLITR C
156. ata values that have been collected from final storage area 1 or 2 In combination with the FS to Collect statistic this can show progress toward the completion of data collection Final Storage Area 1 2 to Collect FS1 to Collect FS2 to Collect Array based dataloggers only When LoggerNet first contacts the datalogger for data collection the datalogger indicates how much data 7 3 Section 7 Status Monitor there is to collect from each of the storage areas This statistic shows the number of values for the current data collection activity When the number of values collected matches the number to collect all of the data for this call has been collected Last Clock Check Last Clk Chk The computer date and time of the last time the clock was checked for this device Last Clock Difference Last Clk Diff The amount of time the datalogger clock deviated from the LoggerNet computer s clock when the last clock check was performed If the datalogger clock is slower than the computer clock this will be a positive value Last Clock Set Last Clk Set The computer date and time that the datalogger s clock was last set to match the LoggerNet computer s clock Last Collect Attempt The computer date and time when data collection was last attempted for this device Last Data Collection The date and time that data was last collected from the device by LoggerNet Line State This is an indication of the current communic
157. ataTable Name Trigger Size DataTable Temp 1 2000 The DataTable instruction has three parameters a user specified name for the table a trigger condition and the size to make the table in RAM The trigger condition may be a variable expression or constant The trigger is true if it is not equal to 0 Data are output if the trigger is true and there are no other conditions to be met No output occurs if the trigger is false 0 The size is the number of records to store in the table You can specify a fixed number or enter 1 to have the datalogger auto allocate the number of records The example creates a table name Temp outputs any time other conditions are met and retains 2000 records in RAM DataInterval TintoInt Interval Units Lapses DataInterval 0 10 msec 10 DatalInterval is an instruction that modifies the conditions under which data are stored The four parameters are the time into the interval the interval on which data are stored the units for time and the number of lapses or gaps in the interval to track The example outputs at 0 time into on the interval relative to real time the interval is 10 milliseconds and the table will keep track of 10 lapses The DataInterval instruction reduces the memory required for the data table because the time of each record can be calculated from the interval and the time of the most recent record stored 9 17 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor NO
158. atal Attemnts X Cancel Help Entries in the Available Statistics field will not be displayed on the main screen Entries in the Selected Statistics field will be displayed on the screen The arrow buttons are used to move entries between the two columns Alternately an entry can be moved from one column to the other by double clicking it Last Collect Attempt Next Data Coll Vals Last Coll A variety of status information and statistics are available These statistics values are updated continuously as LoggerNet communicates with the devices in the network The actual text as displayed on the screen is shown below in parentheses e Average Error Rate Avg Err A running average of the number of communication failures and retries Each failure increments the average 5 The error rate decreases slowly with more successful communications This is done to allow marginal link errors to be displayed long enough for an administrator to observe Section 7 Status Monitor Collection Enabled Coll Enabled Indicates whether or not scheduled data collection is enabled for the device Data collection is set up and enabled in the Setup Screen Collection Retries Coll Retries The total number of data collection attempts that have occurred under the primary and secondary retry collection states Coll State Collection State Coll State Indicates the current state of scheduled data collection Normal The normal data colle
159. atalogger is the wrong type Type lt Enter gt lt Enter gt lt Enter gt about 2 3 seconds apart To send carriage return characters to the array based datalogger If the datalogger recognizes these characters it will send back an asterisk for every lt Enter gt keystroke If it does not perhaps it s not an array based datalogger or you ve chosen a baud rate that s too high for the datalogger or the quality of the phone line is too poor to support that baud rate Type A lt Enter gt You should see a string of characters from the datalogger that report its status including final storage pointers memory size perhaps lithium battery voltage and internal error counters See Section 5 in the datalogger manual for more information on telecommunication commands If you do not then the phone line may be too poor to support communications A long series of nonsense characters usually indicates electrical noise in the vicinity of the telephone cable that the modems are interpreting as high and low digital signals and reporting them as characters Type E lt Enter gt To hang up the datalogger which causes it to turn off its phone modem which in turn causes loss of the carrier signal between the modems After a few seconds you should see NO CARRIER reported by your base modem Type ATH lt Enter gt To hang up your base modem Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide I
160. ated several times in the program it can be packaged in a subroutine and called when needed rather than repeating all the code each time The program section defines the action of datalogging The scan sets the interval for a series of measurements Enter the measurements to make Enter any additional processing with the measurements The Data Table must be called to process output data Check measurements and Initiate controls if necessary Loop back and wait if necessary for the next scan 9 13 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 2 2 Program Declarations Variables must be declared before they can be used in the program Variables declared as Public can be monitored by LoggerNet using the Numeric Monitors Graphical Displays or LoggerNetData applications Variables declared using Dim cannot be displayed Variables assigned to a fixed value are used as constants For example in a CRBasic program there may be more than one temperature or other measurements Rather than have many different names a variable array with one name and many elements may be used A thermocouple temperature might be called TCTemp With an array of 20 elements the names of the individual temperatures are TCTemp 1 TCTemp 2 TCTemp 3 TCTemp 20 The array notation allows compact code to perform operations on all the variables For example to convert ten temperatures in a variable array from C to F For I 1
161. ating Windows communication programs e Acomputer without a buffered UART Universal Asynchronous Receive Transmit serial port e g a 16550 UART or without the FIFO First In First Out option enabled Other communications problems can occur if the computer does not actually have a buffered UART but is using the Windows 95 default configuration with the FIFO option enabled e A high level of communications activity on another port e Lack of computer memory causing the computer to do a considerable amount of hard disk paging If the SMS communication routines are paged to disk and take too long to load back into memory the buffer can overflow 13 5 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 6 If the communication errors are reported as CE_RXOVER errors reducing the baud rate will help because it stops the buffer from filling up too quickly in situations where SMS is not able to respond to the incoming data Via Datalogger Target Address SM192 716 and SM4M SM16M Modules Only Via Datalogger Target Address When an SM192 716 or SM4M SM16M Storage Module is connected with an SC12 cable to a datalogger which supports direct communications CR10 X CR500 CR510 or CR23X you can establish communications using the Via Datalogger mode as explained below As an example when an SM192 716 module is connected to a CR10 X CR23X CR500 or CR510 datalogger with an SC12 cable direct communications can be establi
162. ation let the wattmeter stabilize and record the wattmeter reading Reverse the directional arrow so it is pointing back toward the radio initiate radio communication let the wattmeter stabilize and record the wattmeter reading This second reading is the reflected power Wr Take the square root of the reflected power divided by the forward power to arrive at the square root ratio R Calculate the Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR with the following equation VSWR 1 R 1 R Where R Wr Wf The impedance of the RF transmission cable usually RG 8A U and antenna combination should match the impedance 50 Q of the radio output circuit When the transmission cable or antenna does not match the impedance of the output circuit of the radio not all of the energy supplied to the cable will flow into the antenna Some of the energy supplied will be reflected back to the radio causing standing waves on the cable The ratio of voltage across the line at the high voltage points to that at the low voltage points is known as the Voltage Standing Wave Ratio or VSWR The VSWR should be less than 1 5 1 for error free radiotelemetry For example if the forward power Wf is 5 Watts and the reflected power Wr is 0 2 Watts the VSWR is 1 5 1 The VSWR will increase when e There is a problem with the connectors Check for loose corroded or damaged connectors Connector problems are the most common source of RF communications failure
163. ations activity for the device In normal communication these will be changing often and will provide a feel for how the network is working The possible states are listed below Not applicable LoggerNet cannot communicate with this device directly Table based RF Modems is one example Off Line There is no active communication with this device On Line LoggerNet is actively communicating with this device Transparent The device is being used as a bridge to communicate with another device Hanging Up LoggerNet has finished communication with this device or the other devices on the link and is closing down communication Comm Disabled Communications for this device have been disabled for this device a parent device or the network Lithium Battery Voltage Lith Batt Volt The voltage level of the datalogger s lithium SRAM back up battery Logger Version Logger Ver Array based dataloggers only This number indicates the version level of the datalogger This number is used by LoggerNet to adjust communication for older dataloggers Low 5v Battery Detect Low 5V A counter that indicates the number of times the datalogger s 5V supply has dropped below 5V The counter s maximum limit is 99 it can be reset in the datalogger s B mode Section 7 Status Monitor e Low Voltage Stopped Low Volt Stopped The number of times the datalogger program has been halted because the datalogger s 12 V powe
164. aximum number of neighbors Enter the number of dataloggers in the PakBus network that the datalogger can communicate with directly i e without going through another datalogger Maximum number of routers Enter the number of neighbors to the datalogger that act as routers to one or more other dataloggers in the PakBus network 8 4 6 2 Beacon Intervals NOTE This option is used to set the interval on which the datalogger will transmit a beacon out a particular port to the PakBus network Use the drop down list box to select the port over which the beacon will be transmitted and enter the desired interval in the Communications Interval field This option is the same as the datalogger s D18 mode In some networks a beacon interval might interfere with regular communication in the PakBus network such as in an RF network since the beacon is broadcast to all devices within range In such cases it may be more appropriate to use the Neighbor Filter instead which broadcasts a beacon only to those dataloggers which it has not received communication from within a specified interval 8 4 6 3 Neighbor Filter This option allows you to list potential neighbors that are available to the datalogger in the PakBus network The datalogger will attempt to issue a hello command to all the dataloggers listed in the neighbors filter list and will transmit an expected communication interval The communication interval is the interval on which th
165. be used in both the Start and Stop conditions It provides a simple way to create a monthly report Split will not start reading if the exact specified starting time cannot be found The interval 5 minutes 60 minutes and 5 seconds in the examples above must be evenly divisible into 60 minutes e Ifthe start time is a certain number of days prior to the PC time the file will be processed beginning at midnight of the day specified e To specify a start time in minutes from the current PC time you must also specify a day parameter of 0 Otherwise processing will begin at the first instance in the data file that the minutes parameter equals the current minutes 10 3 2 3 Using Time Synchronization While Starting Relative to PC Time Split tries to time sync files to the top of the hour when starting relative to PC time If you are synchronizing files where the data output interval is not at the top of the hour you will need to specify an interval in the Copy Condition that represents a window of time in which Split should look for the hour minute For instance if your data is output 50 minutes into a 60 minute interval and therefore your time stamps are 50 150 250 350 2350 your Start Condition and Copy Conditions for the first file might look like the following Start Condition 2 1 3 50 Copy Condition 1 106 and3 60 10 Section 10 Split Where element 1 is the array ID element 2 is the Julian day element 3 i
166. ble CR10X TD family dataloggers or Public Table CR x000 dataloggers When a datalogger measures a sensor the sensor reading is stored in a temporary register called an input location or variable With each new measurement the old value is overwritten by the new value The Inlocs or Public table contains a time stamp record number flag status port status and the reading from each sensor scanned or user created input locations e Status Table The Status table contains information on the datalogger Data is written to the table with each datalogger program execution Note that the actual fields contained in the table are datalogger specific Table B 1 below describes typical fields that are given in the Status table Not all fields will be present or applicable for all dataloggers See the datalogger operator s manual for specifics Table B 1 Example of Status Table Entries CR10T TMStamp Date and time the status information was recorded RecNBR The record number in the table Datalogger battery voltage Watchdog The watchdog checks the processor state software timers and program related counters If an error occurs the watchdog counter is incremented Overruns A table overrun occurs when the datalogger has insufficient time between execution intervals to complete one pass through the program This counter is incremented with each table overrun Number of input locations allocated for the program B 7 Appendix B Tab
167. bled Screen Display bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen only lines with bad data are displayed bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen only lines with bad data are displayed bad values displayed in red and preceded by asterisk the text bad data highlighted in a red box at bottom right of screen PRN File blanks inserted for bad values blanks inserted for bad values abc inserted in place of bad values comment inserted in place of bad values only lines with bad data output blanks inserted for bad values only lines with bad data output blanks inserted for bad values RPT File or Printer Output bad values preceded by asterisk bad values preceded by asterisk only lines with bad data output bad values preceded by asterisk The Screen Display box must be checked if not no data will be displayed on the Split Run screen NOTE 10 22
168. button is pressed This dialog box contains a field for each of the parameters in the instruction Edit these fields as necessary and then press the Insert button to paste the instruction into the program Below is an example of the Parameter dialog box for the differential voltage instruction VoltDiff 23 YoltDiff X Variables Destination wolf Volt Repetitions 1 Voltage Range mY 5000 DiffChan 1 Insert Cancel RevDiff Measure second time Low referenced to High SettlingT ime Help Integration 250 us integration Multiplier Offset Short Cuts for Editing the Parameters Right clicking or pressing F2 on a parameter that uses a Variable as an input type will invoke a list of variables that have been defined in the program A sample list is shown below The variable list is sorted by variable type and then alphabetically by name In the list below the first green A denotes that the variable AIRCOOL is set up as an Alias Constants are listed with a blue C Dimensioned variables are listed with a red D and Public variables are listed with a black P 9 3 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 4 AIRCOOL AIRHEAT FAN OFFSET D VOLT P RH P TEMP At any time you can press F10 to bring up the list of variables regardless of the input type for the selected parameter Also defined variables can be selected from the Variables drop down list box at the upper rig
169. caling Upper Y Value 10 Upper Y Value 0 Lower Y Value 10 Lower Y Value 0 Cancel Sp Apply Scaling Options Automatic Scaling will adjust the axis according to the values currently being displayed on the graph The maximum and minimum will be set to display the largest and smallest values of all the fields being graphed If there are values that are much larger or much smaller than the others they can dominate the scaling and make variations in the other fields harder to see Power of Ten Scaling applies a Power of Ten multiplier to each of the data fields so the graph will have a scale of either 0 to 10 or 10 to 10 so that all values can be displayed on the same graph The data values are scaled so they will fit between the option chosen When this option is in effect pressing the Rescale Button on the Graph tab will rescale any value that has fallen outside of the scale Custom Scaling The Upper Y Value and Lower Y Value fields are used to specify a fixed range for the Y axis When this option is in effect the Rescale button on the Graph will be disabled Any data values that do not fall within the specified range will not appear on the graph 6 5 1 3 2 Graph Time Display Options Select Graph Width determines the amount of time displayed across the width of the graph The default setting of 1 minute will display 1 minute of data If larger graph widths are specified the graph
170. cccccescesseeseesceeeeeeeeeeeenereeeeeneensees C 1 C 2 LoggerNet Server Data Cacher ieia eoe e E EES C 1 C 2 1 Organization eenen iii i i E C 1 vi LoggerNet Table of Contents C22 Operations xsciiice ake Misi eevee Sh ALA E C 2 C 2 3 Retrieving Data from the Cache ceccecceeeeseeeteeeeeseeeneeeseeees C 2 C 2 4 Updating Table Definitions 20 0 ec eeceeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeseeeneeeneeees C 2 C 3 Directory Organization ccccescesesssecseeesseeeeeeseeeeceeseneenseceeenseenaeenaes C 3 C 3 1 C CampbellSci LoggerNet Directory Working Directory C 3 C 3 2 C Program Files CampbellSci LoggerNet Directory Program File Directory cccccesceeseeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeens C 4 C 3 3 Backing Up Critical Information 0 cceecceeeeseeeteeseeeneeeneees C 4 D Log ECS ic seo occa E R ete D 1 D 1 Event Logging eeecesccesecssecssecseceseceeecseecseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseeneeeeenaees D 1 Delo sLog Gate cones lt ctie 05 Sh ice endo RE Hoe ee ed D 1 D 1 2 Enabling Log Files nicioni iieri E E R E E D 1 D 1 3 Log File Message Formats 0 cccceesseesceeeceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeneeees D 2 E Importing Files into Excel E 1 E 1 Array Based Data File Import s sssseeeseseeesseserseseeerssreressesresreseesessee E 1 E 2 Table Based Data File Import s essseeessseseesseserseeseesessteresseseesreseesessee E 4 Fi CoraScript eni aa a a F 1 F 1 CoraScript Fundamentals ccccccces
171. ccssecseesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenaees F 1 F 2 Useful CoraScript Operations ccccceeseseesceeseeeeceeseeesesseeeeeeeesseenaes F 2 F 2 1 Connecting to the LoggerNet Server cccccesesseeseeeteeeeeneeenes F 2 F 2 2 Checking and Setting Device Settings ecceeseseeseeeteeneeeees F 2 F 2 3 Creating and using a Network Backup Script ossee F 3 F 2 4 Hole Management cccccescessseesceesceesceseeeseeeceseesaeesseeneeeneeenes F 3 F 2 5 Scripting CoraScript Commands cccccesesseesteeseeeteeseeeneeenes F 3 vii LoggerNet Table of Contents viii Section 1 Introduction LoggerNet is a software application that enables users to set up configure and retrieve data from a network of Campbell Scientific dataloggers and share this data over an Ethernet communications network This software application is designed to run under Windows NT version 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP The software will also run under Microsoft Windows 95 and 98 though there may be some performance issues with these systems see Section 2 0 Requirements LoggerNet software supports communication and data collection for array based dataloggers including the CR500 CR510 CR10 CR10X 21X CR23X and CR7 the table based dataloggers including the CR5000 CR9000 CR510 TD CRIOT CR10X TD and the CR23X TD and the new series of PakBus dataloggers including the CR510 PB CR10X PB CR23X PB and CR200 205 The LoggerNet
172. cent record collected The Offset from Newest specifies how much time to go back NOTE Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide from the current write index For example an offset of 10 with a setting of minutes will get the last 10 minutes of data collected e At Offset from Newest This option allows you to specify how many records back from the current write index to go A setting of 10 in the Start Offset box will display the last 10 records collected The Start File Mark Start Record Number Start Offset Begin Date and Offset from Newest edit boxes are used only with the corresponding start options above For each option selected the appropriate boxes are enabled Once the start options have been set click the OK button to start writing to the file The records are always displayed in the list box on the bottom of the screen If you have set up an output file they are also sent to the output file Ordering Option e Collected displays and writes the data to the file in the order it was collected by the server This setting is useful to look at the actual data record storage in the data cache e Logged With Holes The output will include only complete data sequences If the Data Table Monitor comes to a hole that has not yet been filled it will wait for the hole to fill before displaying or writing the next record to the file e Logged Without Holes The data output will be displayed and written to file as quickly as it is colle
173. change a number highlight the number and delete or click the number and use backspace Multiple entries are allowed to accommodate entry of access codes credit card numbers or other numbers that may be needed for communication to the remote modem and its attached device As an entry is created a new line is 5 17 Section 5 Setup 5 18 5 2 12 RF400 NOTE added for additional entries as needed The first number will be dialed following the specified delay The next number will then be dialed after the delay specified The amount of time to delay is in milliseconds so a 5 second delay would be entered as 5000 milliseconds If the RF400 is being used in a point to point network one base radio to one remote radio where all of the settings in the radios are identical then the communications link can be depicted on the device map as a direct connection COM Port with datalogger attached no RF400s shown in the device map However in a point to multipoint network where all remote radios have a separate address the RF400s are depicted on the device map Refer to the RF400 Users Manual for complete information on RF400 radio setup The RF400 has only one tab the Hardware tab Communication Enabled Before communication can take place all devices in the chain must be enabled When this box is selected the RF400 radio is enabled for communication Maximum Time On line A time limit can be set for the length of time LoggerN
174. child of the remote phone modem and the RF Base be connected as a child of the datalogger Then the RF network is connected to the RF Base An example of this type of configuration is shown below y ComPort_3_2 B 22 PhoneB ase PhoneRemote CR1OK_2 Hki RFBase_3 RFRemote_3 ee CR23x 44 RFRemote_4 b CR510 m NOTE In Phone to RF systems with a datalogger at the RF base you should set all three levels of datalogger security so the computer has to unlock the datalogger before getting data This will prevent a situation where the computer can be getting data from the wrong datalogger when a connection to a remote station fails 16 2 Phone to MD9 16 2 1 Setup The device map for a phone to MD9 link would look similar to the communications network below 16 3 Section 16 Implementing Advanced Communications Links 16 4 B Pan ComPort_3_3 E me PhoneB ase_2 PhoneRemote_2 H T MDSBase B T MDSRemote wy CR23x To begin add a Serial Port to the device map if one does not exist Add a Phone Modem to the Serial Port To this Phone Modem add a Remote Phone Modem Next add an MD9 base and then a remote MD9 To complete the network add your datalogger to the remote MD9 Review all of the settings for each device and make any changes to customize the settings for your network configuration 16 2 2 Operational Considerations 16 2 2 1 Scheduled Data Collection The int
175. cifying the Start Condition A logical and statement means that all conditions must be true for the statement to be true Up to three conditions can be connected with and statements If too many and statements are used an error message will be displayed when you run Split The logical or statement means that if any of the conditions are true then the statement is true Split allows up to six conditions to be connected with or statements Additionally each or statement can contain up to three and conditions As with the and statements if the maximum number of valid statements is exceeded an error message will be displayed These rules for logical statements also apply to the Stop and Copy Conditions An example of a simple logical and statement follows 2 189 and3 1200 Element two the Julian day must equal 189 and element three the time in hours minutes must equal 1200 If the following and statement was used 2 189 and3 1200 and4 92 and5 67 an error would be returned because the maximum number of allowable and statements has been exceeded A range can be specified for val by putting between the lower and upper limit For example 2 189 and7 200 275 In this example two conditions must be satisfied to start processing data First the day of year must be 189 and second element 7 must be between 200 to 275 degrees inclusive 10 13 Section 10 Sp
176. clicking the Paste button to enter them on the graph starting with the selected cell or by dragging the selected fields to the display cells on the graph An entire table or array can be added by dragging the table onto the cells or by selecting the table and clicking Paste Up to twelve data fields can be graphed simultaneously The Available Fields dialog can be kept in front of other windows by clicking the Stay on Top check box For array based dataloggers that have an associated datalogger program the final storage labels and input locations names are available to select and add to the graph Ifthe datalogger doesn t have an associated file the input locations can still be graphed by clicking the Select Input Locations button at the bottom of the screen The numbers of the input locations to graph can then be entered using dashes to indicate ranges and commas to separate numbers For example 2 4 6 14 17 would add eight input locations to the graph input locations 2 3 4 6 14 15 16 and 17 6 13 Section 6 Connect 6 14 6 5 1 2 Delete Available Fields x I Stay On Top Hour_Minute_RTM Seconds_RTM BattVolt_MIN Battolt_HrMin_MIN IntT empC_MIN IntT empC_Hr_Min_MIN TCTempF_MIN TCTempF_Hr_Min_MIN ports_and_flags InLocs_G1 Select Input Locations Ay Paste L Close Once data fields have been added the Graphical Display will start automatically If there is historical data for the selected
177. computer s clock with an atomic clock or other accurate time keeping device the datalogger s clock may be more accurate than the PC s clock Changing the computer system clock while the display screens are running will terminate the connection for most of the screens This can also affect LoggerNet operations or even crash the program Another point to consider is how the clock checks may affect the time stamp for your data Let s say for instance that you have a data collection schedule of one minute with a clock set if the two clocks deviate more than two minutes Over time the clocks may drift sufficiently that the datalogger s clock is set If the datalogger s clock is 12 02 00 and the LoggerNet computer clock is 12 04 15 the datalogger s clock will be set to 12 04 15 Therefore there will be no data for the time stamps 12 03 and 12 04 Conversely if the datalogger s clock is a few minutes faster than the LoggerNet computer s clock the result would be duplicate time stamps that contained different data 5 19 Section 5 Setup NOTE In table based dataloggers the record number can be used along with the time stamp to assure that records are in order and no data has been missed 5 4 Setting Up Scheduled Data Collection 5 20 5 4 1 Data Collection Scheduling Considerations NOTE 5 4 1 1 Intervals For final storage data to be available for viewing in any of the clients the data has to be collected from the datalo
178. conds to link to the next device This means that a phone to RF network with 2 repeaters could take over 30 seconds to establish the link and start collecting data The amount of time required for collecting the data will vary depending upon the amount of data to be collected and the speed and integrity of the communications link Some time is also required to close down the link before another station can be contacted Make sure the collection schedule allows enough time for each station to be contacted before contacting the first station again 16 1 2 2 Extra Response Time LoggerNet is pre programmed to expect certain response times from devices depending on the type of intermediate devices and the communication rates chosen If the datalogger network communications link is marginal it may take longer to negotiate communication between the devices Extra response time added to one or more of the devices may help to prevent the software from timing out Note that the extra response times added for each device are cumulative for the entire communications link and the total response time includes the default times plus any extra response time that has been added 16 1 2 3 RF Address The hardware settings for the address of the RF base must be 255 for phone to RF operation Additionally ensure that the addresses set for the RF remote hardware match the settings defined in Setup 16 1 2 4 Max Time Online The Max Time Online setting is used t
179. create a new datalogger program choose File New from the Edlog menu and select the datalogger type from the dialog box A template similar to the one shown below appears Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog New File Datalogger Choices xj CR7 CR10 X Cancel CR10T CR10x CR500 CR510 CR23X 21x CR10X TD CR23X TD CR510 TD X coe 2 Help ceeeeee eevee Select the datalogger you are using from the list and click OK A blank program template will come up as shown below for a CR10X es Edlog 32 CR10X NONAME1 csi P x File Edit Search Compile Display Options Window Help x 5 lt CRIGK gt a Table 1 Program 61 6 6666 Execution Interval seconds gt Table 2 Program 62 6 6666 Execution Interval Cseconds gt Table 3 Subroutines End Program The first line of text identifies the type of datalogger program to be written This is followed by a comment line and the Program Table Headers and Execution Interval fields The Program Table Headers and Execution Interval fields are protected text that cannot be deleted or commented out The asterisk is used to identify the beginning of a program table in the datalogger When the cursor is moved to the Execution Interval line the field for the execution interval is highlighted A numeric value must be entered or the instructions in the table will never be executed Instructions inserted under th
180. cted without waiting for holes to be filled Any data in holes will be skipped in the output e Real Time the most recent data is always sent out starting with the last record stored This will not provide a complete data set Holes in the data only apply to table based dataloggers that are using data advise collection This option is supported in version 1 1 of LoggerNet and will be supported in future versions of LoggerNet 2 Only the Collected and Real Time options apply for array based dataloggers Set the output file directory and name in the Export File box The Browse button will bring up a Windows Save As dialog box to select the file name and directory Click OK to begin displaying the data 15 17 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide 15 18 Section 16 Implementing Advanced Communications Links This section describes the configuration and operation of a variety of communications links The communications links included here require special setup or configuration or require special consideration in the implementation to work properly NOTE Refer to Section 5 1 if you need general information on adding devices to the device map 16 1 Phone to RF 16 1 1 Setup Phone to RF is used in situations where the RF network is far away from where the LoggerNet server computer is located and phone access is available to the RF base site Before implementing this type of network consideration needs to be given to the collect
181. ction Typically the system consists of one MD9 base modem that is attached to the user s computer with one or more remote modems at the datalogger field site One remote modem is needed for each datalogger at the field site Measurements Measurements are what the datalogger stores in an Input Location after reading an electronic signal from a sensor and converting the raw signal into meaningful units Modem A device used to transmit and receive digital data over normally analog communications lines usually as an audio signal on telephone circuits A modem attached to a computer performs a digital to analog conversion of data and transmits them to another modem which performs an analog to digital conversion that permits its attached computer to use the data Monitor A computer s CRT or display is referred to as a monitor N Net Description Description of dataloggers and communications devices that form the datalogger network Entered using the Setup screen and used by LoggerNet to communicate with the various dataloggers Node Part of the description of a datalogger network Each node represents a device that the server will dial through or communicate with directly Nodes are organized as a hierarchy with all nodes accessed by the same device parent node entered as child nodes A node can be both a parent and a child node O ObjSrINo This entry in the status table provides the revision number of the datalogger
182. ction log by client applications The message should indicate which client entered the message Indicates an error in the computer system that prevents the server from listening for client connections on a socket The name of a device in the network was changed Appendix D Log Files User Response to Message Frequent occurrences indicate that the radio antenna connectors and RF link be reviewed A change in table definitions indicates that the datalogger program may have changed This will suspend data collection and warnings will be shown in the Status Monitor Data Collection can only be restored by updating table definitions Before updating table definitions make sure the needed data in the data cache has been saved to a file if desired See section 7 4 3 This is a rare error and results in a problem with the computer operating system If rebooting the computer does not clear the error contact an application engineer Appendix D Log Files Code Message Text Message Parameters Message Meaning User Response to Message Logger locked This message indicates the start of a transaction such as terminal emulation that will tie up the other operations CR7X or 21X out Collect area Collect area name A data cache collect initialized area has been created Logger The transaction unlocked blocking datalogger access has completed 82 Collect area A data cache collect removed area has been
183. ction schedule is active Primary Retry A data collection failure has led to the primary retry collection schedule Secondary Retry The number of primary retries set in the Setup Screen have run out and the secondary retry schedule is now active Schedule Off Scheduled data collection is not enabled for this device Communications Disabled Communications for this device or one of the devices in the communication link from the computer has been disabled Invalid Table Definitions A change in the table definitions for this device has been detected This has caused scheduled collection to be suspended until LoggerNet has updated table definitions to match the datalogger Network Paused Scheduled data collection has been suspended for the whole network Communication Enabled Comm Enabled Indicates whether or not communication is enabled for the device Communication is set up and enabled in the Setup Screen Communication Status Comm Status The current communication state of the device Normal Marginal Critical or Unknown This value matches the state of the indicator next to the device name Marginal is indicated when warning messages for the device are logged in communications Critical is indicated when communication failures are logged in communications Final Storage Area 1 2 Collected FS1 Collected FS2Collected Array based dataloggers only This value will show the number of d
184. culating the length In CR5000 CR9000 dataloggers event tables are assumed to have one record stored per execution interval Since the datalogger tries to make the tables fill up at the same time if you let the datalogger automatically allocate table sizes these event driven tables may take up most of the memory leaving very little for the other longer interval automatically allocated data tables Within a data table data is organized in records and fields Each row in a table represents a record and each column represents a field To understand the concept of records it may be helpful to consider an example Example A CRI10X TD is to be used to monitor three thermocouples Each hour a temperature for each of the three thermocouples is to be stored The table has five fields DATE_TIME RECORD TEMP1 TEMP2 TEMP3 The program is written so that each hour an Instruction 84 Table Data generates a new record in the data table This hourly table would then be organized as follows DATE_TIME RECORD TEMPI TEMP2 TEMP3 2002 01 27 10 00 00 14 23 5 24 6 28 2 2002 01 27 11 00 00 15 24 2 22 4 23 4 Only the hourly data triggered by the Instruction 84 above would be written to this table If other table data instructions existed the output for these tables would be written to their own tables Data tables can also be event driven rather than interval driven That is a new record is stored when a specified event occurs rather than ba
185. d specify the additional time that the LoggerNet server should delay before terminating the communications link if there is no response from the phone modem Additional time may be needed in instances where the communications link is noisy or network traffic is heavy NOTE LoggerNet waits a certain amount of time for a response from each device in a communications path The extra response times defined for the communications link are cumulative Therefore the amount of time spent waiting for a device to respond is the sum of all Extra Response Times defined plus the default response time for each device in the link Add the minimum time necessary since very long response times can delay other scheduled events while waiting for a device that is not responding 5 2 11 PhoneRemote The Hardware tab of the remote phone modem is used to set up the dialing string for the remote device attached to it The hardware tab has the following controls Communications Enabled Before communication can take place all devices in the chain must have the Communications Enabled box checked When this box is selected communication to the remote phone modem is enabled Phone Number Delay Field This field is used to enter the telephone numbers or dialing strings for the remote modem To add a number to the list simply click the lt add phone number gt field and type in the number Spaces dashes and parentheses are usually ignored by the modem To remove or
186. d click OK This will delete all the data stored in the datalogger for the selected tables and will also reset LoggerNet s data cache collect areas The Reset Tables function will delete the data stored in the datalogger and the data cache App C for the selected tables Make sure you don t need the stored data or the data has been saved to a file 6 7 Section 6 Connect 6 2 4 Ports and Flags The Ports and Flags window shows the current state of the ports and flags for the datalogger If the flag is enabled or the port is high the button next to the name appears green if the flag or port is low the button appears black Ports and Flags ol x Ports Flags 1 Port 1 1 Flag 1 Port 2 2 Flag 2 3 Port 3 3 Flag 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port Port 8 Flag 4 Flag 5 Flag 6 Flag 7 Flag 8 ian loo IN Im nm a Help Click the button next to the flag or port to turn it on or off Remember that ports can only be set if they are configured as outputs in the datalogger program You can customize the names by clicking the name and typing the desired text 6 2 5 View Status Table Table Dataloggers Only To view the status table for a table based datalogger select View Status Table from the menu on the Connect screen A window similar to the one below will be displayed Click Select Fields to choose the status information you are interested in seeing Once the fields are selected L
187. d collect the data Consideration should also be given to other operations such as clock sets program downloads or manual data requests to the datalogger These require significantly more time and can affect RF network responsiveness Any network setup using a phone to RF should be reviewed for collection scheduling issues due to the combinations of time delays associated with RF data collection 5 4 2 Setting Up Scheduled Data Collection The data to be collected and the output file locations and format are specified on the datalogger s Data File or Final Storage tab Section 5 2 5 3 or 5 2 5 4 The Schedule tab refer to Section 5 2 5 2 is used to define the interval on which the LoggerNet server will check the datalogger for new data If new data 5 21 Section 5 Setup 5 22 NOTE exists it will be stored in the data files and the LoggerNet internal storage which is accessible to the Numeric Display and Graph To set up a data collection schedule for a datalogger first ensure that your device map has been configured with all of the devices listed as they actually exist Next determine which tables or final storage areas should be collected from the datalogger each time a data collection attempt is made If no tables are selected on the Data Files tab or the Final Storage Area is not enabled for collection no data will be collected from the datalogger You should check the directory path and the data file options to make su
188. d command Invalid low level signature Provider opened Device dialed Provider closed Unable to Locate Serial synch byte Message Meaning The low level serial BMP 1 communication framing packet was sent and the response received from the device CR10X TD table based type devices The listed command was sent to an array based datalogger A BMP packet was received from the device CR10X TD type devices only A BMP3 packet was exchanged CR5000 CR9000 dataloggers only The computer tried to terminate the connection but the datalogger did not acknowledge the shutdown The packet received from the device got corrupted and the packet signature doesn t match the packet contents The serial communications port has been initialized The communications link has been initialized to transfer data packets The serial communications port has been closed The low level communications synchronization byte was not received after the computer sent out a serial packet Appendix D Log Files User Response to Message For a list of the commands and their meanings see the datalogger operator s manual This is an indication that there is a communications problem between the computer and the datalogger Check the cables and connectors and make sure the datalogger has power Check to find out where in the communications link noise or signal corruption is causing the data to be disrupted This in
189. d of the radio In general the radios in a network should be the same type 3 Check that the radio is set for the right frequency With a programmable radio verify that the correct frequency and other settings are set properly If the radio is crystal based there should be a label showing the frequency If not you will have to test the radio with a programmable scanner or frequency analyzer 4 Check the cable connecting the radio to the RF modem Different combinations of radios and RF modems require specific cables to make the right connections For questions in this area contact the network installer or Campbell Scientific 5 Check that the antenna is the right type directional or omnidirectional and is designed for the frequency being used Most antennas will have labels identifying the frequency range Make sure the antenna is mounted for a clear line of sight and that directional antennas are properly oriented 6 Make sure the antenna is the right impedance to match the system This is almost always 50 Q This should match the cable connecting the antenna to the radio and the radio connection 7 Check that the cable connecting the radio to the antenna matches the impedance of the antenna and the radio This is almost always 50 Q One simple but very effective technique is to swap out components Use components from a part of the network that you know is working and swap them out one at a time to isolate a faulty hardware co
190. d routing information Parameter Numbers or codes which are entered to specify exactly what a given datalogger instruction is to do Path The modems or other devices that make up a link to communicate with a remote site datalogger Polling Process where a datalogger or other communications device is periodically checked for any packets it needs to send The server polls dataloggers for most communications links With Radio RF the RF232T base or repeaters can poll datalogger sites Polling Interval The user specified interval that determines when to poll a given device PrgmFree An entry in the status table that shows the amount of remaining program memory in bytes PrgmSig An entry in the status table that shows the signature of the datalogger program The signature is a unique number derived from the size and format of the datalogger program PromID An entry in the status table that shows the version number of the datalogger PROM or OS PromSig An entry in the status table that shows the signature of the datalogger PROM or OS As with the PrgmSig if this signature changes the datalogger instruction set has somehow been changed Processing Instructions Datalogger instructions that further process input location data values and return the result to Input Storage where it can be accessed for output processing Arithmetic and transcendental functions are included in these instructions Program Control Inst
191. datalogger network communications link The Communication Test is used to check the communications path to one or more dataloggers Communication is verified by attempting to check the datalogger clock Selecting Test Communication Test from the main menu will bring up a screen similar to following dialog box a Communication Test oj x Seriall Logger Oxtd Serial2 E OKLogger ComPort_3 RFBasel RFRemote 4 cA510 ComPort_4 PHModerm RemoteModem cRiox i Test Clear Help All devices in the network are displayed in the window Each datalogger has a gray circle beside it Once the communications test is run the color of the circle will reflect the state of the communications link to the datalogger Select a datalogger to be tested by clicking the circle next to the datalogger When a datalogger is selected the circle beside it will turn black Continue clicking the dataloggers you want to test Clicking a second time on a datalogger will deselect it To deselect all the dataloggers click the Clear button Section 4 The LoggerNet Toolbar To begin testing click the Test button As a device is tested the status icon to its left will change colors Green signifies a good communications link and red is critical When a device is being tested the icon will be yellow If the status is unknown the datalogger icon will remain gray 4 1 1 2 Terminal Emulation Terminal Emulation is a way to test communicat
192. dicates that the device is either not responding or responding with an invalid communications protocol This message would appear if trying to talk to an array based datalogger that is set up as a table based datalogger in the network map Appendix D Log Files D 20 D 1 3 4 Object State Log Format The object state log includes two fields in addition to the timestamp and device name Object Name The name of the object from which the message is being generated Typically this will be the name of an object method Description Any extra information associated with the event Object State Log Example 2002 02 07 12 04 29 003 CR10T Logger on_selective_manual_poll_cmd 66 9557 2002 02 07 12 04 29 003 CRIOT Dev cmdAdd BMP1 Low Level Serial 3 2002 02 07 12 04 29 003 CR10T Dev onNextCommand Executing command BMP1 Low Level Serial 3 2002 02 07 12 04 29 003 CR10T Bmp1 Bmp1Tran get_next_out_message hole collection 2002 02 07 12 04 29 233 CR10T Dev cmdFinished BMP1 Low Level Serial 2002 02 07 12 04 30 004 CR10T Logger on_selective_manual_poll_cmd 66 9558 2002 02 07 12 04 30 004 CRIOT Dev cmdAdd BMP1 Low Level Serial 3 2002 02 07 12 04 30 004 CR10T Dev onNextCommand Executing command BMP1 Low Level Serial 3 2002 02 07 12 04 30 004 CR10T Bmp1 Bmp1Tran get_next_out_message hole collection 2002 02 07 12 04 30 234 CRIOT Bmp1 Bmp1Tran get_ne
193. e The Mt Logan data set is used for the Special Function examples These functions are helpful in converting time fields to formatted timestamps and formatting the output Since one of the main differences between array based data files and table based data files is the time format these functions can be used to convert between file types Section 10 Split NOTE If you are processing the data file in multiple passes including formatting of the date and time fields you should put the date processing in the final pass Split cannot read all of the timestamp formats that it can produce For example the quoted timestamp in table based data files has a specific structure Any changes to the structure will make the timestamp unreadable for Split Crif returns a carriage return and line feed where the Crlf is placed in the parameter file Examples Smpl Max Temp 24 Max 3 24 Smpl Crlf 24 Smpl Max RH 24 Max 4 24 Max Temp 67 33 Max RH 38 8 The Crlf is placed after the maximum temperature 67 33 so that the maximum RH is on the next line NOTE A carriage return line feed is recognized by Split as an element and may throw the column headers off in the output file Label returns a comment in the output file This is a useful formatting function when labels are desired on the same line as the data The label includes anything within the quote marks the quote marks are not output but must be in the parameter file T
194. e ASCII table no header The data is output with timestamp and data values separated by commas with no header ASCH TOACII The data is output in Table Oriented ASCII format type 1 which has a two line header and data formatted the same as the ASCII table format ASCII TOAS The data is output in Table Oriented ASCII format type 5 which has a multi line header and data values separated by commas 5 13 Section 5 Setup Binary TOB1 The data is stored in Table Oriented Binary format type 1 Get Table Definitions When this button is pressed LoggerNet will query the datalogger for its table definitions This should only be needed the first time connecting to a station or when the datalogger program has changed New table definitions will cause the previous output data file to be saved with a different name and a new data file will be created to save the data For a description of data tables see Appendix B 3 5 2 5 5 Clock Check Set Tab 5 14 Enabled Select this box to compare the datalogger s clock to the LoggerNet server PC s clock based on the schedule defined by the other parameters on this tab If the datalogger s time differs from the server s time by more than a specified amount the datalogger s clock will be set to the server s time A separate call to the datalogger will not be made exclusively to process a clock check A clock check will be made when the server contacts the datalogger for some
195. e OK appear on the screen If you see ERROR then the modem doesn t recognize one or both of the amp C1 or amp D2 commands 15 7 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide 15 8 Type AT J1 lt Enter gt To force the modem to follow the serial port rate rather than try to connect at the fastest rate the remote modem will support You should see OK appear on the screen If you see ERROR then the modem doesn t recognize this command Type ATDT752777 9 lt Enter gt To dial using tone dialing a datalogger at 7527779 You should hear a dial tone followed by a series of beeps and tones followed by what sounds like white noise or scratching sounds and screeches When the modems connect you should see the word CONNEC T appear on the screen perhaps followed by information about the speed and type of connection If you don t hear a dial tone perhaps you haven t plugged in the telephone line or the line is not operational If you hear the dial tone and the beeps of the phone number being dialed but there s no ring on the other end perhaps the number isn t valid or you didn t get an outside line If a person answers perhaps you have the wrong phone number If it rings and answers with tones and screeches but you don t get a CONNECT message perhaps you have dialed a fax number or other data modem but not one with a datalogger attached or the d
196. e n in the Time Series functions to produce monthly output see Table 10 3 8 Special Functions this Section Time Series functions are used to perform vertical processing on selected elements such as calculating the average of an element over a specified range of data Time Series results are output in three instances 1 when a Trigger on Stop Condition F option is met 2 at the end of a data file or within a range specified by Start and Stop Conditions 3 when an interval count is met When the Trigger on Stop Condition or F option is used any time series data defined in the Select line is output each time the Stop Condition is met Refer to Section 10 3 3 2 for more information on the Trigger on Stop Condition Results which are output at the end of a file or a range of data are referred to as Final Summaries A typical select line that would produce a Final Summary is 1 2 3 4 Avg 4 This line would output values for elements through 4 each time an array was output Additionally an average value for element 4 would be calculated for the entire file and output as the last line of data in the output file 1 2 3 4 Avg 4 24 This line would output values for elements through 4 each time an array was output and an average value for element 4 would be calculated every 24 array and output as an additional column in the file An additional summary would occur for an Interval Count if the count was not evenly divis
197. e number is positive Split will start reading from the beginning of a file if the number is negative Split will start reading from the end of a file All characters including spaces carriage returns and line feeds are counted A stop offset can also be specified Example 2 Example 3 In Example 2 Split will skip the first 256 characters before it begins processing the data in Input File In Example 3 Split will skip the first 256 characters before beginning and stop execution on character 1024 10 11 Section 10 Split 10 12 10 3 1 2 Input File Exceptions In most instances Split automatically recognizes the type of data file it is reading by using Auto Select in the File Info field However there are two exceptions e Reading Raw A D Data from Burst Measurements To read this type of data and convert it to ASCII select Burst in the File Info box Once Burst is selected the Number of Values in Each Burst window in the Offset Menu will become accessible Enter the number of elements in each Burst This number does not include the array ID number or calibration data e Reading Data in Final Storage Binary Format If the data is in binary format and Start and Stop Offsets are used Final Storage Binary Format must be selected in the File Info field This tells Split that the file must be decoded as Final Storage before counting the bytes If Offsets are not used Auto Detect may be chosen and the fi
198. e LoggerNet logs If Save to Disk is enabled for the Low Level I O logs one set of logs will be created for each of the root level devices in the network Once the maximum number of logs have been created the next log file created will overwrite the oldest file Selecting Edit Log Settings brings up the following dialog box 7 7 Section 7 Status Monitor Log Settings xj M Log Settings M Transaction Log Settings Communication Log Settings _ V ToDisk IV ToDisk File Size bytes 1200000 File Size bytes 1200000 State Log Settings Low Level 1 0 Log Settings _ V ToDisk To Diski File Size bytes 1200000 File Size bytes 1200000 Ok Cancel Help The following settings are used to save the logs to disk as well as to control the number and size of the log files To Disk Selecting this check box enables saving the associated logs to files on the server computer hard disk File Count This setting determines the number of log files to be saved to disk for this type of log The server will store up to the number specified before overwriting the oldest log File Size This setting determines how big the log file is allowed to grow before being saved to an archived file The sign identifies the active file Once a file reaches the specified File Size it is saved to disk with a sequential number beginning with 0 e g tran0 log tran log tran2 log
199. e Program Table 1 header will be run based on the execution interval for that table Likewise instructions inserted under the Program Table 2 header will be run based on the execution interval for Program 8 3 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog NOTE Table 2 Program Table 3 is reserved for subroutines that are called by either of the other tables Most users find they can write the entire program in Program Table 1 avoiding complications associated with synchronizing two tables Program Table 2 is normally used only when portions of the program require a different execution interval placed in Program Table 2 Program tables in this section refer strictly to sections of the datalogger program Do not confuse these program sections with the data tables created in table based dataloggers using P84 to store output data When the program is complete select File Save from the Edlog menu A standard file dialog box will appear in which to type a file name Edlog supports long file names for the datalogger programs Use descriptive names to help document the program s function After saving the file you will be prompted to compile the program When a program is compiled the code will be checked for errors After compiling the datalogger program can be sent to the datalogger using the Connect screen Section 6 4 8 1 1 1 Program Structure While Edlog is not a structured programming language there are some standard pro
200. e and use automatic file incrementing This means that the file name will initially be DATAO000 DAT Unless you change the default further files will be saved in the sequence DATA001 DAT DATA999 DAT This means that whenever you store new data files to disk the name will automatically increment by adding one to the number at the end of the name If you are collecting multiple files as in the Get All command the file name will be incremented automatically as each file is collected The program will scan the computer for files with the same base file name Ifa file is found with a higher numeric suffix than the one you enter the program will ask for confirmation to avoid the possibility of existing files being overwritten You may change the base file name by clicking the button showing the file name The three digit counter will be automatically added to the file name For example if you chose a file name of ANDREW DAT the program would convert it to ANDREW000 DAT so that auto incrementing could take place If you want completely unique names for each file choose the New name for each file option Append to Current File In this option files to be collected are added to the end of the current file as indicated by the name on the File Name button The new file will retain the current file name New Name for Each File By selecting this option you have the flexibility to choose a completely different name for each col
201. e areas By default all memory is allocated to final storage area 1 However the datalogger s memory can be partitioned into two Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog final storage areas using this option To allocate memory to Final Storage Area 2 enter the number of locations into the Final Storage Area 2 Locations field Final storage area 1 is reduced by the amount of memory allocated to final storage area 2 Data stored in final storage area 2 is protected when Input and or Intermediate Storage is reallocated Data stored in final storage area 1 is erased when any of the memory areas are reallocated 8 4 3 DLD File Labels This option allows you to determine the labels that are saved in the DLD file for the datalogger While labels are useful they can increase the size of the datalogger program considerably If program size is a concern you can limit or completely eliminate the labels that are saved in the DLD file 8 4 3 1 Array Based Dataloggers Array based dataloggers can store the labels for input locations and final storage output in the DLD file LoggerNet uses this information on graphs the numeric displays and the LoggerNetData applications If you do not include these labels in the DLD file you will see generic names for input locations and will not be able to display final storage locations at all Options for array based dataloggers are Minimize DLD Size No input location labels or final storage lab
202. e computer and the dataloggers choose what data should be collected and set up an automatic collection schedule Data collection and schedule information are set up separately for each datalogger The collected data is stored on the computer s hard drive in data files Setup can also create and configure tasks that can be triggered by data collection or on a schedule LoggerNet can also automatically check the datalogger s clock comparing it with the computer s clock and set it if it exceeds a specified variation The Task Master included in the Setup Screen allows you to trigger data collection as well as execute batch file scripts and programs based on a variety of data collection events Tasks may also be scheduled based on time intervals or the completion of another task 1 2 2 Connect Screen Section 6 a2 The Connect Screen is used primarily for initializing or checking operation of a datalogger and manually collecting data This screen provides near real time communication with a datalogger Utilities are available for sending programs to or retrieving programs from a datalogger checking or setting a datalogger clock and getting status information from the datalogger There are windows for displaying data either graphically or in numeric format as well as setting input locations ports and flags You can also manually retrieve data in various formats and communicate with a datalogger in terminal emulation mode 1 2 3 Status Monitor
203. e datalogger expects to receive communication from the neighbors If communication is not received from a neighbor within 2 25 times this interval then the datalogger will attempt to issue another hello command to that datalogger only thus creating less network traffic than the Beacon Interval 8 25 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog 8 26 The expected interval is entered into the Communication Interval field in seconds The neighbors are defined by entering their addresses into the table A range of addresses can be entered by using the Swath field For example entering for the address and 5 for the swath will set up dataloggers with PakBus addresses 1 2 3 4 and 5 as neighbors to the current datalogger This option is the same as the datalogger s D19 mode 8 4 6 4 Allocate General Purpose File Memory PakBus dataloggers have the ability to store files transmitted from an NL100 in a general purpose memory area This memory area is configured as ring memory A value can be entered to specify the number of 64K blocks of memory that should be used for this purpose Final storage memory will be reduced by the amount of memory specified in this option This option is the same as the datalogger s D16 mode Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor This section provides information on the CRBasic Editor used to program the Campbell Scientific CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 Series dataloggers CRBasic is
204. e definitions at the beginning followed by the subroutines and then the program Below is the typical layout of a program Note that the online help has example code for each instruction to demonstrate the use of the instruction in a program Declarations Declare constants Declare Public variables Dimension variables Define Aliases Define data tables Process store trigger Table size Other on line storage devices Processing of Data Define Subroutines Program Set scan interval Measurements Processing Call Data Table s Initiate controls NextScan End Program Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor Make a list of what to measure and calculate Within this list include the fixed constants used Indicate the values that the user is able to view while the program is running the number of each measurement that will be made and specific names for any of the measurements Describe in detail tables of data that will be saved from the experiment Set when the data should be stored Are they stored when some condition is met Are data stored on a fixed interval Are they stored on a fixed interval only while some condition is met Set the size of the table in RAM Should the data also be sent to the external storage What data are to be output current value average maximum minimum etc If there is a process or series of calculations that needs to be repe
205. e is a possibility that files can be corrupted This is much less likely than problems due to power loss since the computer operating system remains in control and can close the files left open by the failed program Again this is handled better with Windows NT 2000 and XP than on Windows 95 and 98 If after a program crash the server does not run properly you may need to restore the data from backup If you have problems restarting the LoggerNet server after a program crash or it crashes as soon as it starts on Windows NT 2000 and XP systems make sure that the LoggerNet server has not left a process running You can check this by going to the Windows Task Manager and selecting the Process tab In the list of processes look for the Toolbar or one of the client applications If one of these processes exists but the Toolbar is not running select this process and click End Process you will be asked to confirm the end process 3 4 4 Restoring from Backup To restore server operation from a backup copy of the data and configuration files you must close any client applications and the communication server You can then copy and replace the files in the server working directory with the files from the backup Any data collected or changes made to the network since the last backup will be lost Once all the files have been copied you can restart the LoggerNet server and let the server start data collection for all of the stations If all
206. e is any four digit non zero number The security code is set by the datalogger program through a keyboard display or the remote keyboard utility If a datalogger program that sets or changes security is loaded into the datalogger the Security Code in LoggerNet must be changed to match so that the server can access the datalogger Security is not available in the CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 Series dataloggers Refer to your datalogger operator s manual for complete information on its security functions Call back ID Call back is a mode supported by some dataloggers where an instruction in the datalogger program can initiate a call to the computer The call back ID is sent by the datalogger to identify itself when contacting the host computer LoggerNet uses this value to know which datalogger initiated the call back PakBus Address Each device in a PakBus network has a unique address Valid addresses are 1 through 4094 4094 is a broadcast address and is therefore reserved for the LoggerNet PC 5 9 Section 5 Setup 5 10 5 2 5 2 Schedule Tab CAUTION The Schedule tab defines when LoggerNet will automatically check the datalogger for new data Scheduled Collection Enabled This check box activates the data collection schedule defined on this tab No data will be automatically collected if the schedule is disabled Apply to Other Stations This button allows the schedule setup for this datalogger to be copied to
207. ea 1 fe campbellsci loggermet 2 1 a Data CR50 el I Final Storage Area 2 fe campbellsci loggernet 2 1 a Data CR50 Start Collection a Close Help While retrieving data from the datalogger using Custom Collection scheduled data collection will be suspended The directory where the files are stored for custom collection is separate from the files for scheduled collection data and by default is a Data directory under the LoggerNet directory e g C CampbellSci LoggerNet Data File Format File Formats are described in Section 5 2 5 3 Collect Collect All will get all of the data available in the selected final storage areas For a datalogger that has a lot of data stored this could result in a large file and take a long time Collect All Since Last Collection When this option is selected LoggerNet will attempt to collect all the data since the last Custom Collection from the datalogger Note that separate data collection pointers are kept for the Custom Collection option therefore collecting from this window will not affect scheduled data collection or a manually initiated collection from the main Connect window Last Number of Arrays specifies how many of the last stored records will be retrieved from the datalogger Advanced allows the user to specify the memory pointer address for each of the final storage areas Data collection will begin at the specified memory point
208. ecord in one packet Because of packet size if more than 500 input locations are used the record cannot be collected 6 21 Section 6 Connect Cell Options Display Number of Decimal Places to Display 2 j Set Data Justification Right Justification Update Interval 05s000ms Sy T Enable Alarms High Alarm Low Alarm Alarm Value fica Alarm Value fo Coo MN coo X Cancel Help Alarms Alarms can be set to turn the display field a different color depending on the value of a data point Select the Enable Alarms check box to turn on the alarm feature The alarm levels can be set for a cell by entering a value in the High Alarm Value field and the Low Alarm Value field When the data value displayed in the cell exceeds the limits set the cell color will change based on the colors selected for each of the alarm values 6 6 File Control for CR5000 and CR9000 To access File Control for the CR5000 and CR9000 dataloggers select Tools File Control from the Connect window s menu This will bring up the File Control window as shown below The File Control window displays a list of files stored on a CR5000 or a CR9000 s CPU or PC card The window on the left lists all of the data storage devices available for the selected datalogger Selecting a device shows a list of the files stored there The run attributes for a file indicate whether it is set to Run Always Run Now or Run On
209. ed datalogger program files contain the final storage labels There are a couple of other files that are used in Edlog but are generated by other means than compiling the file LBR Library files LBR are parts of a program that can be retrieved and used in other Edlog programs If a programmer often uses an instruction set in his her datalogger programs this partial file can be saved to disk and inserted into a new program For information about creating a library file see the help on Creating a Library File Library files that are created for one type of datalogger should not be used in a different type of datalogger e g do not use an LBR file created for a CR10X TD in a CR10X or CR510 TD program Instructions differ among dataloggers and bringing in an invalid instruction to a datalogger will result in errors TXT Printer output files created by Edlog are saved with a TXT extension These files can be sent to a printer or viewed with a text editor A TXT file is created by selecting File Print to File 8 5 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog 8 1 1 3 Inserting Instructions into the Program Instructions are entered into the program table in the order that they should be executed in the program There are four ways to insert an instruction e Select File Insert Instruction from the Edlog menu e Press Shift Insert on the keyboard e Right click a blank line and select Insert Instruction from
210. ed in a central area for administration while providing communications to remote RF networks The device map set up in the Setup screen for a TCP IP to RF link would look similar to the communications network below IPPort_4 H k RFBase_2 AFRemote_2 a CASIOTD_2 To begin add an IPPort to the device map if one does not exist Add an RF base modem to the IPPort and to this add the remote RF modem To complete the network add your datalogger to the remote RF modem Review all of the settings for each device and make any changes to customize the settings for your network configuration 16 3 2 Operational Considerations There are several settings that should be configured to optimize the TCP IP to RF network The Low Level Packet Delay is configured using CoraScript see Appendix F This is setting number 53 for the RF Base This governs how rapidly handshaking packets are exchanged by the server and the RF base while a datalogger transaction is pending By default there is no delay so these packets pass back and forth about 5 or 6 times a second For TCP IP communications 16 5 Section 16 Implementing Advanced Communications Links 16 6 this should be slowed down by setting the number of milliseconds to wait to at least 1000 1 second delay Max Time online This should be set to zero disabled for all of the stations in the RF network Otherwise when the communications link is dropped because this v
211. eeeeceeeeetecesecesecneeeeeeseeees 6 1 0 2 Data Collect Ont vey cing seca hanee hoes aoe ch sanagcondos a a na a a a 6 2 6 2 1 Collect Now Stop Collection ccceeccescesceseceteesteceeeseeeneeenes 6 2 6 2 2 Custom Collection for Array Based Dataloggers ceee 6 2 6 2 3 Custom Collection for Table Based Dataloggers ceee 6 4 6 2 4 Ports and Flags EEA PAE A E E taceseeescs 6 8 6 2 5 View Status Table Table Dataloggers Only ssseseeseeesseeeese 6 8 6 3 Datalogger Clock ic E E E E eee 6 9 6 4 Program Management siecccssecerssieicecsts ceustseacccensatence de ecsarga tecdeetonences 6 10 6 4 1 Sending a Datalogger Program ecccesesseeseesseenseeseeeeeeeeeees 6 10 6 4 2 CR200 Series Programs cccccesseesceescessceeseesecesecssecseeeeeeeseeees 6 10 6 4 3 Retrieving Datalogger Programs ccccesceeseeeseeseeeseeseeeeeeees 6 11 6 5 Data Displays 2 sccicccicctecsesseeetesvecktvessoedeviseesecedl ERER A 6 11 6 5 1 Graphical Display Screems ccceccceseesecetecseecseeeeeseeeeseeeeees 6 12 6 5 2 Numeric Display Screen cecceeceecceseeesecesecseecseeeeeseeeseeeeeeees 6 19 6 6 File Control for CR5000 and CR9000 0 ce cececeseeeseeeseeeeeeteeeteeeseenees 6 22 6 7 Remote Keyboard inrsin nnen e a R i 6 24 6 8 Program Association sss sesssesesseeseesessteeessesrrsresstsresreserstsseesesseeresse 6 24 7 Status MOMitor cccccecec cece eeee cece eres
212. eeeeees 8 13 8 1 3 Library FES ree T erae na E ra a e raea RE E raas 8 14 8 1 4 Documenting a DLD File cece eeeeeseeeteeseeeeceseeneeeeeeneeees 8 14 8 1 5 Display Options niorir eninin i ii 8 15 8 2 Input Locations sni E E R ER 8 16 8 2 1 Entering Input Locations s essssesssesseseeserersseeeessesersresersesseene 8 17 8 2 2 REpetitlons sci eee cial Aa a E E e an 8 17 8 2 3 Input Location Editor cccceecceseeeseeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesrensrens 8 18 8 2 4 Input Location Anomalies cccecceeseeecceseceeeceeesseeneeeneeeneeees 8 19 8 3 Final Storage Labels cccecccceesecsseesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseenseeneeneenseenaes 8 20 8 4 Datalogger Settings Stored in the DLD File 0 eee eeeeeereeeeees 8 22 8 4 1 Program Security snoei e e i i EES 8 22 8 4 2 Final Storage Area 2 sseesssesssseesssesersessersssreressesersreseesesseene 8 22 43 DED File Labe Brae naeem N nas 8 23 8 4 4 Power Up Settings Compile Settings sss sssseessreesseesesseeesssee 8 24 8 4 5 Datalogger Serial Port Settings s sessssesssresessesersrssreressreersses 8 24 8 4 6 PakBus Settings seseseseesesseeeesseseeesessteressrsresresresessreresseseessese 8 24 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic EGItOl i 206 csas5 uses 3 tusate uudeandoenecrarn avatar 9 1 9T OVEIVIEW niise ee i ONE een eee Nee eee ee 9 1 9 1 1 Inserting Instructions ssnin E a 9 2 9 1 2 Parameter Dialog BOX ssssesssssssessersessesesssesersresee
213. eeeeesseeseeeneeees 5 4 5 23 Serial Ports 202 secon veins ARE AA AAE NE 5 4 5 2 2 IPPort Internet Protocol Serial Port ccc ceeeeeeceeeeceteeeeeeeees 5 5 5 2 3 TAPIPort Telephony API ccceccceseceseeesceeseeeseeseceeeeeenseentes 5 6 52 4 PakBusPort sistais ea heal teeta eek San tokio 5 7 512 5 Datalog ger ince eastern cere hee ae Ra ena eco 5 8 5 2 6 RE Bases cise ceseseecsesccseucen EAE AAEREN AEREE AENEA 5 15 5 237 RERemote ae AE o E E E ee eens 5 15 5 2 8 MDI Banaat E E 5 16 5 2 9 MD9 Remote scossi concemed iri n E EE 5 16 5 210 Phone Basen nnr nie ae ie dein E NEE 5 16 STA A R Toal Aena 0 EE A E E 5 17 522 AD REAOO a a ARR 5 18 5 3 Setting the Clock enei e E eee E O E A 5 19 5 4 Setting Up Scheduled Data Collection s sssssssessesseeeesseeressrsresseserses 5 20 5 4 1 Data Collection Scheduling Considerations cesceeee 5 20 5 4 2 Setting Up Scheduled Data Collection ss sssssssseesseseseesesseeee 5 21 5 5 Task Master iinne nn n e i anna a eaea 5 23 5 5 1 Adding TasKSsccrneiriareir inanir r a RE 5 24 5 5 2 Logger Event Tasks A 5 24 5 5 3 Scheduled Event Tasks cccccccsseesceesceesceeeeeseceseceseeneeeneeeseeees 5 25 5 5 4 Define What the Task Does ccccessesseeseceseceteeeseeseeeeeeseenes 5 25 5 6 Convert from PC208W Network ccccceccsseesseesceeseeeseeeeceteeseenseenaes 5 26 6 GORMECCT case th ade ete les 6 1 6 1 Connecting to the Datalogger ce eceececseescees
214. efs indicates that LoggerNet does not have a current copy of the datalogger table definitions so you have to Get Table Defs from the Setup screen Network Paused indicates that data collection for the entire network has been suspended So look on the Status Monitor for the Pause Schedule check box 15 2 Application Screen Problems 15 4 Problem Cannot set the clock from the Connect screen Other communications with the datalogger succeed Remedy Check the Allowed Clock Deviation on the Clock tab for the datalogger in the Setup screen If the difference in the datalogger and system clock is less than the deviation specified the clock will not be set Problem Table based datalogger program won t compile and returns an E43 error Remedy There is an interval mismatch between the P84 instructions and the program scan rate If the P84 intervals are not multiples of the scan rate the program won t compile and will return this error Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide 15 3 General Communication Link Problems Problem Communications are not solid and difficulty is experienced sending programs to the datalogger Remedy 1 If there are slow serial devices in the communication path such as older modems the server might be overrunning the buffers Set the maximum packet size in the Setup Screen for the datalogger to a smaller number Remedy 2 On noisy phone links try lowering the max baud rate for the datalogger on the Setup sc
215. elect RUN GO The hourly data will be split out and stored in hourly prn The results are displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 10 2 8 Close the Run window If you wish to save this parameter file for future reports choose FILE SAVE The file will be saved with a PAR extension 10 7 Section 10 Split Split Run 2 0beta 32bit 60 Year RTM Day RTM Hour_Minute Battery BattVolt AirTemp AirTemp Min Average FIGURE 10 2 8 Split Run Showing Hourly Data 10 3 Split Parameter File Entries 10 3 1 Input Files 10 8 The name of the Input File is entered in the space to the right of the Browse button The default directory is defined by the working directory for LoggerNet If the input file is not in the default directory use the Browse button to find the input file Input Files must be formatted in Comma Separated ASCH Final Storage Binary Format Field Formatted ASCII Split default output format Printable ASCII Table Oriented ASCH TOA or Raw A D data refer to special Burst Mode instruction in your Campbell Scientific datalogger manual Files stored in Table Oriented Binary TOB format are converted to Table Oriented ASCII files when Split uses them The converter comes up automatically when you run Split to create the output file You cannot use the Data Label browser to select the columns of data from a binary file If you want use the Data Label browser you can convert the binary file using the TOB
216. els are saved in the DLD file Default Up to 255 input location labels and all final storage labels are saved in the DLD file All All input location labels and all final storage labels are saved in the DLD file 8 4 3 2 Table Based Dataloggers Table based dataloggers store only input location labels to the DLD file If you do not include these labels in the DLD file you will not be able to display input locations on the displays in LoggerNet or the LoggerNetData applications The label options for table based dataloggers are Include All Input Location Labels All input location labels are saved in the DLD file Include First X Input Location Labels Allows you to specify a certain number of input location labels to be saved in the DLD file If you are trying to minimize the size of your DLD file but still want to be able to monitor input locations on LoggerNet s displays you can put all of the labels that you want to view at the beginning of your list of input locations and put the labels for scratch and less important values at the end Then use the second option above to display only those values of interest 8 23 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog 8 4 4 Power Up Settings Compile Settings These two options allow you to clear or retain settings for ports flags storage locations and timers when the datalogger is powered up or when a program is compiled Whether it is advantageous to clear or retain th
217. empt will be made This primary retry interval starts at the time of failure not on the original calling time and interval Failures may be caused by busy phone lines noisy RF environments low batteries damaged hardware etc Number of Primary Retries The number entered into this field is the number of times the server will attempt to contact the datalogger on the Primary Retry Interval If all the collection attempts fail then the server will commence calling on the Secondary Retry Interval if it is enabled Secondary Retry Interval If the secondary retry interval box is checked the specified interval is a calling interval that will be followed if all Primary Retries fail Data collection attempts will continue on the Secondary Interval until a data collection attempt is successful at which time all retry statistics are reset The Secondary Retry Interval is based on the initial date and time settings not the time of the last failure If the box is not checked the collection schedule Section 5 Setup will return to the normal collection schedule and continue through the primary retry schedule until communications are restored Typical use is to set the Primary Retries fairly close together and the Secondary Retry at a longer interval For instance if you are calling on an hourly basis the Primary Retries might be set to three tries spaced five minutes apart The Secondary Interval then might be set at 2 hours Collect P
218. ent Data Cache The storage for data collected from the datalogger by the LoggerNet server This data is stored in binary files on the hard disk of the computer where the server is running Data Collection Getting stored data from the datalogger and saving it in the communication server s data cache compare to Data Retrieval Data Point A data value which is sent to Final Storage as the result of an Output Instruction A group of data points output at the same time make up a record in a data table Data Retrieval Extracting data from the communication server s data cache to export to a file network or data display compare to Data Collection Data Storage Table Data Table A portion of the datalogger s Final Storage allocated for a particular output Each time output for a given data table occurs a new record is written to the table The size of the table in number of records and when records are written to the data table are determined by the datalogger s Data Table Instruction P84 The fields columns of the table are determined by the Output Processing Instructions that follow the Data Table Instruction Data Table Instruction Instruction 84 Used to create a Data Table and to cause records to be written to the Data Table DaysFull This field in the status table shows the number of days remaining before any of the tables using automatic record allocation are filled Differential Analog Input Some sensor
219. er and go through the last record collected Use of this option depends on knowing the memory pointer values for data collection Pointers can be manually reset but are updated and stored with each data collection 6 3 Section 6 Connect NOTE File Mode The File Mode determines if the data to be collected will be added at the end of the data file if it exists or will overwrite an existing data file This option only applies if a file with the same name exists in the directory specified Append to End of File When this option is selected the data collected using the Custom Collection option will be appended to the end of the file from previous Custom Collections Overwrite Existing File When this option is selected the newly collected data file will overwrite any existing file with the same name Select Final Storage Areas The Final Storage Area section on the dialog selects which final storage areas to collect data from The file name and directory show where the collected data will be saved Clicking the browse button next to the file name will bring up the file select dialog CRS500 CR7 and 21X dataloggers have only one final storage area 6 2 3 Custom Collection for Table based Dataloggers NOTE Clicking the Custom Collection button while connected to a table based datalogger brings up the dialog box shown below The options you can specify include how much data to collect the file format whe
220. er to Table 10 3 9 for definition of blank or bad data Example Blanks 3 0 no holes in data set returns the number of data points non blanks in element x over a full data set or every n value Example Count 1 24 24 data points in data set Blanks and Count are functions designed for checking the integrity of the data file A common use for these two functions is 100 BLANKS x n BLANKS x n COUNT x n which gives the percentage of holes bad data in the file Max xsn Min x n RunTotal x n returns the maximum value of element x over a full data set or every n value Examples Max 5 17 12 max WS for day Max 5 12 10 41 max WS for 12 hours 17 12 max WS for 12 hours returns the minimum value of element x over a full data set or every n value Examples Min 7 4 23 min std dev of WS for day Min 3 8 55 33 min temp for 8 hours 59 79 min temp for 8 hours 55 22 min temp for 8 hours returns a running total of element x for every line in the data set Ifan n value is specified a running total will be output every n value Example RunTotal 5 5 85 14 12 21 87 29 47 39 88 48 87 Sd xsn Smpl x n Section 10 Split 166 76 182 38 199 50 211 36 211 36 Running total of hourly average wind speed provides up to the hour wind run for that day Because an n value was not specified the Final Summary output which is daily wind is the same as the
221. ersion 3 0 or greater you may want to convert your current network description from PC208W format to the LoggerNet format The Convert utility has been provided to bring the old PC208W network description into the new LoggerNet format You should make sure that data collection is up to date in PC208W before converting the network description It is also a good idea to make a backup of the PC208W files The explanation for the use of Convert is in Section 5 6 on network setup 3 4 LoggerNet Operations and Backup Procedures 3 2 This section describes some of the concepts and procedures recommended for routine operation and security of the LoggerNet software If software and computer systems were perfect this section would not be necessary However since this software is required to run with predictable results in the real world on real computers the following guidelines and procedures will be helpful in minimizing possible problems that may occur 3 4 1 Backing up Data As with any computer system that contains important information the data stored in the LoggerNet data files should be backed up to a secure archive or transferred to another system on a regular basis This is a prudent measure in case the hard disk crashes or the computer suffers some other hardware failure that prevents access to the stored data on the disk To back up the files the client applications should be shut down and the LoggerNet Toolbar closed This is necessary
222. ervals for scheduled data collection need to set up to allow time for the communications link to be established Keep in mind that the phone modem requires 15 20 seconds to dial and establish communication Some time is also required to close down the link before another station can be contacted Make sure the collection schedule allows enough time for each station to be contacted before contacting the first station again 16 2 2 2 MD9 Addresses The address for an MD9 base device is set in the LoggerNet communications software at 255 The hardware configuration in the MD9 base modem must match for successful communications refer to your MD9 users manual for information on setting the hardware switches within the device In addition the address specified in Setup for the MD9 remote modem must match its hardware configuration 16 2 2 3 Extra Response Time LoggerNet is pre programmed to expect certain response times from devices depending on the type of intermediate devices and the communication rates chosen If the datalogger network communications link is marginal it may take longer to negotiate communication between the devices Extra response time added to one or more of the devices may help to prevent the software from timing out Note that the extra response times added for each device are cumulative for the entire communications link and the total response time includes the default times plus any extra response time that has been added
223. es e Square brackets are used to enclose an allowable range for a value e g 3 3 6 12 to indicate that the allowable range for element 3 is from 3 6 to 12 Whole numbers within brackets do not require a decimal point Table 10 3 6 explains how values outside the specified range are treated e The interval in a Time Series function is optional and does not require a decimal point e Semicolons are used in Time Series functions to separate the elements or expressions from the number that determines the interval Sample on maximum and sample on minimum require two elements or expressions also separated by a semicolon 10 3 7 Output Files 10 38 To create an Output File click the OUTPUT FILE tab The file is created on the default drive or directory unless the file name is preceded with an alternative drive or directory Use the Browse button to change directories Split will assign this file an extension of PRN if an extension is not specified by the user Whenever an Output file name is entered regardless of extension an Output file is created only when the RUN GO menu option is selected If the Append check box is selected the file created when Split is run will be appended to the end of an existing file with the same name If the check box is not selected the existing file will be overwritten If this line is left blank Split does not write data to an Output File on disk rather it will display the processed values on
224. ese settings depends on your application For most applications it is best to keep the default option of Do not change current datalogger Power up settings The affected settings are Port Status The state of the ports high low the last time the datalogger was on Flag Status The state of the flags high low the last time the datalogger was on User Timer Allows you to continue timing events that occurred when the datalogger was on last Input Storage Allows the values that were stored in the input locations before you turned the datalogger off to be included in the sample average and total when you turn the datalogger back on Intermediate Storage Allows data processing to continue from when the datalogger was on last NOTE Not all dataloggers have a Compile Settings option This option refers only to the CR510 CR10X and CR23X 8 4 5 Datalogger Serial Port Settings The serial port settings are used to set the baud rate to which the datalogger s port s should be set when the datalogger is powered up or when a program is compiled If the Do not change current Port settings option is selected the baud rate option used will be that at which the datalogger last communicated with a device connected to the port When the Fixed Baud Rate check box has been selected the datalogger is forced to communicate at the baud rate selected When it is not selected the datalogger will first try to use the initial baud rate but wil
225. et will stay connected to the datalogger on any scheduled call Once this time limit has been exceeded communications with the device will be terminated Setting the time to zero will disable this time limit This setting should be set to zero for most communications links other than phone modems Maximum Time On line only applies to scheduled communi cations Using the Connect screen to connect to the datalogger will stay connected until terminated by the user Maximum Packet Size Data is transferred in chunks called packets For most devices the default value is 2048 byes The value entered in this field can be changed in 32 byte increments If a communications link is marginal reducing the packet size may improve reliability Attention Character Enter the character that will be used to reset the RF400 modem By default the radios are programmed to use the character as the Attention Character However if the RF400 is being used in a communications link that includes a phone modem you will most likely need to change this character in the RF400 radio setup and on LoggerNet s Setup window Most phone modems use as the reset character and sending this character unexpectedly will reset the modem and terminate the communications link Section 5 Setup 5 3 Setting the Clock NOTE NOTE A datalogger s Clock tab can be used to define a schedule at which an automatic clock check will be performed refer to Section 5 2 5 5 The da
226. etc The instructions for making measurements and outputting data are not found in a standard basic language The instructions Campbell Scientific has created for these operations are in the form of procedures The procedure has a keyword name and a series of parameters that contain the information needed to complete the procedure For example the instruction for measuring the temperature of the CR5000 input panel is PanelTemp Dest Integ PanelTemp is the keyword name of the instruction The two parameters associated with PanelTemp are Destination the name of the variable in which to put the temperature and Integration the length of time to integrate the measurement To place the panel temperature in the variable RefTemp using a 250 microsecond measurement integration time the code is PanelTemp RefTemp 250 The use of these instructions should become clearer as we go through an introductory example in Section 9 3 9 2 5 Inserting Comments Into Program It is often useful to provide comments in your datalogger program so that when you review the program at a later date you will know what each section of code does Comments can be inserted into the program by preceding the text with a single quote When the program is compiled the datalogger compiler will ignore any text that is preceded by a single quote A comment can be placed at the beginning of a line or it can be placed after program code If Syntax Highlighting is enabled
227. f any Card Services drivers have been found on your system Most SMS operations can be aborted by clicking the Abort button For example if you click Abort while the software is attempting to establish communications between a storage module and computer that operation will be aborted Note that for some rapid operations such as reading or storing small program or data files from a module the operation may be completed before the abort option can take effect Section 14 DataFiler DataFiler is a LoggerNetData application that is used to retrieve data from the LoggerNet data cache and save the data to a file It provides a means for a user to manually retrieve and store ASCII data on a remote PC which can then be used for further analysis DataFiler is not shipped with the main LoggerNet application because it is redundant to the file creation functions already provided in LoggerNet it must be purchased separately as part of the LoggerNetData software suite 14 1 DataFiler Requirements DataFiler is an application that is capable of accessing the data in the LoggerNet data cache and storing that data to a file The DataFiler can run on the same computer as the LoggerNet software but more commonly it connects to a LoggerNet server computer over a TCP IP connection The LoggerNet server must be configured to allow remote connections this is set up during the installation of the LoggerNet software refer to Section 3 2 for additional inf
228. f the modem you select in LoggerNet s Setup screen doesn t work check to make sure you ve selected the correct modem that it s powered up and that the phone line is working You may have to adjust the baud rate If you still have trouble you may need to consult your modem manual for the appropriate initialization strings Perhaps you can communicate with other dataloggers on this phone line and with this base modem but there s one remote datalogger that s problematic You could try communicating with that datalogger in remote keyboard mode Using the example above choose instead the datalogger in the Terminal Emulator and click Open Terminal You should hear the phone modem dial followed by screeches as the modems negotiate a connection followed by CONNECT etc and then a response from the datalogger Pressing lt Enter gt for an array based logger should return an asterisk Typing A lt Enter gt should return the status line Type 7H 2718H for 21X or CR7X dataloggers to put the datalogger in remote keyboard mode From there you can enter commands much like from a keyboard display handheld interface Pressing 6 followed by several lt Enter gt keys should cause the datalogger to report its input locations If all you get from some of these commands is MODE perhaps the datalogger has security set See your datalogger manual for other remote keyboard commands You may also call your C
229. file is assigned to another program you must remove this association before the new association can be made Section 11 View 11 6 2 Array Definitions Array based dataloggers only The Array Definitions button Lf on the toolbar brings up the Array Definitions window You can use this window to manually assign correct time and date stamps to an array based data file or to change or add an FSL file association fe Campbell Scientific View Array Definitions Array 112 Time value for top selection 2 7 02 12 52 47 PM Year 2 Year_RTM C No value From data file Index 4 Al Day 3 Day_RTM Time 4 Hour_Minute_RTM i H Minute _RTM Seconds 5 Seconds_RTM Field Hour Minute RTM 112 le Year_RTM Day_RTM FSL Fi CicampbellSciiLoggerNet2 Si 5 Seconds_RTM File Cr23x dat 6 BattVolt_AVG File Line 1 7 IntTempC_AVG Array 112 8 TCTempF_AVG ArrayLine 1 9 TCTempF_MAX gt Be DTE E C Use fixed value Value 2002 o A When you bring up the Array Definition screen View will attempt to automatically assign elements from the selected array to the date and time values if they exist in the data file If these elements are not assigned automatically you can assign values manually Click anywhere in the Year Day Time or Seconds box and in the second column you can choose to assign no element an element from the data file or a fixed value to any of the date and time values W
230. for LoggerNet to specify the modem type or work with initialization strings Like the standard serial port configuration for the TAPI port has only the Hardware tab Following is an explanation of each of the fields on this form Communications Enabled Before communication can take place all devices in the chain must be enabled When this box is selected the Internet protocol serial port is enabled for communication Call back Enabled Enabling call back tells LoggerNet to watch for a call back from the datalogger on this port If there is a phone modem attached it will be set to monitor for incoming calls TAPI Line Select the modem you want to use for communication The modems listed are defined by Windows as part of the computer s Modem Setup All of the parameters for the modem including the baud rate have to be set using the Windows Modem Setup dialog If you are using the same modem for dialup access you may have to change the settings for the different applications To communicate with dataloggers using the TAPI modem you have to set the baud rate to match the communication capability of the devices in the link If you are using COM200 modems the baud rate must be set to 9600 on the TAPI modem For use over cell phone modems 1200 or 4800 baud may be required Extra Response Time In this field specify the additional time that LoggerNet should delay before terminating the communications link if there is no response fro
231. for data storage on disk but the data needs to be decoded before it can be read SPLIT see Section 10 can be used to decode the data If you wish to decode data with your own software refer to the appropriate datalogger Operator s Manual If the data was stored in the module in ASCII format you should use the As Stored format to collect data from the module see below Storing data directly in ASCII format is inefficient in terms of use of the module memory as printable ASCII requires five storage locations in the module 10 bytes as compared to one 2 bytes for binary data 13 5 2 File Naming Options Data files can be collected either individually or collectively The File Naming Options box gives you control over how the extracted files are collected and named Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS File name Data files will normally be stored under a file name with the DAT extension When first using SMS the button in the FILE NAMING OPTION screen will show the name DATA000 DAT This name can be changed to any other name of your choice By clicking the button a standard Windows File Name box appears that will allow you to type in the name you want Auto Name Control You may choose to Auto Increment the file name to Append the data to a current file or to manually choose a New Name for each file saved Auto Increment Name When the software is first used the program will always select a default file nam
232. for each RF modem is configured for a certain address with internal switches This address acts as an identification for the device in an RF network Each RF modem in the network must have a unique address this number is entered in the Address field Each RF modem used as a repeater only site still needs its own unique Address RF Options Use F Command The F command forces the baud rate to 9600 In the modem enabled ME state the serial I O port of the EOL end of link modem will communicate with the datalogger at 9600 baud with the F command In the synchronous device communication SDC state the baud rate from the computer to the SOL start of link modem will be 9600 Use U Command The U command will force RF communication between radios to 2400 baud rather than 3000 baud DC95s purchased before February 1989 can only be used at 2400 baud For further information see Appendix F in the Radiotelemetry Network Instruction Manual 5 15 Section 5 Setup 5 16 Use W Command The W command will force the RF modem to wait until there is no carrier detect before transmitting This option is used when the computer is connected to more than one RF base Custom Dial String The custom dial string is specifically used to send commands to an RF95 modem The values entered into this field will be inserted between the S command and the string of switch identifiers sent when the modem is dialed 5 2 8 MD9 Base
233. g has several features which aid in the management of these labels A new Input Location label is automatically assigned the next available Input Location number address That Input Location can be picked from a list when needed later in the program for further calculations or output The Input Location Editor Section 8 2 3 allows the Input Locations to be edited moved inserted or deleted the Input Location numbers are then automatically updated wherever the labels appear in the program When a section of code is pasted into a program Edlog will automatically use existing locations for matching labels and assign new locations to new labels All location numbers in the pasted code are updated accordingly Final Storage Label Editor The Final Storage Label Editor allows you to change the default labels assigned by Edlog The labels are stored in the Final Storage Label file for array dataloggers and as part of the datalogger program for array based and table based dataloggers Expression Compiler Mathematical calculations can be written algebraically using Input Location labels as variables When the program is compiled Edlog will convert the expressions to datalogger instructions For example the following expression could be used to create a new input location for temperature in degrees Fahrenheit from an existing input location for temperatures in degrees Celsius TempF TempC 1 8 32 8 1 1 Creating a New Edlog Program To
234. g high speed communications using that port This shared interrupt problem would therefore also affect operation of SMS If you appear to be experiencing communication problems when using external modules always check the COM ports setting in the Windows Control Panel using the Ports Settings Advanced option and check for any shared interrupts The first time you use SMS with a storage module a default baud rate of 38 400bps is automatically selected for the CSM1 MCR1 and a baud rate of 19 200bps is set for the SM192 716 modules connected using an SC532 If you are connecting to a storage module via a datalogger the baud rate will vary depending upon the datalogger chosen The default maximum baud rate 38 400bps for CSM1 MCR1 and 19 200bps for SM192 716 can be adjusted to your own requirements depending on among other things the speed of your COM port and processor speed When SMS reads data from the storage device it automatically performs a checksum test and requests that bad data be re transmitted If bad data is detected the computer will beep If communication errors occur it may help to reduce the baud rate Possible reasons why good communications cannot be established using higher baud rates under Windows are e Using low quality cards or using generic drivers rather than the hardware specific drivers e Processor is loaded down by other applications e g DOS programs set to exclusive mode or other oper
235. g in degrees Celsius can be processed to display in degrees Fahrenheit using a mathematical expression An expression is entered for a component by first selecting the data value in the Select Data field and then entering the mathematical expression after the defined data value Using the above example if the data value is defined as CR5000 TempData Temp1 datalogger table variable you would enter NOTE 12 2 4 1 Operators Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC CR5000 TempData Temp1 1 8 32 to convert the temperature reading from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit The data values from different dataloggers can be combined to form the expression Data values are referenced as in the above example by datalogger name as it appears in the Setup screen followed by the table name or array ID followed by the data label An array based example would be CR10X_2 109 BattV datalogger arrayID input location Spaces must be used before and after the predefined constants and functions Operators do not require spaces Operator Description Prioritizes parts of an expression within the larger expression Multiply by Divide by a Raised to the power of Add z Subtract Equal lt gt Not equal gt Greater than S Less than gt Greater than or equal to lt Less than or equal to 12 2 4 2 Predefined Constants Constant Description e 2 718282 PI 3 141593 True 1 False 0 12 9 Section 12
236. g the IP address above the entry in Setup would appear as follows 198 199 32 45 3201 Inactivity Timeout This timer resets the TCP IP socket port if there has not been any activity on the port for the specified period of time The time is usually specified in minutes This prevents a situation where the socket gets left open after a call and blocks other incoming calls 16 7 Section 16 Implementing Advanced Communications Links 16 8 Appendix A Glossary of Terms A Advise See Data Advise ASCII File A computer file containing letters numbers and other characters using the ASCII character encoding Asynchronous The transmission of data between a transmitting and a receiving device occurs as a series of zeros and ones For the data to be read correctly the receiving device must begin reading at the proper point in the series In asynchronous communications this coordination is accomplished by having each character surrounded by one or more start and stop bits that designate the beginning and ending points of the information see Synchronous The transfer of information is not otherwise coordinated between the sender and receiver Analog Channel A terminal on the datalogger s wiring panel where leads for analog signals are connected The analog channels are designated single ended SE or differential DIFF on the wiring panel Many sensors such as thermistor temperature probes and wind vanes output analog signa
237. ge for the selected date and time option The date can be chosen from the drop down calendar and the time can be entered or edited using the arrows to the right of the control Starting Record Information Starting Record is used to specify a range of records to collect The data collection will begin at this record number and get the number of records specified in the Number of Records Number of Records is used to specify a range of records or the number of records to go back from the last record stored in the datalogger File Mode File Mode is used to choose whether the collected data should be appended to the file if it exists overwrite the existing file or create a new file If Create New File is selected and the named file exists a new file will be created with the specified file name and a sequence number added to it File Format selects the file format for the output data file TOACII Table Oriented ASCII type 1 format This format has a two line header giving the station and table name along with the labels for each of the data values The data is written one record per line in ASCII text with the timestamp at the beginning of each line This file can be opened in LoggerNet View a text editor processed using Split or brought into a spreadsheet application The example below shows the data from a OneMinute table in a CR510TD datalogger TOACIL CR510TD OneMinute TMSTAMP RECNBR BattVolt_Time MIN
238. ger s execution interval and timer are synchronized with the clock The CR10X TD CR510 TD and CR23X TD have battery backups which maintain the clock even when 12 V power is not available Record A group of data values output at the same time to the same data table Records are written in response to the Data Table Instruction 84 The individual fields within each record are determined by the Output Processing instructions following the Data Table Instruction that created the data table RecNbr An entry in the status table that shows the record number in the table Remote Site Usually refers to the site where datalogger is located at the other end of a communications link Also can refer to the site where a radio RF repeater is located Repeater a radio RF site that relays packets of information to a remote site Used to extend the range of radio transmissions Any remote datalogger site with radio can act as a repeater Retries When a transaction or communication between two devices or programs fail the transaction or communication is usually repeated until it succeeds Retrieval see Data Retrieval RF Dealing with radio telemetry Stands for Radio Frequency RTMS Real Time Monitoring Software A software application designed by Campbell Scientific for fast real time data acquisition RTMS was designed for IBM s OS 2 PC operating system and replaced by LoggerNet Appendix A Glossary of Terms S Sca
239. gers Storage modules are not supported in the table based dataloggers CR5000 CR9000 CR200 CR510TD CRIOT CR10X TD and CR23X TD 13 1 Overview Clicking the Stg Module button on the LoggerNet Toolbar will bring up the Storage Module Software SMS Using a special interface SMS provides easy communication with Campbell Scientific s external Storage Modules card readers and dataloggers for collection and storage of both programs and data Data can also be read directly from a PC card if the computer is fitted with a PC card slot and the PC operating system supports 32 bit VXDs NOTE The CSM1 Storage Module the MCR1 Card Reader and a computer fitted with an internal PC Card reader all use SRAM PCMCIA cards which must be formatted to Campbell Scientific s specifications Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP do not support Microsoft s 32 bit Card Service VXDs Therefore SMS cannot communicate with PCMCIA card slots running under Windows NT 2000 or XP There is extensive online help available either by pressing the F1 key or accessing help from the menu The online help along with the user guide for the module you are using will help you get the most out of your storage modules NOTE The CSM1 MCRI and SM192 716 User Guides contain references to other Campbell Scientific software CSMCOM and SMCOM These programs are not required if you are using SMS 13 1 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 2 Getting St
240. gger Save as Initial Template Saves the comments and instructions in the active file as a template that will be used each time the CRBasic Editor is started If Display Last Window Used option is selected the initial template will not be used Delete When selected a list of all dataloggers is displayed Select a datalogger to invoke a dialog box containing a list of saved templates A template can then be highlighted and deleted from disk Datalogger Types When a datalogger type is selected a list of all templates is displayed Template files are associated with a specific datalogger type Templates for a CRS5000 cannot be used for CR9000 programming and vice versa Each datalogger has its own set of instructions that may be different than the other 9 7 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 1 7 CRBasic Editor Options This menu item allows you to specify the files used in the CRBasic Editor and customize its look and syntax highlighting Options Editor Preferences Instruction Panel Preferences Edit Instruction Categories Supported Loggers Font Background Color Wrap Text When Printing Display Last Window Used Editor Preferences sets up the appearance options for the text instructions and the behavior of popup hints The Editor tab allows the user to toggle the popup hints for instructions on or off set the amount of time the cursor must hover over the instruction
241. ggers As the data is collected from the dataloggers it is placed in data files according to the settings specified for that station The data is also kept in data storage areas by LoggerNet for use by the display screens such as the Numeric Display and Graph screens Input locations and Public variables don t have to be scheduled for collection to be displayed on the Numeric Display or the Graph For data to be collected it has to be selected for collection on the Data File or Final Storage tab in the Setup screen for each datalogger Section 5 2 5 If final storage data is not selected for collection no data will be stored or displayed on the display screens One of the most significant considerations for setting up data collection is all of the intervals associated with reading storing and retrieving data The intervals and their significance for data handling are described below 5 4 1 1 1 Datalogger Program Intervals There are two types of intervals written into the datalogger program which affect the availability and collection of data e Program Execution Interval The execution or scan interval determines how often the datalogger carries out the instructions in the datalogger program It is specified in seconds and determines the fundamental rate at which data is available In typical programs the sensor readings are taken at this rate and the values are stored in corresponding Input Locations or variables This execution
242. git year MM is the month number DD is the day of the month HH is the hour in the day 24 hour format MM is the minutes into the hour SS is the seconds into the minute and mmm is the milliseconds into the second Device Name The name of the device associated with the message If the message is associated with the LoggerNet server this will be an empty string D 1 3 2 Transaction Log Format D 2 Each record in the transaction log includes at least two fields in addition to the timestamp and device name Message Type Code Identifies the type of event that has occurred This is a number that corresponds to the description immediately following If this log is being read by a software program a number is very easy to use for comparison when looking for specific message types Message Type Description Text that describes the message type code Message Text Network device added Network branch deleted Network branch moved Network logon succeeded Network logon failed Security session opened Security database read failed Appendix D Log Files The following table is a list of the different messages that can appear in the transaction log some of the optional parameters and what the message means Where appropriate a suggested response to the message is provided Message Parameters Device Name Device Name Device Name Message Meaning User Response to Message If unsuccessful logo
243. gramming practices that will help you and others understand what the datalogger program is intended to do Comments Edlog provides the ability to add comments on any blank line and to the right of all instructions Liberal use of descriptive comments makes the program clearer and will help you remember what you were doing when you come back to it a year or two later Especially useful are descriptions of what sensors are connected and how they are wired to the datalogger Program Flow It is easier to follow a program that is written in distinct sections each of which handles a specific type of instruction The recommended sequence is Measure Sensors In this first section put all the instructions that get data from the sensors attached to the datalogger The sensor readings are stored in input locations ready for the next section Process Measurements In this section do all the calculations and data processing to prepare the data for output Control Do any control of external hardware or devices Output Data Check to see if it is time or a condition exists to trigger output data to be saved in final storage Descriptive Labels Use input location and final storage labels that are meaningful for the data they contain Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog 8 1 1 2 Edlog File Types When a program is saved and compiled the following files are created NOTE CSI The CSI f
244. han the Output field width Column headings associated with Time Series outputs are repeated for Final Summaries if a title for the Final Summary is requested on the headings for report line The number of digits to report to the right of the decimal point is entered in the Decimal field and can be set independently for each column The value output will be rounded to the specified number of digits Leave this field blank if you do not want to round the data to a specific number of digits Column headings can be entered using Split s Data Labels Function Labels Use Data Labels 10 43 Section 10 Split 10 4 Help Option On line Help is available from any location in Split Simply select the area of Split in question and press lt F1 gt Split also offers a brief on the fly Help Place the cursor on the area of Split in question after a moment a brief description is displayed in the hint line of the Split window bottom left 10 5 Editing Commands Split supports the Windows Cut Copy and Paste commands Text from any field in Split or other Windows applications can be Cut Copied or Pasted 10 6 Running Split From a Command Line Existing parameter files can be executed using Splitr exe which is a run time version of the Split Report Generator When Splitr exe is run the file is processed as if the user chose Run Go from the Split menu Splitr exe can be executed from a Task in LoggerNet from a batch file or from a W
245. he label cannot exceed the width of the output column default is eight characters A maximum of thirty 30 labels are allowed per Select line Make sure that the column widths are big enough for the label to fit Otherwise the output will indicate Bad Data Examples Max Temp Max Temp outputs Max Temp Max Temp 24 times Max Temp Smpl 8 hour 8 Smpl Max Temp 8 Max 3 8 8 hour Max Temp 58 56 8 hour Max Temp 63 75 8 hour Max Temp 67 33 This example samples the labels called 8 hour and Max Temp and looks for a Maximum temp for every 8 hour interval 10 31 Section 10 Split 10 32 Line numbers each line written to the report file or printer This differs from the Count function in that Count looks at how many lines were read Examples Line 4 5 1 17 42 5 855 2 17 65 8 27 3 17 76 7 75 4 18 89 7 6 5 19 6 10 41 6 23 32 8 99 7 24 79 9 52 19 24 75 7 08 20 26 03 8 76 21 27 45 11 81 22 35 46 15 62 23 38 8 17 12 24 37 13 11 86 Smp Line 8 Smpl 4 8 Smpl 5 8 1 23 98 6 588 2 24 31 8 88 3 37 13 11 86 smpl PA n Outputs the data to the printer or RPT file with n lines per page Examples 2 3 Smpl PA 12 100 58 56 200 57 48 1100 61 34 1200 60 61 Page 2 1300 61 01 1400 60 93 2300 55 48 0 55 22 Date format S H D Y Converts a datalogger s time stamp to a different format and encloses it in double quotes edate will produce a date without
246. he signal wire With this type of sensor only one analog connection is required Hence it needs a single ended or SE analog input The single ended channels are marked as SE on the datalogger wiring panel Socket Data Export a software application that connects to the LoggerNet server and provides a TCP IP socket for a user created application to receive data records from the server data cache Station A datalogger site is often referred to as a station Station Number The LoggerNet server assigns and uses station numbers for routing packets to the dataloggers These numbers can be modified using CoraScript Storage An entry in the status table that shows the number of final storage locations available Synchronous The transmission of data between a transmitting and a receiving device occurs as a series of zeros and ones For the data to be read correctly the receiving device must begin reading at the proper point in the series In synchronous communications this coordination is accomplished by synchronizing the transmitting and receiving devices to a common clock signal see Asynchronous A 9 Appendix A Glossary of Terms A 10 T Tab Windows Some screens depict a series of related windows in a multi tabbed notebook format When you click the file folder tab the information on the tab you chose will be displayed Tables An entry in the status table that shows the number of user created data tables
247. he top of the window For ease of use in large networks of many dataloggers you can list the dataloggers in alphabetical order by selecting the check box Sort Alphabetically All the station names will be listed alphabetically to make it easier to find a specific station a Station Connection LoggerlOxtd CR10XTD File Edit View Collection Help Stations Data Collection Collect Now Custom Colect amp Stop Ports and Flags Program Unknown I Sort Alphabetically deat Heera Clocks PC System Date Time 2 6 02 6 43 47 AM Station Date Time 2 6 02 6 51 47 AM Set Station Clock T Pause Clock Update Connection B Disconnect Elapsed Time Q 00 05 36 Data Displays Graphical 1 2 Ea ea E I Pause Displays SS When you click the Connect button the animated graphic will indicate the connection state It will show that LoggerNet is trying to establish the connection the two connectors join together when the connection is made You can also connect to the datalogger by double clicking the datalogger name or selecting Connect from the File menu 6 1 Section 6 Connect NOTE Once the datalogger connection is established the Elapsed Time counter starts This counter will continue as long as the datalogger connection is maintained The user should be aware of the how long the Connect
248. hen the Array Definitions window is opened if one of the top lines of this window reads No array selected click a text element in your data file for the array you want to assign values View will automatically assign elements from the array to the year date and time values if your file s date and time values are at the beginning of the array and are in descending order i e day is before time and they are not separated by any non date or non time elements The assigned date and time values will most likely be correct for files of more than a few hundred lines In this window you can assign a FSL file final storage label file to the data file if one was not assigned when the data file was first opened Enter a file 11 8 NOTE Section 11 View name into the FSL file name field to make this assignment View will then use information from the FSL file to provide label names for the Data Panel column headings and Chart Panel traces For more information refer to FSL files section 11 2 3 This option is unavailable for files opened using Open As Text and for TOA Files TOA files do not use FSL files Column header information is included directly in the data file Section 11 View 11 10 Section 12 Real Time Monitor and r Control The Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC software provides the ability to create and run graphical screens to display real time data as LoggerNet collects it from the dataloggers Controls
249. ht of the Parameter dialog box Right clicking or pressing F2 on a parameter that has a finite number of valid entries will bring up a list of those available options Right clicking or pressing F2 on a parameter that does not fall within the two categories above will bring up help for that parameter Pressing F1 with any parameter selected will bring up help for that parameter along with a list of possible options where appropriate Changing Default Parameters Values for an Instruction Each instruction offers default values for each parameter For instance in the Parameter box above the default for the Range is mV5000 If you wanted to edit this so that each time you inserted the VoltDiff instruction the Range value defaulted to mV1000 you would highlight the instruction in the Instruction Panel select Instruction Edit Instruction Defaults from the menu and make the change in the resulting dialog box 9 1 3 Right Click Functionality The result of a right click action varies depending upon your cursor location Right click an instruction name to show the Parameter dialog box to edit the instruction parameters Right click a parameter that uses a Variable as an input type to bring up a list of variables that have been defined in the program as described in the previous section Right click a parameter that has a finite number of valid entries to bring up a list of those available options You can change the option by clicking
250. ible into the number of output arrays present in the Input File The summary in this case is calculated from an incomplete interval count 10 26 Section 10 Split The date function can be used for the interval in a time series function to produce monthly output Refer to the Monthly summary example in Section 10 3 5 3 The interval count in a Time Series Function is optional and does not require a decimal point To determine the interval Split counts the number of arrays which meet the specified conditions Stop Start and Copy If the time synchronize function is enabled the Time Series functions remain synchronized to the starting time even if a complete array is missing from the input data When elements are missing the Time Series calculations are based on the actual number of elements found Semicolons are used in Time Series functions to separate the elements or expressions from the count which determines the interval SmplMax and SmpIMin require two elements separated by a semicolon The first is checked for a maximum or minimum while the second is sampled on the maximum or minimum The following set of weather data from Mt Logan in northern Utah gives a total of seven elements each hour This Field Formatted output with title and column headers was generated by Split These data are used in the following examples of Time Series functions Mt Logan Weather Data Day 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 178 1
251. ices are connected between the computer s COM port and the datalogger Control Port Dataloggers have digital output ports that can be used to switch power to sensors such as the HMP35C relative humidity circuit or to control relays These digital outputs are called Control Ports and are labeled C1 C2 etc on the wiring panel Control ports on some dataloggers can also be used as inputs to sense the digital high or low state of a signal or used as data input output connections for SDI 12 sensors CoraScript This is a command line interpreter that allows the user access to many of the capabilities of the LoggerNet server using direct commands or programmed script files CR10X TD Family of Dataloggers This includes the table based dataloggers specifically the CR10T CR510 TD CR10X TD and CR23X TD CRBasic The programming language used for CR200 5000 9000 dataloggers The CRBasic editor is used to create the program files for these dataloggers Appendix A Glossary of Terms D Data Advise Datalogger A mutual agreement between the server and the datalogger about which tables are to be collected every time the datalogger is contacted Based on the dataloggers table definitions Data Advise Server an agreement between a client application and the server to provide specified data as it is collected by the server Data Advise Notification The packet of data sent by the datalogger based on the Data Advise agreem
252. ield Number 6 FIGURE 10 2 6 Pasting Labels Into Split Section 10 Split Report and Column Headings Report Heading fHoryData S per eS Se ay ey Elements 5 o lbe O Mm Mm Do AjirT emp_MIN ica 4 BirchCreek_1 q BirchCreek_1 q BirchCreek_1 qBirchCreek_1 qBirchCreek_1 d Hour_Minute Battery BattVolt AirTemp ArT emp Decimal 4 nm Volts Min Average Max C C miel FIGURE 10 2 7 Edited Headings Maximum column heading width is one less than the number entered in the Default Column Width field Entering a number in the Width row for the column will set the column width for an individual column Any FSL labels that are too long for Split column headings will be shown in red They should be edited before running Split To edit one of the labels press the lt Enter gt key or use a mouse to copy cut and paste A Report Heading can also be entered Figure 10 3 7 using the same editing technique For table based data files the timestamp is normally the first column and is a quoted text string 2002 02 26 10 30 00 To display these timestamps in the output you will need to change the column width for the first column to at least 24 Ifthe column width is too small to accommodate the value output the string will be highlighted in red and preceded by an asterisk with the words Bad Data in the lower right corner when the file is processed To run Split s
253. ies dataloggers must be precompiled before being sent to the datalogger The compiled file is a binary image file with a bin extension Unlike the other dataloggers CR200 dataloggers have no on board compiler Because these dataloggers have no on board compiler the bin file must be generated with a version of the Section 6 Connect precompiler that matches the operating system in the datalogger This could result in a problem if your LoggerNet software and the CR200 were not purchased at the same time Ifa bin file is downloaded to a CR200 and the version of that binary file does not match the datalogger s OS the download will fail and an error will be returned To help alleviate this problem the LoggerNet installation includes all of the compilers available to date for the CR200 When sending a program if you choose to send the CR2 file LoggerNet will first check the OS version of the datalogger and then attempt to compile the CR2 file with the matching compiler If you choose to send the bin file LoggerNet will not check the CR200 s OS or precompile the file it will just send the bin file CR200 dataloggers are shipped with a support software CD This CD contains the precompiler that matches the OS of your datalogger It may be necessary to copy this file into LoggerNet s C Program Files CampbellSci LoggerNet directory so that it is available for LoggerNet s use 6 4 3 Retrieving Datalogger Programs The program r
254. ilable as buttons on the toolbar or by right clicking the components or other parts of the window Operations that have toolbar buttons will have the button icon shown next to the description below File Menu O New Project starts a new RTMC project The currently opened project will be closed If there are changes that have not been saved the user will be prompted to save changes u project Open brings up the File Open dialog to open a previously saved LA Save will save the changes in the current project to the RTMC project file If this is the first time the project has been saved a Save As dialog will open to select the file name and directory for the project file Save As brings up the Save As dialog to save the current project with another name or in a different directory 12 5 Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC 12 6 NOTE Exit closes RTMC If there are unsaved changes the user will be prompted to save changes before exiting Edit Menu Undo cancels the last change made to the project Redo repeats the change that was just undone Cut Copy Paste are standard editing operations to take selected objects to an internal clipboard and paste back into RTMC Cut Copy does not go to the Windows clipboard so these objects are not available to paste into other applications Project Menu Project Menu options work with the whole project or workspace Change Workspace Size allows you to specify the size
255. ile is what the user actually edits When an Edlog program is saved Edlog automatically adds a CSI extension to the program s name Existing CSI files can be edited by selecting File Open Although CSI files are ASCII files they require a particular format so editing the files with some other text editor can corrupt the Edlog programs so that they no longer compile DLD When Edlog compiles a program CSI a DLD file is created This is the file that is downloaded to the datalogger and also the type of file that is retrieved from the datalogger If an existing program file is edited and compiled the old DLD file will be overwritten by the new file A CSI file can be created from a DLD by choosing File Document DLD File PTI PTI files show the execution times for each instruction block e g subroutine and program table as well as the estimated number of final storage locations used per day The execution times are estimates PTI files do not account for If commands Else commands or repetitions of loops For some instructions the execution times are listed as 0 This occurs when the execution time is unknown e g P23 Burst Measurement FSL Final Storage Label files contain the final storage labels for the data values in the output data records This file is used by Split to show labels for data values in reports and by View for column headings FSL files are not created for table based dataloggers Table bas
256. illed and overwrote the requested data This also can occur if the record number rolls over from the maximum to start back at zero or an identical program is loaded into the datalogger without going through the server Data can also be collected from the datalogger using a manual poll operation This is achieved by selecting Collect Now from the Connect Screen When a manual poll is done the data from the datalogger is saved in the output data file and is also put into the data cache C 2 3 Retrieving Data from the Cache Once the data has been stored in the data cache it is retrieved by the applications such as the graphical and numerical displays that request the data by datalogger table or array and data field The data can be requested by a query where the request specifies the starting and ending timestamp or record number along with the data to retrieve C 2 4 Updating Table Definitions When the table definitions are obtained from the datalogger they are kept in the server and used to identify the data available in the data cache Every time new data is collected from a datalogger a table definition signature is sent that should match the signature stored in the server If this table definition signature doesn t match it indicates that the table definitions in the datalogger have changed There are a number of things that could cause datalogger table definitions to change A new program may have been downloaded to the datalogger or
257. in custom formats for use in reports or as input to other data applications Split is also included in LoggerNetData D 1 2 7 View Section 11 Q View is used to look at data files The data is displayed in either comma separated or tabular format by record or array A graph can be displayed to show one or two columns of data View is also included in LoggerNetData 1 2 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Section 12 lt Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC is used to create real time data displays using the data collected from the dataloggers by LoggerNet Once a display screen is configured it can be run on any computer that has a network connection to the LoggerNet computer Users can create customized graphic displays that include graphs tables dials alarms digital values and other graphic elements These displays automatically update when LoggerNet collects new data RTMC is also included in LoggerNetData 1 2 9 Storage Module Software Section 13 leg The Storage Module Software SMS handles configuration data retrieval and datalogger program management with PC cards or Campbell Scientific storage modules This program supports the SM192 716 and SM4M 16M storage modules along with the CSM1 or MCR card reader or for Windows 95 98 a PCMCIA card slot installed on the computer 1 4 Section 1 Introduction a 1 2 10 DataFiler Section 14 amp DataFiler is a LoggerNetData application used to collect data from
258. inal storage labels and input locations names are available to select and add to the display If the datalogger doesn t have an associated file the input locations can still be displayed by clicking the Select Input Locations button at the bottom of the screen The numbers of the input locations to display can then be entered using dashes to indicate ranges and commas to separate numbers For example 2 4 6 14 17 would add eight input locations to the display input locations 2 3 4 6 14 15 16 and 17 Once the fields have been added to the Numeric Display they will update automatically as new data is collected from the datalogger Input Locations and fields from a Public table that are not included as part of normal scheduled data collection will be collected from the datalogger based on the Update Interval The frequency of the update is set in the Update Interval field accessed by pressing the Options button The Update Interval applies to all cells on the display Available Fields xi Stay On Top IntT empC_Time_MAx OneMinute IntT empC_Time_MIN Select Input Locations eat Paste fl Close Section 6 Connect 6 5 2 2 Delete To delete data fields from the Numeric Display select the data fields on the display and press the Delete button Adding new data fields on top of existing fields in the display will overwrite the existing fields 6 5 2 3 Display Options To customize the Numeric Display select one or more
259. indows command line prompt 10 6 1 Processing Alternate Files Splitr allows the user to select different input and or output files for an existing parameter file by entering them on the command line after the parameter file name For example Splitt LOGAN PAR R TEST DAT TEST PRN Replaces the Input and Output file names in LOGAN PAR with TEST DAT and TEST PRN respectively A space must be used to separate command line parameters Splitr uses as many entries as exist on the command line However the command line has a limit to the number of characters it can accommodate this limit is operating system dependent The parameters must be in the following sequence Input file name Output file name Start Condition Stop Condition Copy Condition and Select A comma space comma should be inserted for any parameter not specified If a parameter is to be left as it is in the parameter file space comma space may be entered in the command line For instance if the parameter file LOGAN PAR contained TEST1 DAT as an input file name the following command line would leave the input file TEST1 DAT and change the output file to TEST PRN SPLITR LOGAN R TEST PRN 10 44 Section 10 Split 10 6 2 Processing Multiple Parameter Files with One Command Line More than one PAR file can be executed with a single Splitr command line Each PAR file and its associated parameters are separated from the next PAR file by a semico
260. ing many different views and ways to access the data collected from the dataloggers In addition to running on the same computer with LoggerNet the LoggerNetData applications can be run on other computers connected to the LoggerNet computer over a local area network LAN LoggerNet can automatically collect data from the dataloggers on a schedule as well as on request from the user It can automatically check and update the clocks in the dataloggers and handle administration support functions C 2 LoggerNet Server Data Cache The LoggerNet server data cache is a set of files kept on the hard disk of the computer where the server is running These data files are in binary format and can only be used or interpreted by the LoggerNet server The data cache files are stored in addition to the output data files C 2 1 Organization The data cache is set up to emulate the way data is stored in the datalogger When a new datalogger station is defined for the network and communication is established with the station the server requests the table definitions from table data dataloggers For array based dataloggers the array definitions are contained in a final storage label file that is associated with a datalogger This table or array information is used to set up equivalent tables and data arrays for data storage in the data cache The size of the areas set up in the data cache is dependent on the size of final storage in the datalogger Datalogger t
261. ion intervals and the communication time required between the computer and the RF base LoggerNet will make a call each time that it does data collection for a station It will stay on line until a response is received either the data or an error indicating that the data collection failed LoggerNet will also initiate a call for any datalogger operations such as connect in the Connect screen or get table definitions in the Setup screen The device map set up in the Setup Screen for a Phone to RF link would look similar to the communications network below ComPort_3_3 H A PhoneBase_2 PhoneRemote_2 EA RFBase_2 4 RFRemote_2 fe CR510 To begin add a Serial Port to the device map if one does not exist Add a Phone Modem to the Serial Port To this Phone Modem add a Remote Phone Modem Next add an RF base modem and then an RF remote modem To complete the network add your datalogger to the remote RF modem Review all of the settings for each device and make any changes to customize the settings for your network configuration 16 1 Section 16 Implementing Advanced Communications Links 16 1 2 Operational Considerations 16 1 2 1 Scheduled Data Collection The intervals for scheduled data collection need to be set up to allow time for the communications link to be established Keep in mind that the phone modem requires 15 20 seconds to dial and establish communication Also each link in the RF connection requires 3 5 se
262. ion was closed connection to the server Table size The name of the table that The size of the table Reduce the size of the reduced during was resized The original in the data cache was tables in the datalogger creation specified size of the table reduced because there program or get more The new size of the table was not enough hard disk storage space computer disk space for the computer to create it or the file would have exceeded the 2 Gbyte size limit Transaction Log Example 2002 03 06 11 30 01 075 CR510TD 94 Collect area poll complete TimeSet 0 2002 03 06 11 30 01 325 CR510TD 41 Records received TenSecond 242747 242751 2002 03 06 11 30 01 325 CR510TD 94 Collect area poll complete TenSecond 12 2002 03 06 11 30 01 325 CR510TD 97 Scheduled polling complete 2002 03 06 11 30 04 670 CR23X_2 93 Final storage values received final_ storage _1 72 2002 03 06 11 30 04 670 CR23X_2 94 Collect area poll complete final_storage_1 72 2002 03 06 11 30 04 700 CR23X_2 94 Collect area poll complete ports_and_flags 0 2002 03 06 11 30 04 700 CR23X_2 97 Scheduled polling complete 2002 03 06 11 30 30 097 CR510TD 13 Clock checked 20020306 11 28 32 455 Appendix D Log Files 2002 03 06 11 31 00 010 CR23X_2 96 Scheduled poll started 2002 03 06 11 31 00 010 CR510TD 96 Scheduled poll started 2002 03 06 11 31 00 010 CR23X_2
263. ions are files ending with dnd and by default have the name and path as shown in the dialog box above Once you have found the network description file to convert click OK and LoggerNet will run the scripts to create the network with settings in LoggerNet format The converter requires that wmodem ini be in the same directory as the pc208w dnd The new network should have all of the same devices and communication paths as under PC208W The data collected by PC208W will remain in the PC208W directory and is not brought over to LoggerNet LoggerNet will start data collection and create new files and data storage based on the scheduled collection settings for the dataloggers After a PC208W DND conversion double check all the settings for all devices to ensure they were converted correctly 5 27 Section 5 Setup 5 28 Section 6 Connect The Connect screen provides a real time connection to a datalogger in the datalogger network Tools are provided for transferring programs to the datalogger manually setting the datalogger s clock viewing and collecting data and communicating with the datalogger in terminal mode 6 1 Connecting to the Datalogger The Connect screen works with and displays data from only one datalogger at a time You must select and connect to the datalogger before the other functions of the Connect screen become available The name of the selected datalogger and the datalogger type appear in the title bar at t
264. ions links The device is selected by choosing from the devices in the Select Device list This utility allows you to type characters to send out over the communications link and will display any response from devices on that link This can also be used for terminal emulation with dataloggers For more information on using this capability see the troubleshooting section 15 4 1 2 Options Menu Configure Buttons This option allows you to choose which buttons will be displayed on the Toolbar If there are applications or screens that you don t use the Toolbar can be simplified by unchecking the buttons you don t want to see Toolbar configuration x Applications Setup Connection Status Edlog CR Basic Editor Split View RTMC Rah in in in tin in Storage Module Stay on Top Clicking this menu option turns the Stay on Top attribute on or off If this option is selected the Toolbar will stay in front of any other windows displayed on the computer This can be a benefit so the Toolbar doesn t get hidden behind other applications 4 3 Section 4 The LoggerNet Toolbar Section 5 Setup Screen A The Setup Screen provides a way to create and maintain a network of dataloggers The datalogger network map shows all of the devices and communications links to reach the datalogger stations The settings for all of the devices are displayed and can be modified on the co
265. is connected to a power source a datalogger or retrieval interface when a datalogger compiles a program containing Instruction 96 or under program control For example if you retrieve data from one datalogger and disconnect the storage module and then connect it to another datalogger a Filemark is placed in the data when the second datalogger is connected This mark follows the data from the first datalogger and precedes the data from the second The Next Filemark option moves the Display Pointer to the next filemark in the data in a similar way to clicking the green arrow in the ADVANCED STATUS screen see Section 13 3 2 The Tools menu provides a way to access the tabs for each module when a mouse or other pointing device is unavailable The Tools menu has six options Setup Programs Data Erase Status and Advanced By selecting one of these options you will be taken to that tab for the module to which you are connected 13 19 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 7 5 Help 13 8 Abort 13 20 The final option on the Menu Bar is Help This provides a pull down menu with five items connected with the SMS on line help system and Windows help in general The options are self explanatory Note that the option About will display the current version number of the software This may be required if you need to contact Campbell Scientific for further information or support for SMS About also indicates i
266. isplay fe ValueF orwarder Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC SetPoint is used like the Numeric component to display the selected data value as a number When linked with an input location or Public variable in run time mode the data value can be set to a new value by double clicking the component and entering a new value in the resulting dialog box Gauge is used to display the selected data value on a circular gauge You can set the maximum and minimum scale along with the maximum and minimum pointer position TableDisplay is used to display the data from a datalogger in a row and column format For array based dataloggers the data for one array ID is displayed For table based dataloggers the data from one table is displayed You can set the time format for the timestamp displayed next to each record ValueForwarder allows you to set a value in one datalogger based on the value in another datalogger The value itself can be sent to the other datalogger or you can set a value to a specified constant This component can be hidden from the run time display if desired NOTE A popup description of each field in a component s Properties window can be displayed by pressing F1 while that field has the focus Use the tab key or click with the mouse to select a field 12 2 3 RTMC Operations All of the RTMC operations are available from the menus at the top of the Development window Many of the options are also ava
267. it is run the resulting data file will look similar to Table 10 3 3 Each line of data represents one test Notice that blanks were inserted if the data set conditional array did not exist 10 3 3 2 Trigger on Stop Condition F Option Output of Time Series The Trigger on Stop Condition or F option changes the function of the Stop Condition when one or more Time Series functions Section 10 3 5 2 are contained in the Select field When a Stop Condition is met the time series data is calculated and written to the output file However instead of stopping at this point processing resumes and time series data is output the next time the Stop Condition is met This continues until the end of file or until the user stops Split manually 10 19 Section 10 Split 10 20 10 3 4 Copy The Trigger on Stop Condition is enabled by clicking Other on the Output Tab and checking the box next to the Trigger on Stop Condition field When the Trigger on Stop Condition is enabled the function affects all files being processed that have a Stop Condition specified If multiple files are being processed but it is desired that the function affect one or more but not all of the files the F option is used in the Stop Condition field of the files that you want processed using the function The syntax for the F option is F e val A typical application for the Trigger on Stop Condition is to reduce days of hourly data into daily summaries A logic
268. king the small box at the top left hand corner of the SMS screen or by clicking this box and choosing Close from the pull down menu or by using the small Exit icon at the top right hand corner of the screen Do not use this option merely to close the pull down menu and return to the SMS screen To return to SMS click the mouse anywhere on the SMS screen outside the pull down menu box 13 7 2 Options Enable Pop Up Hints Save Settings on Exit 13 7 3 Data Insert Filemark Next Filemark 13 7 4 Tools Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS The options menu provides a pull down menu with two options Clicking this option acts as a toggle If Pop Up Hints are already enabled a check appears at the left hand side of the name By clicking the name the Pop Up Hints in the MAIN PROGRAM screen can be disabled An additional click will re enable them If you want to save all your set up information when you leave SMS ensure that Save Settings on Exit is checked Again this option may be enabled disabled by clicking the mouse on the name Selecting Data from the Menu Bar provides a pull down menu with five items The first three Get All Get New and Get One are identical to the similarly worded buttons on the SMS DATA Screen see Section 13 5 The two remaining items on the pull down menu are Filemarks are used to separate data in the storage device A Filemark is automatically placed in the device s memory when it
269. l frequency from another source Testing the radio transmission quality between radios requires the use of a programmable scanner and a set of attenuators or attenuation pads You will need someone at each end of the radio link with a way to talk to each other If the carrier detect light is coming on at the RF base station radio but communication quality is poor or not being set up properly there may be a marginal or low signal power inherent in the RF link In this case it is a good idea to do a signal power check with attenuation pads for each sub link in a complete RF link Every RF link has one or more sub links For example if there is one repeater in an RF link then there is a sub link between the base station and the repeater and a sub link between the repeater and the field station The sub links should be checked in both directions of communication Before proceeding it is a good idea to calculate the theoretical signal power for each of the RF links Appendix C of Campbell Scientific s RF Telemetry manual outlines the calculations For proper radio communications the signal power must be greater than 95 dBm at the standard transmission rate However a signal can be detected on the radios with a power greater than 115 dBm Therefore there is a 20 dBm range in which the radios are not working but may sound proper An attenuation pad inserted into the link increases the power loss of the system If a 20 dB attenuation
270. l try the other baud rates if it cannot connect The CR23X and CR23X TD have an RS232 Power Always On check box This keeps the power to the RS232 port on at all times In some instances this may be desirable but it consumes much more power than when the datalogger turns on the port as needed NOTE Not all dataloggers have a Serial Port Settings option This option refers only to the CR510 CR510 TD CR10X CR10X TD CR23X and CR23X TD 8 4 6 PakBus Settings PakBus dataloggers have various settings that allow them to function properly in a PakBus network These options are normally set in the datalogger s D mode but they can also be set by the DLD file 8 24 NOTE 8 4 6 1 Network Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog PakBus dataloggers are programmed using the CRXX TD templates However the datalogger must have a special PB operating system to take advantage of the PakBus functionality For all of the options if the check box Do Not Change Current Settings is enabled then those settings will not be changed when the program is downloaded to the datalogger The Network option is used to set the PakBus address in the datalogger and to configure the datalogger as a router if required This option is the same as the datalogger s D15 mode Address Enter the PakBus address that should be assigned to the datalogger Maximum number of nodes Enter the total number of dataloggers in the PakBus network M
271. lay a number indicating the starting position in memory of the program CSM1 MCRI and PC Card e Say Used for a program in a specific location SM192 716 and SM4M SM16M e Say Free for an unused location A program location is selected by clicking it to highlight its check box Once you have selected the program location s you can carry out the desired action by clicking one of the three buttons Clicking the Clear button will clear the selected programs from the card or module memory You will be asked to confirm this request before the program s are actually cleared Clicking the Store button will allow you to store a program in the selected program location If a program already exists in this location you will be asked to confirm that it can be overwritten Once a valid location has been selected a Program Selection box appears showing any valid program files dld extension on the current drive and directory You can select any of these or choose any other valid program file by browsing the directory structure Once you have selected the required program it will be written to the storage card or module A Progress Indicator at the bottom right of the screen will confirm that the program is being written to the card or module This is the reverse operation to the Store request Clicking the Read button will allow you to read a program from the selected program location to disk Once a location containing a program h
272. le Based Dataloggers Table B 1 Example of Status Table Entries CR10T PrgmFree Amount of remaining program memory in bytes Storage Number of final storage locations available Tables Number of user created data tables DaysFull Estimated number of days of data the tables using automatic record allocation can hold NOTE this number is only based on tables stored at intervals Automatically allocating an event based table will often result in very small interval tables Number of missed records in all data storage tables PrgmSig Signature of the datalogger program The signature is a unique number derived from the size and format of the datalogger program If this signature changes the program has been altered PromSig Signature of the datalogger PROM As with the PrgmSig if this signature changes the datalogger instruction set has somehow been changed PromID Version number of the datalogger PROM ObjSriNo Revision number of the datalogger PROM ROMVersion Version of the ROM code This value is stored in the ROM and read by the OS at compile time Battery Current value of the battery voltage This measurement is made in the background calibration PanelTemp Current Panel temperature measurement LithiumBattery A Boolean variable signaling True 1 if the lithium battery is OK and False 0 if not The lithium battery is loaded and a comparator checked every 4 seconds to verify that the battery is charged CP
273. le from the input location pick list and can help reduce programming errors because of typos See section 8 2 3 Labels can have up to 9 characters for array based dataloggers and 14 characters for table based dataloggers The first character must be a letter The allowed characters are letters numbers and the underscore character _ The following labels are reserved for expressions and should not be entered by the user CSI_R CSI 2 CSI 3 CSL 95 To enter the Input Location number instead of the label use the mouse or press lt ctrl gt left arrow 8 2 2 Repetitions Many input output and output processing instructions have a repetitions parameter Repetitions REPS allow one programming instruction to measure several identical sensors or to process data from several Input Locations When REPS are greater than 1 the Input Locations are assigned consecutive numbers e g with REPS of 2 and LOC of 5 the Input Locations are 5 and 6 Each rep label is the initial label with a _ and the next consecutive number i e with 3 REPS and a label of data the labels for each REP are data_1 data_2 and data_3 Only the first input location of an instruction is linked to the instruction Reps of input output instructions and output processing instructions are not linked so use care if altering their sequence in the Input Locations Editor As an example in the following section of an Edlog program the TempC and Batter
274. le screens including those that may not be displayed as buttons on the Toolbar The appearance of the Toolbar can be changed from a horizontal layout as shown to a vertical layout This is done by dragging the right side of the Toolbar as far as it will go to the left and then releasing the mouse button To return to the horizontal layout drag the right side of the Toolbar to the right Dragging the bottom of the toolbar up in horizontal view will change to a toolbar with just the buttons and icons with no text The user can choose which buttons to display or hide by going to the Options Modify Buttons menu item All of the functions available under the File Open menu can be shown or hidden on the Toolbar Any functions not shown on the Toolbar can still be accessed through the File menu To keep the Toolbar from being hidden behind other Windows applications under the Options menu you can select Stay On Top If this option has a check 4 1 Section 4 The LoggerNet Toolbar mark beside it it is enabled and the Toolbar will stay in the foreground even though other Windows applications are active To exit LoggerNet and shut down the server either click the X in the upper right hand corner of the Toolbar or under the File menu select Exit 4 1 1 Test Menu 4 1 1 1 Communication Test The Toolbar can also be used to test communication with each datalogger in the communications network to confirm the integrity of the computer
275. le will be processed correctly 10 3 2 Start Condition NOTE A starting point may be specified to begin processing data If the Start Condition field is left blank Split will start processing data at the beginning of the data file The starting point can be any element within the array or a combination of elements within an array The syntax can be expressed as e val where e the position number of the element within the array val the value of that element For example the data in Table 10 3 1 contains seven elements per Output Array representing hourly data Assume that this data file contains one month of hourly data To start processing data at 1500 hours on the first day the Start Condition is expressed as 3 1500 where 3 means the third element within the array and 1500 is the value of that third element The element must match this start value exactly to trigger the start condition NOTE Section 10 Split Table data files contain the time and date as a single quoted string at the beginning of each data record Split handles the dates as long as you include a colon separator as a placeholder for each of the fields in the timestamp 1 Year 1 Day of Year 1 Time of Day 1 Seconds See the examples below 1 60 Day of Year 60 1 2002 1 60 1 1250 Year 2002 Day of Year 60 Time of Day 12 50 1 1445 1 30 Time of Day 14 45 Seconds 30 Logical and and or statements can be used when spe
276. lect the ComPort and click Open Terminal Then connect the Transmit and Receive lines 2 and 3 of the serial port cable using a small screw driver or paper clip Click in the window to get the cursor and type some characters on the computer keyboard If the characters are echoed back to the screen the ComPort is working The characters on the screen can be cleared by clicking Clear Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide Phone Modems Selecting a phone modem and clicking Open Terminal will allow you to send ASCII characters to the phone modem This can also be used to test communications to the phone modem and the initialization strings used to set up and configure it Get the information for the available commands and format from the modem manufacturer An example of how to troubleshoot a datalogger on a phone link might follow this sequence Say that you cannot communicate with a datalogger and you don t hear the phone modem dial the number You could wonder if you are using the correct COM port Disconnect the serial cable from the phone modem select the COM port and click Open Terminal Then shorting pins 2 and 3 at the end of the serial cable type characters and if you ve chosen the correct COM port you should see those characters echoed to the screen Note the RS232 protocol allows any pins on a cable to be shorted without damaging the computer Pins 2 and 3 are the second and third pins from the upper left on the top row when
277. lected by LoggerNet before it can be displayed Numeric Display N1 Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 BattVolt InputLocation_1 4788 00 IntT empC InputLocation_2 True TCT empF InputLocation_3 False Count InputLocation_4 False SineOut InputLocation_5 Delete Add Options Help 6 5 2 1 Add When first opened the Numeric Display is initially blank the fields to be displayed must be selected Press the Add button to bring up the Available Fields dialog box that lists the data fields for the available datalogger tables or final storage arrays Selecting a table name or final storage array ID will bring 6 19 Section 6 Connect 6 20 up a list of data fields in the right hand window Select the fields to add by clicking the data field names Multiple data fields can be selected by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking additional names An entire table or array can be selected by clicking the table name The selected data fields can be added to the display either by clicking the Paste button to enter them on the display starting at the selected cell or dragging the selected fields to the display cells Up to sixty data fields can be displayed simultaneously The Available Fields dialog can be kept in front of other windows by clicking the Stay on Top check box For array based dataloggers that have an associated datalogger program the f
278. lected file The names can be any name conforming to standard Windows convention As the files are collected you will be prompted to enter a valid file name for each individual file 13 15 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 16 13 5 3 Show Card Module Directory 13 5 4 Get All By clicking the Show Card Directory CSM1 MCR1 PC Card or the Show Module Directory SM192 716 or SM4M SM16M buttons a window showing the directory structure appears as shown below Initially the directory is in a concise or folded form showing just the locations of the filemarks Click the Unfold button to expand the directory to show data file locations and other filemarks and pointers Data can be read into a file and or viewed directly from the DIRECTORY screen using the Read File and View File buttons For a card or module with a large number of data files the Show Directory command may take several seconds to complete Directory x LB 21 Data 57 File Mark LB 58 Storage Ref Pointer Unio Fola co Save File The Show Directory command is repeated on the menu bar See the on line help system for further details This option collects all valid data files in the card or module and stores them to the specified directory starting with the file name shown in the File Name box The way that the file is named is controlled from the Auto Name Control selection buttons see above As the files are read to the disk a Progress
279. link is good in this direction If squelch is not broken this sub link has signal power between 95 and 115 dBm which should be corrected Corrections can involve shortening the distance between radios reorienting antennas fixing connectors or cables providing a better power supply or shortening coaxial cable lengths If it did not break squelch with the 20 dBm attenuation pad it is possible to decrease the attenuation to 10 dBm to determine if signal power is between 95 and 105 dBm or between 105 and 115 dBm This will identify if the signal power is close to or far away from 95 dBm If it did break squelch with the 20 dBm attenuation pad then that sub link is good in that direction The next sub link can now be tested Remember to place the attenuation pads at the receiving station only If all of the sub links were good the same sub links can be tested in the opposite direction If reversing directions in a sub link gives bad results while the other direction is good be suspicious of the transmitting radio in the bad direction and the radio s power supply 15 6 Using Data Table Monitor 15 14 CAUTION Data Table Monitor is a utility that was created to retrieve data from the LoggerNet server data cache and display it on the screen It also has the option to export it to a file Once the utility has been started as new records are collected by the server the new records will be displayed and sent to the file
280. lit 10 14 10 3 2 1 Time Synchronization NOTE The time synchronize function is useful when data are missing from files or several files of data need to be merged together The files are synchronized according to time This function synchronizes according to day hrmn hour minute and or seconds The syntax used to identify the time elements for array data is e day e hrmn e seconds Referring to Table 10 3 1 to identify the day of year for an array based data file type 2 189 for hrmn type 3 1200 and seconds are expressed as 4 5 A single colon is assumed to be between day and hrmn e g 2 189 means day 3 1200 means hours and 2 189 3 1200 means day and hour minute When the time synchronize function is used a time interval must be specified in the Copy line of the first data file For example 4 60 in the Copy line will create a synchronized file containing the data from the input files that occurred every 60 minutes If no time interval is specified in the Copy line then the time specified in the Start Condition becomes simply a starting time with no time synchronization The starting time specified must actually be found in the input file before the Start Condition is satisfied e g if the input file starts at 1100 hrs and 1000 hrs is entered for the starting time with no day specified Split will skip over arrays until it reaches 1000 hrs the next day Table based datalogger Because the
281. llSci LoggerNet Directory Working Directory The C CampbellSci LoggerNet working directory includes four subdirectories Data Logs RTMC and SYS The c CampbellSci LoggerNet directory is used for storing user created files data files and status information files from LoggerNet By default all user created datalogger programs and the data files collected with scheduled data collection are stored in the c CampbellSci LoggerNet directory The files collected using the Custom Collect on the Connect Screen are stored by default in the C CampbellSci LoggerNet Data subdirectory to avoid confusion with the main data collection files C 3 Appendix C Software Organization C 4 NOTE The Logs directory contains the LoggerNet operational logs if they are being saved to disk The RTMC directory contains the images sounds and working files for RTMC The Inifiles subdirectory under C CampbellSci LoggerNet SYS contains all configuration files for the Setup Screen Connect Screen Status Monitor and other applications The C CampbellSci LoggerNet SYS bin subdirectory contains configuration files for the devices in your datalogger network CONF and the modem configuration file modem ini This subdirectory has a C CampbellSci LoggerNet SYS bin Data subdirectory that is used to store the Data Cache for the devices in the network Changing or removing any of the files in the C CampbellSci LoggerNet SYS bin directory can cause lo
282. llection and multitasking application programs LoggerNet may be run successfully on Windows 95 98 or ME if the user limits the number of screens open at any one time CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC will either replace or correct any software that does not perform substantially according to the specifications set forth in the instruction manual with a corrected copy of the software or corrective code In the case of significant error in the installation media or documentation CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC will correct errors without charge by providing new media addenda or substitute pages If CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC is unable to replace defective media or documentation or if CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC is unable to provide corrected software or corrected documentation within a reasonable time CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC will either replace the software with a functionally similar program or refund the purchase price paid for the software The above warranties are made for ninety 90 days from the date of original shipment CAMPBELL SCIENTIFIC INC does not warrant that the software will meet licensee s requirements or that the software or documentation are error free or that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted The warranty does not cover any diskette or documentation that has been damaged or abused The software warranty does not cover any software that has been altered or changed in any way by anyone other than CAMPBELL SCIENTIF
283. logarithm base 10 of a number Performs a modulo divide of two numbers Performs a logical negation on a number Performs a logical disjunction on two numbers PWR x y RND SGN x SIN x SINH x SQR x TAN x TANH x x XOR y 12 2 4 4 Order of Precedence Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC Raises constant x to the power of y Generates a random number Used to find the sign value of a number 1 0 or 1 Returns the sine of an angle Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number Returns the square root of a number Returns the tangent of an angle Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number Performs a logical exclusion on two numbers Anything inside parentheses Exponentiation Negation unary Multiplication division Modulo remainder MOD Addition subtraction When consecutive operators have the same priority the expression evaluates from left to right This means that an expression such as a b c is evaluated as a b c 12 2 5 Remote Connection As part of LoggerNetData RTMC has the ability to connect to LoggerNet software running on another computer By default RTMC connects to the computer where it is running x Server IP localhost User Name o Password sd Port Number eza tt Save Login Info D Ok 12 11 Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC NOTE 12 3 Run Time 12 12 To set a connection to LoggerNet on another comp
284. lon with one space on each side For example SPLITR LOGAN R TEST DAT TEST PRN SINKS R TEST1 DAT TEST2 DAT 1 189 executes the LOGAN PAR file on TEST DAT and outputs the results to TEST PRN then executes the SINKS PAR file on TEST1 DAT and outputs the results to TEST2 DAT Execution of SINKS PAR starts when the first element in TEST1 DAT is 189 10 6 3 Using Splitr exe in Batch Files Batch files containing one or more Splitr command lines can be useful for automating data processing Batch files can be executed manually or by setting them up as a Task in the LoggerNet Setup window Batch files process each command in succession without waiting for execution of a command to be completed before proceeding to the next unless they are configured to do so If multiple parameter files are being processed using Splitr in a batch file there are no conflicts because only one copy of Splitr can be active at any one time unless the M switch is used Refer to the information below on this option However if other commands are used along with Splitr such as opening the file in a spreadsheet copying it to an archive directory or appending it to an existing file these commands might be executed before Splitr finishes processing data The Windows 95 NT Start w wait parameter is added to a batch file command line to delay execution of the next command until the first command has finished The syntax for this type of command line is
285. looking at the male end of the cable with the long row of pins on top This is true for either 9 pin or 25 pin cables Once you have established that you have the correct COM port you may hear the modem dialing but the datalogger doesn t connect Perhaps the modem is not dialing correctly or using an appropriate initialization string You can work with the modem by selecting it in Terminal Emulator and clicking Open Terminal LoggerNet will open the COM port and raise DTR to enable the modem You can then type characters to be sent to the modem For example assume you have a Hayes compatible modem and an array based datalogger on a phone link with the phone number 752 7779 You could test the link with the following sequence Type ATH lt Enter gt To hang up the modem You should see an OK on the screen sent by the modem If you do not perhaps there is no modem attached to that COM port or perhaps the modem is not powered on Type AT amp F To put a typical Hayes style modem back to the factory lt Enter gt defaults You should see an OK echoed by the modem If you do not perhaps it s not a Hayes compatible modem For example many U S Robotics modems require AT amp F1 Older 1200 baud modems may require ATZ Type AT amp C1 amp D2 To cause the modem to use hardware flow control and lt Enter gt report the loss of the carrier when the datalogger hangs up its modem You should se
286. ls Array based Datalogger Array based dataloggers save all output in the datalogger s final storage memory When data is directed to final storage a unique array ID number is stored followed by other values as determined by the datalogger program These are called elements Array based dataloggers save all information that is directed to output storage to the same area of datalogger memory as opposed to table based dataloggers that store different output processing to separate tables in datalogger memory Data retrieved by PC software is separated based on the array IDs B Batch Files An ACSII text file that contains one or more DOS commands or executable file commands When the batch file is run the commands in the file are executed sequentially Battery This entry in the status table returns the datalogger battery voltage Baud The rate at which a communication signal travels between two devices Binary File A file based on software defined formatting A binary file can only be interpreted by the software programmed to decode the formatting This format is used for more efficient data storage than is provided by ASCII BMP Block Mode Protocol The communications protocol used by the server to communicate with table based dataloggers and RF modems Broadcast Part of the radio RF technique of polling remote radio modem datalogger sites A single modem sends a message broadcast that all affected remotes hea
287. lts of Expression Evaluation c ccsseseeereee 9 20 9 6 Flags esent a es n e E eats Were ee ts 9 21 9 7 Parameter Types ennai a E n E E EAEE E 9 21 9 7 1 Expressions in Parameters ccccecscesscessceeseesecetecssecseeeeeeseeens 9 22 9 7 2 Arrays of Multipliers and Offsets for Sensor Calibration 9 22 9 8 Program Access to Data Tables 0 cccccsseesseesseeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeceeenseenaes 9 22 BG SPM SES EETA A ree E OA 10 1 10 1 Functional Overview s sessessessseseesessreressesresrssersesseeressesresresreseeseene 10 1 10 2 Gettins Startede en E E E E 10 1 10 3 Split Parameter File Entries ssseeseeseeseesesseeesssrseesressesrssersessesresrese 10 8 10 31 Input Files A E E E tenth oct 10 8 1 0 3 2 Start Conditi M serenate n AR 10 12 10 3 3 Stop C nditlo hrossin ne ena e 10 17 EEE E E E E E AEE 10 20 10 3 5 Time Synchronization cceccceceeseeseeeseeeeceeeeesecsseeneeeeeenes 10 21 O36 SEL e E E EE EE ET T E 10 21 10 3 7 Output Files o ccsaces ence RR 10 38 10 4 Help Option ces c sccc csescesccesceecedeeaccsvs evs at aeegceves oo R RE E EE 10 44 10 5 Editing Commands cccceecceeseeseceeeceeceseceeecseecseeeaeeseeneeneensees 10 44 10 6 Running Split From a Command Line ce eecesesseeseeeteeeeeeeeeees 10 44 10 6 1 Processing Alternate Files ccccceseeseessceseceseceeesseeeeeaes 10 44 10 6 2 Processing Multiple Parameter Files with One Command IN Er a eA
288. m the IPPort Additional time may be needed in instances where the communications link is noisy or network traffic is heavy Section 5 Setup NOTE LoggerNet waits a certain amount of time for a response from each device in a communications path The extra response times defined for the communications link are cumulative Therefore the amount of time spent waiting for a device to respond is the sum of all Extra Response Times defined plus the default response time for each device in the link Add the minimum time necessary since very long response times can delay other scheduled events while waiting for a device that is not responding 5 2 4 PakBusPort A PakBusPort must be added to the network map if you want to add a datalogger capable of PakBus communication CR510 PB CR10X PB CR23X PB or CR200 Series PakBus is a packet based communications protocol developed by CSI for its dataloggers and some communications peripherals PakBus offers a robust efficient means of communication within larger datalogger networks and allows routing of data from one datalogger or other PakBus device to another within the network All PakBus devices within the network are assigned a unique address Transmissions within the network can be broadcast to all devices or to only one device using the unique address Communications Enabled Before communication can take place all devices in the chain must be enabled When this box is selected the PakBus port
289. me display screen is started the display components will be highlighted in reverse video until data is received from LoggerNet If data is not displayed check to see that the data is being collected on a schedule by LoggerNet Once a project file has been created the display screen can be run without starting the development mode window From the Windows Start Menu under Programs LoggerNet click RTMC Run Time In the Run Time window select File Open Project to select the RTMC project screen to run RTMC Run Time will print an image of the display screen by selecting File Print Screen Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC Real time Monitoring and Control Run time C CampbellscrLoggerNetane rs m P4 12 13 Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC 12 14 Section 13 Storage Module Software amp SMS SMS is a software application that provides a simple and efficient way of collecting data from and storing programs to Card Storage Modules CSM1 and MCR1 Storage Modules SM192 SM716 SM4M and SM16M or a PC PCMCIA Card The software communicates with the Storage Modules through an SC532 asynchronous adapter or through a datalogger The software communicates with PC cards using either Campbell Scientific s Card Storage Modules CSM1 or MCR1 or the PC card slots installed in the computer The software is provided with an extensive online help system SMS is used only with array based datalog
290. me so you can view low level messages for more than one root device Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog This section provides information on memory allocation and programming for Campbell Scientific s CR7 CR10 21X CR500 CR510 CR10X CR23X CR510 TD CR10X TD CR23X TD and CRIOT dataloggers See Section 9 for information about the CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 CRBasic program editor 8 1 Overview NOTE Edlog is a tool for creating editing and documenting programs for Campbell Scientific s array based dataloggers CR500 CR510 CR10 CR10X 21X CR23X and CR7 and table based dataloggers CR510 TD CR10T CR10X TD and the CR23X TD It provides a pull down menu from which to select instructions with pick lists and detailed help for completing the instructions options or parameters Edlog checks for errors and potential problems in the program when pre compiling the program Some highlights of Edlog s features are listed below PakBus capable dataloggers CRIOX PB CR510 PB and CR23X PB are programmed using the CRXX TD templates Precompiler Edlog precompiles the program to check for errors and to create the file that is downloaded to the datalogger The precompiler will catch most of the errors The errors that the precompiler misses will be caught by the datalogger when the program is compiled The download file DLD is stripped of comments to make it more compact During the precompile step a Pr
291. meaning of the value that is being stored Click the FSL Edit button on the toolbar or press F9 to bring up the Final Storage Label Editor as shown below Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog gm Final Storage Label Editor wW Edit Help 112 Real Time P77 Average P71 Maximum P73 Minimum P74 61 64 68 73 Year_RTM Lo Day RTM Low Hour_Minute_RTM Low Seconds_RTM Low Batt olt_A YG Low BattVolt Intl empC_AVG Low IntTempC TCTempF_AVG Low TCTempF TCTempF_MAX Low TCTempF TCTempF_Hr_Min_ Low TCTempF TCTempF_Sec_MA Low TCTempF Batt olt_MIN Low BattVolt In this example from an array based datalogger the final storage output data for Array ID 112 is shown Each of the columns indicate the essential characteristics of the data value being stored Array ID or Table Name identifies the set of output data instructions the data is associated with For array based dataloggers the array ID is at the beginning of each output record In table based dataloggers the table name shows the name of the table where the data values will be stored Output Instruction lists the output instruction that was used to store the data value Line Number is the line number in the Edlog program for the output instruction Final Storage Label is the label that is associated with this final storage value Red labels are associated with automatically created data entries such as time stamps and record numbers
292. ment is a graphic display editor that allows the user to easily place graphical components on the display screen and associate them with data values The RTMC Development window as shown below has three sections Project Component List The panel on the left shows the hierarchy of the display components and how they are associated with each other Every component of the display screen is shown in this list and it provides a shortcut to get to any graphical component 12 1 Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC Project Workspace The middle panel is the display screen workspace The graphic components are placed in the workspace as they should appear on the final display Display Components List The panel on the right contains the display screen components that can be placed in the workspace Selecting a component and clicking in the workspace places the component and brings up the Properties window for that component RTMC was designed to be easy and straightforward to use Experiment with different combinations and options to get the display results you are looking for Real time Monitoring and Control Development C Campbellsci LoggerNet20 RIMC DemoR I MULrume _ O x File Edit Project Screen sawer Runtime Help Oa TABS Daten Project Pointer E E Sie CAMPBELL Fa ww Numeric Nani SCIENTIFIC INC ox er H Slider U Graph 5 Label YTAN YU OUTOON Ei ESS RARRASE 2 2
293. mponent 15 5 2 RF Signal Strength Testing NOTE Once you have verified that the right equipment is in place make sure that all of the components have power Then you are ready to proceed with performance testing To test a station s radio cable antenna transmission capabilities a directional wattmeter is needed such as the Bird Electronic Corporation s Model 4304A Wattmeter Proper connectors are also needed to place the wattmeter in series between the radio and antenna cable A voltmeter is required to measure the battery voltage of the datalogger with and without radio transmission If you are using a data radio that does not have a transmit button built in you can easily build a push to transmit button from the documentation of the radio RF modem interface connector There will be one pin that when pulled high or pulled low will initiate radio communication See the radio documentation to identify this pin Connect a momentary pushbutton to either raise or ground that pin Always make sure that the antenna is connected to the radio before attempting to transmit Serious damage to the radio can occur if transmitting without an antenna Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide Place the wattmeter in series between the radio and antenna cable Set the wattmeter to the 15 Watt range or the next highest wattmeter setting and point the directional arrow first toward the antenna cable to measure forward power Wf Initiate radio communic
294. mpted to enter this information However the Automatically log in with this information check box can be selected to skip this window and use the information from the last session To specify a different LoggerNet server select the File Select Server menu option 14 2 2 Setting Up the DataFiler Once connection to the LoggerNet server has been established a list of dataloggers set up in LoggerNet will be displayed in the Stations field left side of the window To retrieve data for a particular station use the mouse pointer to select the datalogger then set up the Collection Options explained below select one or more tables to be collected and press the Start Collection button The retrieved data will be stored to the directory and file name shown in the File Name field The directory or file name can be changed by highlighting the table and pressing the Change File Name button Tip Quickly choose all tables for the highlighted datalogger by selecting the Select All check box 14 2 2 1 Collection Options 14 2 Collect Mode This option is used to specify what data will be retrieved from the LoggerNet data cache and stored on the remote computer by the DataFiler All the Data Retrieves all records from the selected tables Data Since Last Collection Retrieves all uncollected records from the selected tables Newest Number of Records Retrieves a specific number of records from the selected tables by backing up the n
295. mputer hard disk Verify write permissions are set and that there is sufficient space left on the disk During system startup this is a normal message If it occurs at other times contact an application engineer See message 100 Appendix D Log Files Code Message Text 105 BMP packet received Data file output failed Max time on line exceeded Table reset D 16 Message Parameters The packet message type code 0 Packet Delivery Fault Notification 1 Status Warning Fault Notification 2 Network Description Transaction 3 Clock Check Set Transaction 4 Program Down load Transaction 5 Program Up load Transaction 7 Data Advise Command Transaction 8 Data Advise Notification Packet 9 Hole Collection Command Transaction 10 Control Command Set Variable Transaction 11 User I O Transaction Terminal Mode 12 Memory Image Down load Transaction 13 Memory Image Up load Transaction 14 Get Table Definitions Transaction 15 RF Test Transaction 16 Communication Status Notification The amount of time the device was connected in milliseconds The name of the table that was reset The account name of the logged in client Message Meaning User Response to Message The specified BMP1 packet was received over the serial communications link The number indicates the type of message received Check that there is space available on the hard disk and that write permissions
296. munications failed with the datalogger User Response to Message If the table is made smaller the oldest data will be lost If the program did not compile check the error messages Otherwise check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Code Message Text Message Parameters Message Meaning The server is requesting the datalogger program The actual program Program file receive start as BMP1 message type 5 Program file receive status Program file receive complete The datalogger program has been received from the Program file receive failed 58 Collection schedule normal The datalogger failed to send the program or communications with the datalogger failed This is an advisory message that the normal data collection schedule is active A normal data collection has failed and data collection will be attempted at the primary retry interval Collection schedule primary retry The number of primary retries specified has passed and data collection will be attempted at the secondary retry interval The scheduled data collection has been turned off or suspended because communication is disabled or table definitions have changed Collection schedule secondary retry Collection schedule suspended segments will appears A program segment has been received Appendix D Log Files User
297. n messages occur frequently use a network monitor to determine who is trying to connect If security is enabled this message will appear for someone trying to connect with the wrong user name or password A new device was added to the network map A branch of the network map was deleted this may consist of a single device A branch of the network map was moved from one parent device to another not supported in LoggerNet 1 1 A client application successfully attached to the server A client application failed to attach to the server The security configuration utility has attached to the server When the server started up it could not read the security settings file This is a normal message on server startup if security has not been set up If security should be set the file needs to be removed and security re configured Appendix D Log Files Code Message Text Modem default database read failed Modem custom database read failed Clock check started Clock check failed Starting BMP data advise transaction Stopping BMP data advise transaction Message Parameters Clock set Device time before set The device clock has Server time been set Reason code 3 Communication failure 4 Invalid datalogger security clearance 5 Invalid transaction number specified already in use 6 Communications are disabled for this device 7 The transaction was aborted by client re
298. n the files on the datalogger have changed because of files being created by the datalogger or file attributes being changed by the datalogger under program control Retrieve will get the selected file from the datalogger and store it on the computer A Save As dialog box comes up allowing you to specify the directory and file name for the saved file Properties The Mark file as not retrievable option will protect the file so that it cannot be copied from the datalogger to the computer The Load the File as the OS option can be used to send a new operating system to the datalogger Run Options brings up a dialog box that is used to control what program will be run in the datalogger Highlight a file and then select the arrow to the right of the list box to display the Run Attribute options Run Now will stop the current program in the datalogger and load and run the selected program All 6 23 Section 6 Connect data tables in the datalogger will be reset Run Now Without Deleting Tables will also run the selected file but the existing data tables will be preserved Run On Start Up will set a program to be run when the power is cycled on the datalogger Run Now and On Start Up sets the selected program to run immediately and if the datalogger loses power the program will run when the power is restored Change Run Attributes Ed Run Attributes for CPU 100RECOR CR5 What to have the station do Run Now Run Now Wi
299. n Interval See Execution Interval SDI 12 SDI 12 stands for Serial Digital Interface at 1200 baud It is an electrical interface standard and communications protocol that was originally developed by Campbell Scientific and other manufacturers for the U S Geological Survey for hydrologic and environmental sensors SDI 12 was designed to be a simple interface ground 12 volts and signal that improves compatibility between dataloggers and smart microprocessor based sensors Other goals of the SDI 12 standard are e low power consumption for battery powered operation via the datalogger e low system cost e use of multiple sensors on one cable connected to one datalogger e allow up to 200 feet of cable between a sensor and a datalogger Security Code A four digit code entered into the datalogger to prevent unauthorized access to datalogger settings programs and data Server Refers to a software application that accepts connections from client applications and provides data or other information as requested The LoggerNet server manages all the communications and data collection for a network of dataloggers The collected data is made available for client applications Signature Number calculated to verify both sequence and validity of bytes within a packet Single ended Analog Input Some analog sensors have only one signal wire They will also have another wire that can be grounded and that is used as the reference for t
300. n and comments in a DOC file instead of a CSI file These programs can be imported into current versions of Edlog by using this Document DLD feature though any comments will be lost 8 1 5 Display Options 8 1 5 1 Graphical Toolbar Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog A graphical toolbar provides buttons for some of the more frequently used menu items in Edlog The toolbar is made visible by choosing Options Show Toolbar from the Edlog menu Conversely it is removed from the screen by choosing Options Hide Toolbar es Edlog 32 CR10X NONAME1 csi 5al fe ine ea InLoc Pick RSL Fak 4 Label Table 1 Program i 6 8600 Toolbar 1 1 9008 Table 2 Program 42 6 6666 Execution Interval Cseconds gt Internal Temperature P1 7 gt Loc IntTempC Execution Interval seconds gt Table 3 Subroutines Index InLoc Ed InLoc Pick FSL Edit 4 Label aire Open a new file Save the current file to disk and optionally precompile the program Index the parameter that is selected for information on indexing refer to your datalogger operator s manual Invoke the input location editor for a discussion on input locations and the Editor see Section 8 2 Display the input location list allows the user to select and insert an input location automatically into a parameter Invoke the final storage label editor for more information on editing final sto
301. n data are contained in more than one data file The C and F commands alter the meaning of the Stop Condition 10 3 3 1 C Option Formatting Event Tests Containing Conditional Output Arrays The C option is used to combine data from two or more conditional arrays onto one Split output line A conditional array is one that is only output when a defined event occurs Assume that two or more conditional Output Arrays with unique Output Array IDs compose a test period followed by an unconditional Output Array that defines the end of a test The unconditional end of test Output Array is at the end of each test but the conditional Output Arrays may or may not be present The data file is comprised of several of these tests As an example let s look at a vehicle test application The start of the test is when the vehicle is turned on and the end of the test is when the vehicle is turned off The conditional output arrays could be e monitoring the engine temperature and outputting data to a unique array when the temperature exceeds a limit 10 17 Section 10 Split 10 18 e outputting data to a unique array when the brakes are applied e outputting data when engine RPM exceeds a limit The unconditional array data the stop condition would be output to a unique array when the engine is turned off By processing the data with Split using the C option the data collected during each test could be merged on to one line with bla
302. n is met the Copy condition must be satisfied before any data will be processed according to Select line instructions Section 10 3 1 4 If the Copy condition is left blank all arrays are processed between the Start and Stop values Syntax for the Copy condition is similar to the Start and Stop values mentioned above Logical and and or statements see Section 10 3 2 can be used when specifying the Copy condition For example referring to Table 10 3 1 if only those hours during day 189 when the temperature was above 90 and the soil temperature was below 62 is desired or during day 189 when the average wind speed was below 21 while the wind direction was between 255 to 265 is desired the Copy condition would be Section 10 Split 1 189 and4 90 150 and5 0 61 99 or1 189 and6 0 20 99 and7 255 265 Only Output Arrays with hours 1300 and 1500 Table 10 3 1 conform to the above Copy conditions 10 3 5 Time Synchronization 10 3 6 Select 10 3 6 1 Ranges To use the time synchronize function time element s must be specified in the Start Condition Section 10 3 1 1 The user must also specify a time interval in the Copy condition For instance if the original data had 15 minute outputs and you only want hourly outputs then an interval of 60 minutes must be specified following the element number This is entered as assuming hrmn is element number 3 3 60 If time synchronization is specified in the Start Condition S
303. n which time series function is being used of the left over values is printed at the bottom of the report following the Time Series Heading Enable the No Summary check box to omit the summary of the left over values and the Time Series Heading from the report No Date Advance When processing a data file from an array based datalogger if the time stamp uses midnight as 2400 with today s date the date function will convert that time stamp to 0000 hours with tomorrow s date This is because the algorithm used by the date function is based on Windows time format and it does not support a 2400 time stamp For example Year Julian Day Hour Minute Date Function Data Data 2002 151 2200 05 31 02 22 00 1 701 193 6 2002 151 2300 05 31 02 23 00 1 476 31 99 2002 151 2400 06 01 02 00 00 1 123 106 2 At Julian Day 151 May 31 2400 hours the date function produces an output of June 1 00 00 hours The date can be stopped from rolling forward by using the No Date Advance check box The output will then be similar to Year Julian Day Hour Minute Date Function Data Data 2002 151 2200 05 31 02 22 00 1 701 193 6 2002 151 2300 05 31 02 23 00 1 476 31 99 2002 151 2400 05 31 02 00 00 1 123 106 2 Caution should be used when applying the date function and enabling or disabling No Date Advance since it is possible to produce an incorrect date For instance using the above example if you were to enter the following into your select line 3 edate
304. nd run WaAvg x n Returns the unit vector mean wind direction in degrees of element x wind direction in degrees over a full data set or every nth value Example WAvg 6 323 14 mean wind direction for the day WAvg 6 4 333 41 mean wind direction for 4 hours 315 73 mean wind direction for 4 hours 306 mean wind direction for 4 hours 314 92 mean wind direction for 4 hours 341 03 mean wind direction for 4 hours 328 09 mean wind direction for 4 hours 10 3 6 5 Special Functions Details and Examples 10 30 TABLE 10 3 8 Split SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Crif Insert carriage return line feed in Output File Date format S H D Y Convert day of year and time to a timestamp with calendar date and time where format uses Windows conventions to specify output format S seconds H HoursMinutes D Day Y year The output timestamp is quoted text Date can be used to create monthly time series summaries See Section 10 3 5 3 Edate format S H D Y The same as the Date function except that the output text is not quoted EDate can be used to create monthly time series summaries See Section 10 3 5 3 Label Insert Comment in Output file Label is anything within the quote marks Line Number of lines written to Output file smpl pa n Page break such that n is the number of lines per page for the printer or the RPT file PCdate or PCEdate Used in a report header to print the current dat
305. nd the datalogger clocks An automatic scheduled clock check can be set up in the Setup screen Section 5 2 5 5 If a manual clock set does not change the datalogger clock check the allowed deviation specified in the Setup screen for the datalogger s automatic clock check Section 5 2 5 5 If the difference in clocks is less than the specified deviation a manual clock set will not have any effect Setting the clock may affect your data Refer to Section 5 3 for further discussion 6 9 Section 6 Connect 6 4 Program Management 6 10 NOTE The Program section on the Connect screen is used to send or retrieve datalogger programs from dataloggers in the network Edlog Section 8 is used to create programs for the CR7 21X and the CR10 X CR510 and CR23X Series dataloggers CRXX CRXX TD and CRXX PB The CRBasic Editor Section 9 is used to create programs for the CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 Series dataloggers After a program is created in one of the program editors the Connect screen is used to transfer it to the datalogger Programs for the CR7 21X and the CR10 X CR510 and CR23X Series dataloggers must be compiled in the editor to create the dld file that is downloaded to the datalogger The CR200 Series datalogger also requires a precompiled file bin which can be done in the Editor or when the program is sent using LoggerNet see below 6 4 1 Sending a Datalogger Program NOTE To transfer a program
306. ne 780 454 2505 LE12 9GX U K www campbellsci com FAX 780 454 2655 Phone 44 0 1509 601141 FAX 44 0 1509 601091 LoggerNet Table of Contents 1 MU OGUCUION cere deseseyeer Sa easccor ven saeeeccanees aeresee 1 1 1 1 LoggerNet Products icscnocionrennniinronnirinne i i 1 1 Vedic THOS OLN EE E d ck sadiiss da occa A SA T EA 1 1 Tall 2 LOS SerNet Dana iid a a a E 1 2 1 2 LoggerNet Applications seren nann e aa 1 3 1 2 1 Setup Section S rrje irii K iE AERE RREK 1 3 1 2 2 Connect Screen Section 6 sesesseesesessersesseeeessrsressesersreseesesses 1 3 1 2 3 Status Monitor Section 7 cceccesceesceseceseceeeceeecneeeseeeeeeseeeereens 1 3 124 Edlog Section Sjene ask Baka aiken kn Been 1 3 1 2 5 CRBasic Section 9 sicer nenian R 1 4 1 256 Split Section 10 E E E E 1 4 L27 Niew Section s T e aE AR E aE 1 4 1 2 8 Real Time Monitor and Control Section 12 sseeseesesseeseseese 1 4 1 2 9 Storage Module Software Section 13 ceeeeeeseeseeseeeteeeteeees 1 4 1 2 10 DataFiler Section 14 cccceeceesceseceseceseeeseceeeceeeseeeeeeneeeerens 1 5 1 3 Getting Help for LoggerNet Applications c ccccesceeseeseeeteeseeneeenes 1 5 1 4 Windows Conventions 0 cccseccecessceseeeessececeseeeeesecaeesecneveceaeeeceaeeateaes 1 5 2 System Requirements ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 2 1 Hardware and Software eceeccssescesseceeceseeeessecseeseceveecaeeeeeaeeateaes 2 1 2 2 C
307. neseeceseeeeeseceeeceeeeceaeeeeeaeeaees 14 5 LoggerNet Table of Contents 15 Troubleshooting Guide eees 15 1 15 1 LoggerNet Server Problems cccesccssecsseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeenseenees 15 1 15 1 1 Starting LoggerNet and Connecting to the Server 15 1 15 122 Socket Errose e cvs teses loss E iea ac ae eset enolate sgt 15 2 15 1 3 Data Collection Issues cccccesceeseeesecececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeerens 15 4 15 2 Application Screen Problems ccccesecsseesseeseeeeeeeceeseeseeeneeeneeenes 15 4 15 3 General Communication Link Problems ccccecceeseeeeeeteenteeeees 15 5 15 4 Terminal Emulator to Test Communications c ccsceeseeeteeseeees 15 5 15 5 RF Communication Link Issues ccccesessecsseeseeeeeceeeeeeeneenseenaes 15 9 15 5 1 Checking RF Components and Connections eeeeeeeees 15 9 15 5 2 RF Signal Strength Testing 0 cccceeseeceeeeeseeeeeeteenteenees 15 10 15 5 3 Troubleshooting with Attenuation Pads cceseeseeseenes 15 12 15 6 Using Data Table Monitor ccceecececeseceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseenaes 15 14 16 Implementing Advanced Communications ENKS oe ee eee Sa 16 1 16 1 Phome toc RE EEE T EA ET 16 1 ESA OA DE i AEA EEE IATE E EE EAA E E 16 1 16 1 2 Operational Considerations ssssssessesssesessseserseeseesrrsrsesssesees 16 2 16 1 3 Attaching a Datalogger to the RF Base eeeeeeeereeee 16 2 16 2 Phone t
308. network description BMP 1 network description update complete BMP 1 network description update failed Datalogger Severity S for Status W message for Warning F for Fault Message text Records Table name Beginning received record number Ending record number A datalogger Time out period in transaction has milliseconds timed out Terminal emulation transaction started Message Meaning The server has detected a change in the table definitions in the datalogger The network description in the RF base is being updated to reflect changes in collection schedule or stations to collect The RF base has acknowledged the network description update The network description update to the RF base has either timed out or communication has failed This is a message that has been generated by the datalogger or in some cases the RF base on behalf of the datalogger Datalogger records have been received and stored in the data cache The server has waited longer than the allotted time for the expected response to a transaction Terminal emulation message has been sent to the datalogger Appendix D Log Files User Response to Message A change in table definitions indicates that the datalogger program may have changed Before updating table definitions make sure the needed data in the data cache has been saved to a file if desired Check the connections from the PC to the RF base
309. nfiguration tabs The Setup Screen also provides the configuration for tasks that can be associated with data collection 5 1 Setting Up a Datalogger Network The Setup Screen is used to configure your datalogger network define the communications link that exists between the computer and the datalogger and set up the data collection schedule The following are viable datalogger communications methods for the LoggerNet software e Direct Connect Simple serial communications typically on demand and close to the computer or where devices such as an SC32A short haul modems or RF400 point to point spread spectrum radios are used in a configuration that requires no dialing or addressing to appear transparent e Phone Modem Connection from a phone modem at the computer to a datalogger attached to a remote phone modem Cell phone communication is also supported e Radio Frequency RF Connection over RF using antennas for line of sight communications e Multi drop Networked Direct Connect Direct connection over dedicated cables e TCP IP Ethernet or Internet Connection over a computer local area network or over the Internet using TCP IP modems at the datalogger 5 1 Section 5 Setup Clicking the Setup button on the LoggerNet toolbar will bring up the Setup Screen The screen is divided into two parts the device map left side of the screen and the set up tabs right side of the screen
310. nk template similar to the one above is shown This template is used to enter the parameters that will define what data from the input file to include in the output file The parameters entered on this template can be saved as a parameter file PAR and reused for other data On the INPUT FILE tab you only need to specify the input file name copy condition and the data to select Split allows specific start and stop conditions to be specified but if they are left blank the entire file will be read The name of the Input Data File can be typed in or the Browse button can be used to select from available files In this example BirchCreek dat will be selected as the input data file Selecting the data to copy is simplified by the use of the Birch fsl file From the toolbar menu click Labels Use Data Labels From the Data File Labels pop up Select File is used to find Birch fsl When one of the Output Arrays is highlighted the Field Names of the data in that array are displayed Figure 10 2 4 In this example an array based data file is processed and the Use Data Labels feature uses an FSL file When processing a table based datalogger file change the file type to Table based data file to use for labels and select the table based DAT file Split will use the header information from this file for its labels Section 10 Split Data File Labels BIRCH FSL x Output Arrays Field Names 24 Select File 99 Lerate Batt
311. nks inserted if a set of data didn t exist e g if the engine temperature never exceeded the defined limit e An Input File must be set up for each array ID in the test The first Input File is configured on the Input File tab that appears when you open Split Additional Input Files are added by choosing Edit Add Data File from the Split menu The same data file will be used as the Input File for each array e Type in the array ID in the Copy field of the Input File tab for each array The array ID is the first element of a data file so the line should read 1 23 where 723 is the actual array ID you want to process e Inthe Select field type in the number for each element data value you want to be output in the report e Inthe Stop Condition field type in a C followed by the ID of your stop condition array If your end of test array was array ID 200 the Stop Condition field would read C 1 200 This should be typed into the Stop Condition fields of each array including the end of test array Set up the Output File as you would for any Split process If you are including column headings the arrays and elements will appear in the order they are listed on the Input File tabs That is the first column will be Input File number 1 element number 1 the next column is Input File number 1 element number 2 Input File number 2 element number 1 follows in the column immediately after the last element of Input File number 1
312. ns These numbers are loaded by the Factory Calibration and are stored in FLASH CalGain Calibration table Gain values Each integration range combination has a gain associated with it These numbers are updated by the background slow sequence if the running program uses the integration range CalSeOffset Calibration table single ended offset values Each integration range combination has a single ended offset associated with it These numbers are updated by the background slow sequence if the running program uses the integration range CalDiffOffset Calibration table differential offset values Each integration range combination has a differential offset associated with it These numbers are updated by the background slow sequence if the running program uses the integration range CardStatus Contains a string with the most recent card status information CompileResults Contains any error messages that were generated by compilation or during run time B 10 Appendix C Software Organization C 1 LoggerNet Client Architecture The LoggerNet communication server provides the interface to all of the dataloggers and the support for the different communications mediums It runs in the background and provides an attachment for the clients that provide the user interface The server handles all communications with the dataloggers The LoggerNet server handles connections from all the user interface screens simultaneously allow
313. ns between your storage device and the computer This involves selecting the correct communication port and baud rate for the device being used from the Setup screen If you have a computer fitted with a correctly configured card slot and your operating system is Win95 98 ME the PC Card screen will automatically show the available card slots you can use Selecting a COM Port This section is applicable for Campbell Scientific s external Solid State Storage Modules such as the SM192 716 and SM4M 16M For an externally connected storage device you can use one of your computer s Communication COM ports for connecting the storage module to the computer If you are not using COM1 for connection you will need to select the port being used by clicking the appropriate check box in the Port Selection box This will be COM1 or COM2 for most computers but SMS can use COM3 and COM4 if your computer is equipped with these 13 4 NOTE Baud Rate Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS The physical implementation of the COM port is hidden from the software The Windows environment provides a common interface via a COM port driver with which SMS communicates Sometimes however you might have a COM port which shares interrupts with other COM ports This can be checked by examining the Ports Settings Advanced setting in the Windows Control Panel A COM port sharing an interrupt with another device can prevent Windows from performin
314. o _MIN Batt olt_Hr_Min_h Encl_RH_MAX Encl _RH_Hr_Min_ AirTem JM IN AirTemp_Hr_Min_ Done Output Interval 60 000 Min Field Number 14 FIGURE 10 2 4 DATA FILE LABELS Screen Split ersion 2 0 beta 32 bit 5 x File Edit Labels Run Printer Help Io Fe ut Fi Output Arrays Field Names Input Data Fle BattVolt_MIN Browse C Campbellsci Logaert 24 Select File Batt olt_Hr_Min_h Bone 99 pac Encl_RH_MAX Start Condition q Encl RH_Hr_Min_ i i LogrTemp_MAX LogrTemp_Hr_Mi iz Condtion Copy AirTemp_MIN ireo Done AirTemp_Hr_Min_ Select Output Interval 60 000 Min Field Number 14 23456121315 BirchCreek_1 dat 1 List of Arrays described in label file Select to show fieldnames FIGURE 10 2 5 Pasting Values into Split 10 5 Section 10 Split 10 6 In this example we want the hourly data note the Output Interval at the bottom of the Data File Label window so click array 60 To paste the desired values from this array into the Select box select the field names while holding down the lt ctrl gt key All of the values could be selected by clicking the first one and holding the mouse button down and dragging to the end Once the values you want have been selected click Paste Figure 10 2 5 Note that the cursor in the INPUT FILE S screen must be in valid paste area Copy or Select Ifthe cursor is in the File name box or in St
315. o force LoggerNet to terminate a connection if the maximum time limit is exceeded This is used to prevent a phone modem from getting stuck online and incurring extra long distance phone charges or inhibiting scheduled data collection from other stations In phone to RF systems this value should be long enough to allow data collection for the anticipated amount of data If the Max Time Online is reached LoggerNet will force the connection to close even if it is in the middle of collecting data 16 1 3 Attaching a Datalogger to the RF Base Connecting a datalogger at the RF Base in a Phone to RF system requires some additional configuration The operational considerations are the same as for the standard Phone to RF network See section 16 1 2 16 2 Section 16 Implementing Advanced Communications Links 16 1 3 1 Hardware Setup The RF modem in the RF Base has to be configured to work in Synchronous Device Communication SDC mode This is done by changing the 9 DIP switch inside the RF Base modem to a 0 or closed This will allow the datalogger to pass communication to the RF Base NOTE SDC mode cannot be used with 21X or CR7 dataloggers or any of the table based dataloggers The datalogger and the RF base must both be connected to the remote phone modem on the same 9 pin ribbon cable 16 1 3 2 Network Setup in LoggerNet Setting up a datalogger at the RF base in a Phone to RF system requires that the datalogger be connected as a
316. ocation label and TempF is a new location calculated from TempC W Wiring Panel The set of terminals and underlying circuits that enable connections of sensors control and power supply wiring to the datalogger itself Some dataloggers such as the CR23X TD have built in wiring panels Others such as the CR10X TD have removable wiring panels Watchdog An entry in the status table that shows the number of watchdog errors that have occurred The watchdog checks the processor state and resets it if necessary If an error occurs the watchdog error counter is incremented Appendix B Table Based Dataloggers This section describes some of the characteristics and features of the CR10X TD family and CRx000 family of table based dataloggers The dataloggers included in these families are CR510 TD CRIOT CR10X TD CR23X TD CR5000 CR200 and CR9000 B 1 Memory Allocation for Final Storage The datalogger memory includes four important areas the datalogger program storage input storage intermediate storage and final storage When a program is downloaded to the datalogger and compiled datalogger memory is allocated for each of these areas The CR10X family of array based and table based dataloggers are identical in hardware and differ only in the operating system The primary distinction between array based and table based dataloggers is how final storage is allocated and filled CRx000 family of dataloggers are based on CRBasic programs
317. of the stations are Section 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures using scheduled data collection the server will automatically call at the next scheduled collection interval and collect as much of the missing data as the dataloggers have available For any dataloggers not scheduled for data collection you can use the Connect Screen application to get data collection up to date 3 4 5 Directory and File Descriptions The following descriptions for the file names and directories assume the default working directory was selected during the installation If another working directory was selected substitute the directory name and path for c CampbellSci LoggerNet wherever it appears in the description below c CampbellSci LoggerNet The main working directory The datalogger programs created by the user and the collected data files are in this directory Logs The server operational and low level log files RTMC Images A collection of graphics objects to use in creating a real time display RTMC sounds Wave files for use in audible alarms SYS IniFiles Initialization files for client applications SYS bin Application server working directory Logger1 Directory with the last logger program file sent Logger2 Directory with the last logger program file sent Data Directory containing station data cache files 2 Directory containing data cache for station 2 3 Directory containing data cache for station 3 3 5 Section
318. oggerNet will contact the datalogger to get the latest status data for the selected fields Click Refresh Values to have LoggerNet query the datalogger again to get updated values Each datalogger has a slightly different set of values in the status table Information about the meaning of the values in the status table can be found in Section B 3 Section 6 Connect E Status Table values TST Field Name TimeStamp 2 7 2002 6 50 37 PM 119 13 98038 1 OverRuns 0 Storage 28968 Tables 5 DaysFull 0 01289552 PramSig 17285 PromSig 62961 PromlD 6874 ObjSrINo 21 j Befresh Values Help 6 3 Datalogger Clock NOTE Once the connection to the datalogger is established the datalogger clock is checked continuously and displayed along with the computer clock as updates are received The clock update can be paused by clicking the check box next to Pause Clock Update In some situations it is desirable to pause the clock update to minimize data traffic over the communications link You can manually set the clock by clicking the Set Station Clock button LoggerNet attempts to set the datalogger clock as closely as possible to the computer clock A slight difference in the clocks might exist after the clock is set because of the communications time delay Over some communication links it is impossible to match the computer clock exactly LoggerNet uses advanced compensation to get the best possible synchronization between the computer a
319. ogram Trace Information file PTI which provides an estimate of program execution time is also created Section 8 1 1 2 For array based dataloggers the precompiler also creates a Final Storage Label file FSL to supply labels for final storage values to be used by other software applications Context sensitive Help Pressing the right mouse button with the cursor on a parameter will provide a pick list of options or pop up help for that parameter More help is available by pressing lt F1 gt at any time or the Help button in various dialog boxes Help pick lists and edit functions are also available from the menus or toolbar Cut and Paste Several datalogger programs can be opened simultaneously and instructions can be copied from one program into another This simplifies writing different programs for the same sensor set or similar programs for different sites Edlog will also allow you to save sections of code as Library Files which can then be imported into other programs 8 1 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog NOTE Be careful when copying instructions from a program written for one datalogger to a program for a different type of datalogger Instructions may differ between dataloggers Input Location Labels Though the datalogger uses a number to address input locations Edlog allows you to assign labels to these locations for ease of use when programming and later when reviewing the data on line Edlo
320. on 3 Select the Windows Setup tab 4 Select Communications and click the Details button 5 On the Communications options screen click the box by Dial Up Networking Win 98 95 or Phone Dialer NT If already checked click cancel and skip to step 9 6 Click OK on the Communications Options screen and on the Windows Setup screen 7 Provide the Windows installation software as prompted and then follow the directions 8 When you are prompted to reboot the computer choose Yes 2 1 Section 2 System Requirements 2 2 After the computer boots go to the Windows Control Panel and double click the Network icon In the list box on the Configuration tab Win95 98 or Protocols tab NT of the Network window which comes up see if there is an entry TCP IP gt Dial Up Adapter or TCP IP protocol If this entry exists cancel and skip the next steps Click the Add button In the Select Network Component Type window which comes up select Protocol or TCP IP protocol and click the Add or OK button When the Select Network Protocol window comes up select Microsoft under Manufacturers and TCP IP under Network Protocols Click OK Section 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures 3 1 CD ROM Installation The following instructions assume that drive D is a CD ROM drive on the computer from which the software is being installed If the drive letter is different substitute the appropriate drive
321. on press lt F1 gt This opens the help system to a detailed description of the instruction and parameters Edlog provides hints for each parameter at the very bottom of the Edlog screen These hints often display the valid entries for a field NOTE Many instructions are datalogger specific refer to the specific datalogger manual for details on a particular instruction Data Entry Warnings Edlog has a Data Entry Warning function that is accessed from the Options Editor menu item By default the Data Entry Warning is enabled When the Data Entry Warning is active a warning is displayed immediately after an invalid input has been entered for an instruction s parameter The warning lists the valid inputs A valid input must be entered before advancing to the next parameter 8 1 1 5 Program Comments Comments can be entered to document the program for the programmer or future users Comments are ignored by the compiler they can be entered on any blank line or at the right of instruction or parameter text A semicolon is used to mark comments Comments can also be used to temporarily remove instructions from a program for testing purposes In addition to typing a semicolon at the beginning of each line while entering comments there are several ways to comment or uncomment lines instructions or blocks of code e Select a block of text press the right mouse button and select comment or uncomment from the right butt
322. on 5 Setup NOTE NOTE Maximum Time On line only applies to scheduled communications Using the Connect screen to connect to the datalogger will stay connected until terminated by the user Extra Response Time In this field specify the additional time that LoggerNet should delay before breaking the communications link if there is no response from the datalogger Additional time may be needed in instances where the communications link is noisy or network traffic is heavy LoggerNet waits a certain amount of time for a response from each device in a communications path The extra response times defined for the communications link are cumulative Therefore the amount of time spent waiting for a device to respond is the sum of all Extra Response Times defined plus the default response time for each device in the link Add the minimum time necessary since very long response times can delay other scheduled events while waiting for a device that is not responding Beacon Interval Routing devices in a PakBus network are capable of learning about other devices in the network To learn about other devices in the network the router can be configured to send out a beacon and any devices in the PakBus network that can hear the broadcast will respond with an identification message The beacon interval is how often the computer will send out a beacon to the PakBus network If the PakBus Port is Dialed check box is enabled the beacon will no
323. on 80 is used to direct output processing to final storage area 1 final storage area 2 or an input location This instruction is not included in the table based programming instructions Output processing can be redirected to input locations in a table based datalogger using Instruction P84 Table Data see Edlog s help e Instruction 92 If Time Instruction 92 is used to perform one or more actions based on time The interval for table based dataloggers is in seconds only array based dataloggers offer the options of seconds or minutes The instruction for array based dataloggers defaults to minutes so if you are using this instruction it may need to be changed Also check any Instruction 92s for Command Codes that may affect the output flag see discussion above on output flag instructions e Instruction 96 Serial Output Instruction 96 is used to send data in the active Final Storage area to a storage module computer printer or alternate final storage area This instruction is not included in the table based programming instructions e Instruction 98 Send Printer Character Instruction 98 is used to send characters to either an addressed or pin enabled printer This instruction is not included in the table based programming instructions e Conditional Data Output check to make sure that the output data is not being output conditionally Table based dataloggers require that the size of the output record is constant An
324. on a separate computer attached to the same network The LoggerNetData applications take advantage of this remote access capability If Allow Remote Connections is chosen during installation you can run LoggerNet on one computer and use the LoggerNetData applications to display data remotely on a different computer or save a copy of the data on the remote computer If remote connections are denied data access from a remote computer is not possible Though this may be a desirable feature enabling Allow Remote Connections also makes your LoggerNet network configuration vulnerable to changes by other parties on the network LoggerNet comes with a command line utility called CoraScript Appendix F This utility can be used to create a back up script of your network and troubleshoot problems However it is possible that 3 1 Section 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures another user could use CoraScript to make unwanted changes to the datalogger network including changing the data collection schedule or deleting devices entirely We therefore recommend that this feature be disabled unless it is essential that the data be made available to a remote computer running LoggerNetData This option can be enabled disabled only during installation of the software If a change in the setting is desired after installation is complete LoggerNet must be reinstalled 3 3 Upgrade Notes If you are upgrading from an installation of PC208W v
325. on menu e Select File Comment or File Uncomment from the Edlog toolbar e Select a block of text and press lt ctrl gt n to comment text or lt shift gt lt ctrl gt n to uncomment text e Press lt End gt to automatically insert a semi colon to the right of the protected text of an instruction or parameter and type the desired comment Edlog will not allow a portion of an instruction or the table execution intervals to be commented out 8 1 1 6 Expressions Algebraic expressions can be used in a program to easily perform processing on input locations When a datalogger program that contains an expression is compiled the appropriate instructions are automatically incorporated into the DLD file As an example the following expression could be used to convert temperature in degrees Celsius to temperatures in degrees Fahrenheit 8 7 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog TempF TempC 1 8 32 Following are rules for creating expressions e Expressions must be set equal to the label of the Input Location that will store the result The result label must be to the left of the expression e Expressions can have both fixed numbers and Input Location labels Input Locations can only be referenced by their label each number in an expression is assumed to be a constant e Floating point numbers are limited to six digits plus the decimal point and sign e The operator s and or function s used in the expression are
326. onfiguration of TCP IP Services cscccssessseesseesceescesseeseeeseeeeenseenaes 2 1 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures 3 1 3 1 CD ROM Installationen oiii e 3 1 3 2 Allowing Remote Connections ss sssssessssssessseseeseeseesessrsresseserseesrese 3 1 SAER Oota T EO I E E E E T 3 2 3 4 LoggerNet Operations and Backup Procedures ecceesseeseereeeeees 3 2 3 4 1 Backing p Dataene cones EE 3 2 3 4 2 Loss of Computer POWeT essin iiin iik 3 4 3 4 3 Program Crashe Snein as e a neea 3 4 3 4 4 Restoring from Backup sssssssssesseesssseseessrsrrsresseeressesreseeseesessee 3 4 3 4 5 Directory and File Descriptions ss sssesssssesseeessseeesseseeseesersessee 3 5 4 The LoggerNet Toolbar 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 Add The Toolbar sassee kee eviteien he bev teet haiantie net a ae Aas 4 1 AV Test Menu nicioni aino deci ona a eE a meses 4 2 4 1 2 Options Mentsen nrerin n R 4 3 5 Setup SCECN ounces le ee ad aes 5 1 5 1 Setting Up a Datalogger Network 0 cccecceseesseeeceseeeneeeeeeeeeeseenerenrens 5 1 5 1 1 Adding Devices to the Network cccccceecseesceeseeeseeeseeteesseenees 5 2 5 1 2 Applying Changes Undo and Redo ccecceseesseseseeteeeteeeeenees 5 3 5 1 3 Renaming Network Devices ccccecccsseeseerseesceeseeeseeeeenteesaeenees 5 4 LoggerNet Table of Contents 5 2 Device Configuration Settings ccccccceessssceseceseeeeceeeen
327. ontact the datalogger This will run even if the datalogger does not respond or no data is collected e After Some Not All Data Collected The task will run after data collection from the datalogger has started but for some reason did not finish This can be used for detecting problems where data starts to come in and communication fails before all the data is collected e After Any Data Collected The task will run after data is collected from the datalogger whether the data collection finished successfully or not e On Call back The task will run when a datalogger initiated call is received by LoggerNet e After Call back The task will run after LoggerNet has processed the datalogger call back 5 5 3 Scheduled Event Tasks An alternative to event driven tasks scheduled tasks are repeated at a specified interval The Base Date and Time are used to set the initial date and time for the task execution The interval specifies the time between task executions In the example shown the task will start on March 12 2002 and run once an hour at 15 minutes past the hour Scheduled Event 7 Base Date 3 12 2002 z Base Time 12 15 00 AM Event Interval 00 d 01 h00 m00 s 5 5 4 Define What the Task Does The action to be started when the task is triggered is specified in the lower right hand panel of the task screen as shown below The two options are either initiate a call to a datalogger or execute a file Yo
328. option is enabled the program that was active in the CRBasic Editor when it was last closed will be visible when the Editor is reopened If this option is disabled no program will be loaded when the Editor is opened A check mark will appear next to the option in the menu when it is selected Help Information Pressing the Help button at the bottom right of the Parameter dialog box will bring up detailed help topic for the instruction being edited Pressing F1 when your cursor is within a parameter field will bring up help only on that parameter Some fields also have text in the Comments column which provides a short description of the option that has been selected for the parameter 9 2 CRBasic Programming 9 12 CRBasic is a programming language that has some similarities to a structured BASIC There are special instructions for making measurements and for creating tables of output data The results of all measurements are assigned variables given names Mathematical operations are written out much as they would be algebraically This section provides a summary of a program its syntax structure and sequence Refer to the datalogger users manual or the on line help for detailed information on program instructions 9 2 1 Programming Sequence The structure of a datalogger program requires that variables and subroutines be defined before they can be used The best way to do this is to put all the variable declarations and output tabl
329. ored to a data file The default option is to append to the data file so the old data is not lost If the data file is used only for a real time display or such that only the last data collected is needed overwrite will replace the old data with the new collected data If the data is only going to be used within LoggerNet for display on the Connect Screen graph or numeric display or for RTMC you can choose no output file and a limited amount of data will be kept in LoggerNet s internal data cache Output Format Select the format for the output file ASCII Comma separated writes data to the file in ASCII text format one record per line with commas between the data values This file can be opened in LoggerNet View a text editor processed using Split or brought into a spreadsheet application Section 5 Setup ASCII Printable writes data to the file in ASCII text format separated into columns separated by tabs The column number precedes each data value in the record Only 80 characters will be placed on each line columns that don t fit the 80 characters are placed on the next line This file format can be opened in LoggerNet View a text editor or processed using Split See the example data file below 09 269 0 10 1 000 09 279 0 10 988 09 289 0 10 946 09 299 0 10 875 09 309 0 10 777 09 319 0 10 656 01 0109 02 2002 01 0109 02 2002 01 0109 02 2002 01 0109 02 2002 01 0109 02 2002
330. ormation on allowing remote connections Because DataFiler retrieves data from LoggerNet s data cache and not the datalogger directly LoggerNet must first collect the data from the datalogger before it is available for use by the DataFiler Data collection in LoggerNet can be performed manually by a user or automatically by setting up a data collection schedule For information on collecting data from a datalogger refer to Section 6 For a description of LoggerNet s data cache refer to Appendix C 14 2 Using the DataFiler 14 2 1 Connecting to a Computer Running the LoggerNet Server Software When DataFiler is first opened it will prompt you for the Server Name User Name and Password of the LoggerNet server Server Name The name of the computer on which the LoggerNet software is running This must be the valid name of an existing computer or a TCP IP address in the form 44 HH consisting of the IP network number and the host number If the LoggerNet server resides on the same computer as the DataFiler application you can simply type in LocalHost for the server name User Name Your user name on the LoggerNet server Password Your password for the LoggerNet server NOTE The User Name and Password fields are required only if security has been set up on the LoggerNet server to which you are trying to connect 14 1 Section 14 DataFiler Each time you start the DataFiler you will be pro
331. orts and Flags If this box is checked the current state of the ports and flags is collected and stored in LoggerNet s internal data cache This allows functions such as the Numeric Display and view ports and flags to get updated data with scheduled data collection 5 2 5 3 Final Storage Area 1 and 2 Tab Array based dataloggers only Array based dataloggers include the 21X CR500 CR510 CR10 CR10X 21X CR23X and CR7 When the datalogger program stores data in an array based datalogger the data arrays are stored in a final storage area Some dataloggers such as the CR10X have two final storage areas while others such as the 21X have only one This tab is used to define the output file name and location the data file format and other output options for the data stored in the final storage area Enabled for Collection The specified final storage area will be included in the collected data if this box is checked Output File Name This is the name and directory path for the output file where the final storage data will be saved after being collected from the datalogger Use Default File Name Checking this box will set the collected data file name to the default value which consists of the name of the station and number of the final storage area File Output Option This option allows you to choose whether new data collected from the station is appended to the data file overwrites the old data in the data file or is not st
332. other function Setting up a clock check may not be desirable It is possible to end up with missing data or duplicate data if the datalogger s clock is set forward or backward enough to skip or duplicate a data storage event Special consideration should be given if the PC clock automatically adjusts for Daylight Savings Time Refer to Section 5 3 for additional information on setting and checking the clock Time Zone Offset A value can be entered into this field to set an offset for the datalogger s clock from the server s clock A positive value sets the datalogger s clock ahead of the PC s clock a negative value sets the datalogger s clock behind the PC s clock This may be useful if the server and the datalogger are in different time zones Initial Date The initial date field is used to define the date on which the first clock check will occur If the date entered in this field has already passed the datalogger s clock will be checked at the next scheduled data collection Initial Time This field is used to define the time at which the first clock check will occur As with the Initial Date field if the time has already passed the clock will be checked at the next scheduled data collection Interval The interval at which a clock check should be performed is specified in the Interval field If this interval is set at 1 day the datalogger s clock will be checked daily based on the initial date and time Allowed Clock
333. other stations in the network Clicking the button brings up a window that lists all of the dataloggers in the network You can select one or more dataloggers and then press OK to use the entered schedule To select more than one datalogger hold down the Ctrl key while clicking the dataloggers to select Base Date The base date field is used to define the first date for scheduled data retrieval If the date entered in this field has already passed a data collection attempt will be made when the schedule is enabled and applied Base Time This field is used to define the first time for scheduled data retrieval As with the Base Date field if the time has already passed a data collection attempt will be made when the schedule is enabled and applied This setting is also used with the Collection Interval to determine the time data collection will be performed Entering a zero for any of the intervals below will cause LoggerNet to try and collect as fast as possible Collection Interval This is the interval at which the datalogger will be checked for new data If this interval is set at 1 hour new data will be collected from the datalogger every hour Example If the Base Date and Time are 1 1 99 12 15 p m with an interval of one hour data collection attempts will be made at 15 minutes past the hour each hour Primary Retry Interval If a data collection attempt is made but fails you can specify an interval on which another att
334. oting an object in the datalogger network The information in this log conveys the state of an object at a given time When 7 9 Section 7 Status Monitor saved to disk the file name for the log will be state log where denotes the active log and statel log state2 log etc denote historical logs 7 4 Monitoring Low Level I O 7 10 A low level log is available for each root level device used for LoggerNet communications The low level log shows all of the low level transactions being passed between the server and the devices in the datalogger network over a communications port As with the operational logs this log s initial settings are specified using the Edit Log Setting on the Status Monitor screen The low level log is displayed by highlighting the root level device in the device map and clicking the View I O button or from the menu selecting Options View I O The names for the files that are saved start with io and include the name of the device For example io SerialPort_1 log A separate log file is kept for each root device The active log is identified with the Once the maximum size has been reached the file is saved and the is replaced by a sequential number Each line in the log includes a time stamp An R indicates information that has been received from a device in the network a T indicates information that is being transmitted to a device Multiple low level log windows can be displayed at the same ti
335. ovides a further pull down menu The underscored character in the name is the hot key for keyboard access The File pull down menu gives three additional options Clicking Terminal on the pull down menu produces a TERMINAL EMULATOR screen It allows you to communicate directly with the Storage Module and is provided so that you can issue storage module telecommunication commands manually When the TERMINAL EMULATOR screen is opened it automatically establishes a connection to the storage module The storage module prompt should be displayed while the connection is active Keyboard entries are transmitted from the COM port to the storage module and storage module responses are displayed on the computer screen Pressing lt Esc gt exits this mode and returns you to the main SMS screen This option is seldom used because all normal operations can be accomplished easily by using other sections of the software You are unlikely to need Terminal Mode unless you are trying to diagnose problems with a corrupted module Full details of direct module communication commands are given in Campbell Scientific s Storage Module Instruction Manual Clicking Show Directory produces exactly the same result as clicking the Show Card Module Directory button see Section 13 5 3 Clicking Exit on the Menu Bar will close all communications completely exit the program and return you to LoggerNet Alternatively you can exit the system by double clic
336. oviding quick access to many of the functions available in the Status Monitor Below the display area is an indication of the disk space available on the computer and check boxes for Show Stations Only and Pause Schedule The current computer time is displayed in the lower right hand corner The Status Monitor functions can also be accessed through the menus at the top of the screen 7 1 Section 7 Status Monitor 7 2 Status Monitor Functions The Status Monitor includes a number of functions that provide control over the LoggerNet data collection process configure the display appearance or bring up other screens such as communication log monitors or task status Most of these functions can be accessed in more than one way Each of the access methods is described for the functions 7 2 1 Select Columns The Status Monitor can be customized to display only those columns containing statistics of interest To add columns to the Status Monitor window click Edit Select Columns The Select Statistics window appears Right clicking in the middle of the Status Monitor window will also bring up the Select Statistics window Select Statistics x Available Statistics Selected Statistics Line State Comm Enabled Comm Status F51 Collected FS1 to Collect F52 Collected FS2 to Collect Last Clk Chk Last Clk Diff Last Clk Set Last Data Collection Logger Ver Mem Code Polling Active Prog Overrun z T
337. p 7 1 Main Screen The main screen displays the network map showing the devices in the network and the statistics associated with each device The network map is in the leftmost column The name of each device is displayed next to a status icon that indicates the current communication state for that device Status Monitor Ioj x File Edit Options Help S CG D 3 Toggle On Off Reset Device Collect Now Stop Collection Server Logs View 0 Task Status Coll State Last Collect Attempt Next Data Collection Vals Last Coll D ComPort_1 transpar 0 D PakBusPort on line 0 offline 0 schedule off 05 05 03 11 37 49AM 4683 D ComPort_2 off line 0 E CR5000 off line 0 schedule off 05 05 03 11 40 47 4M 10010 Disk Space 4914319360 bytes available M Show Stations Only f Pause Schedule 11 43 19 AM The status icon HEEB is displayed to the left of the device name The color and letter displayed are a way to quickly verify the LoggerNet communication server s connection with the device A device has one of four states Normal green N Marginal blue M Critical red C or Unknown gray U The status icon changes to reflect the device s current status The display defaults with the most commonly monitored statistics for each device and can be customized by the user For a description of the statistics and their meaning see Section 7 2 1 Above the display area is a row of buttons pr
338. pad or two 10dB pads in series are inserted into the link and subsequently the radio will not detect the signal the signal power is between 95 and 115 dBm which is below the power limit for good data transmission Similarly if a 10 dBm attenuation pad is inserted in the link and the radio subsequently will not detect the signal the actual signal power is between 105 and 115 dBm In this case the signal power is far below the power limit Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide Radio Programmable Scanner Attenuation Pads NOTE 10 20 dB To test the power being received by a radio over an RF link disconnect the radio from the antenna and insert the programmable scanner as shown in the figure above Program the scanner to the radio frequency and adjust the squelch control until ambient RF noise is just cut out This level will normally be around 110 to 115 dBm The scanner is now ready to conduct the test If you are using a data radio that does not have a transmit button built in you can easily build a push to transmit button from the documentation of the radio RF modem interface connector There will be one pin that when pulled high or pulled low will initiate radio communication See the radio documentation to identify this pin Connect
339. pecified as shown in the examples below 2 0 3 60 5 tells Split to start at a timestamp in the data that is between 55 and 65 minutes prior to the current PC time the closest 5 minute interval of the current day that is less than the PC time minus 60 minutes If you are processing data stored at the top of the hour and the PC time is 1404 Split calculates 1304 and looks for hour 1300 to start reading 2 3 3 120 60 tells Split to find the closest 60 minute interval that is less than the PC time minus 3 days and 2 hours If the PC time is the day of year 159 hour 0017 Split will start reading on data output at 2200 hours on day 155 10 15 Section 10 Split 10 16 CAUTION NOTE 2 3 3 120 4 20 5 tells Split to find the closest 5 second interval that is less than the PC time minus 3 days 2 hours and 20 seconds If the PC time is 27 seconds after noon on day 30 Split will begin reading on data output at 1000 hours and 05 seconds on day 27 Split can also begin processing a file on a particular month and day Use the syntax E Month Day where E is the element that contains the Julian Day and Month and Day are either constants or a value related to PC time For example 2 1 1 tells Split to begin processing on the first day of the previous month 2 0 15 tells Split to begin processing on the fifteenth day of the current month 2 5 1 tells Split to begin processing on May 1 This function can
340. plit from a data set that contains 15 minute hourly and daily data The data was collected from BirchCreek a CR10X datalogger The CR10X was loaded with a program created by Edlog named Birch dld The 15 minute data array 99 the hourly data array 60 and the daily data array 24 are intermixed in the data file Figure 10 2 1 fe Campbell Scientific iew32 Data Panel C Campbellsci LoggerNet20 BirchCreek dat File view Help AAA r Aars gt meb KE RE 99 Year_RT Day RTM Hour_Mi BattVol Batt ol BattVol Encl RH Encl FH LogrTem LogrTe a 99 2002 35 2130 14 23 14 00 2118 22 07 2128 15 45 a 99 2002 35 2145 14 24 14 03 2133 22 31 2143 15 92 60 2002 35 2200 14 19 13 96 2113 22 44 2155 15 43 99 2002 35 2200 14 19 14 01 2158 22 44 2155 16 69 99 2002 35 2215 14 23 14 01 2200 22 38 2214 16 93 99 2002 35 2230 14 25 14 04 2218 22 48 2229 16 96 99 2002 35 2245 14 26 14 05 2233 22 58 2242 17 36 60 2002 35 2300 14 26 14 01 2200 22 62 2252 16 93 99 2002 35 2300 14 26 14 05 2256 22 62 2252 17 69 99 2002 35 2315 14 24 14 05 2300 22 55 2300 17 42 99 2002 35 2330 14 18 14 01 2329 22 51 2329 17 31 99 2002 35 2345 14 24 14 00 2336 PAA 2331 17 14 60 2002 35 2400 14 26 14 00 2336 22 55 2300 17 14 24 2002 35 2400 14 26 13 70 1244 23 67 730 4 479 99 2002 35 2400 14 26 14 05 2348 22 51 2355 17 20 99 2002 36 15 14 24 14 05 13 22 55 12 17 50 99 2002 36 30 14 26 14 05 18 22 65 29 17 56 H F
341. plit looks for the interval in a time element in the Copy condition Only one time interval is specified This interval is the unit of time to synchronize each file The interval can be given tolerance limits by following the interval with a comma and the tolerance For example if 3 is the hrmn element and the time interval is 60 minutes 2 minutes the syntax is 3 60 2 Table based data files need to use the same time format as described in Section 10 3 1 You can specify the interval for time synchronization on table files as 1 60 which will give you an output interval of 60 minutes If the time synchronize function is enabled and data are missing at one or more of the time intervals specified then a blank or the comment entered in the Replace bad data with field is output to the Output File See Table 10 3 5 The Select line specifies which elements of an Output Array are selected for processing and or output to the specified Output File The Select line becomes operable only after the Start Condition and Copy condition are met and before the Stop Condition is satisfied If the Select line is left blank all elements in output arrays meeting the Start Condition and Copy conditions are output to the Output File Up to 254 characters can be entered on one Select line If this is a limitation open the Input Data file twice use the EDIT ADD DATA FILE menu and use the Select line in the second Input File template to define the
342. ption may cause you to unintentionally insert an instruction in the middle of another instruction On Inserting When Edit Parameters is selected the Edit Parameters dialog box will appear when an instruction is added to the program When it is not selected the instruction will be inserted directly using the default parameters Edit Instruction Categories allows the user to create custom categories Note The default categories cannot be edited or deleted 9 9 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 10 Edit Categories Xx Add New Category User Defined Categories Delete Category Cancel Help di In the Edit Categories dialog shown above a new category MostUsed has been added Clicking the Edit Category button will bring up the Select Instructions dialog that is shown below This will allow the user to display a filtered instruction list containing only those instructions most often used The instructions to be displayed are selected in the Select Instruction screen shown below Select the check box next to the instructions you want in the user category from each list of instruction types Press OK to save the list Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor Select Instructions E MostUsed Category Name Data Tables Declarations Processing Math Operators Output Measurements Control Program Control
343. puter Extra Response Time LoggerNet is preconfigured to allow time for responses based on type of device and baud rates In this field specify only the additional time that LoggerNet should delay before terminating the communications link if there is no response from the serial port Additional time may be needed in instances where the communications link is noisy or network traffic is heavy If extra response time is needed it is typically set to 1 or 2 seconds LoggerNet waits a certain amount of time for a response from each device in a communications path The extra response times defined for the communications link are cumulative Therefore the amount of time spent waiting for a device to respond is the sum of all Extra Response Times defined plus the default response time for each device in the link Add only the minimum time necessary since very long response times can delay other scheduled events while waiting for a device that is not responding 5 2 2 IPPort Internet Protocol Serial Port NOTE Like the standard serial port configuration for the IPPort has only the Hardware tab Following is an explanation of each of the fields on this form Communications Enabled Before communication can take place all devices in the chain must be enabled When this box is selected the Internet protocol serial port is enabled for communication Call back Enabled Enabling call back tells LoggerNet to watch for a call back from the
344. quest 8 The device is busy with another transaction Clock checked Datalogger time Message Meaning When the server started up it could not read the default modem file wmodem ini When the server started up it could not read the user customized modem settings file wmodem cust A clock check has been initiated This clock check is not sent out to the station until the transaction is sent The datalogger clock has been checked The clock check set failed for the reason specified in the reason code A start data advise operation has been initiated Data advise is not in place until the datalogger responds A stop data advise operation has been initiated User Response to Message This file should exist in the working directory on the server computer c campbellsci loggernet sys bin May indicate a permissions or configuration problem on the computer If the user has not set up custom modem configurations this file will not exist Check the connections of the communication path to the datalogger make sure the datalogger is connected and has power check the security setting in the datalogger and in Setup check that communications are enabled in Setup for all the devices in the path Message Text BMP data advise transaction started BMP data advise transaction stopped BMP data advise transaction failed Hole detected Hole collected Hole lost Hole collect st
345. quotes Format is a string which identifies how the date should be output The format string is similar to the date format used by Windows See the online help in Split to get a complete list of the format parameters S is the element number that contains seconds H is the element number that contains hours minutes D is the element number that contains day and Y is the element number that contains the year A constant can be used in place of any of the element numbers the constant must be a valid value for the type of date NOTE Section 10 Split field and include a decimal point e g 2000 0 for the year If only three elements are specified these will be assumed to be hour minute day and year When using the Date function for a table based datalogger e g a time stamp in the format 2002 02 03 21 16 00 if the time stamp is the first element in the array a is used for all of the time stamp elements S H D Y If serial is entered for the format string a serial date will be output In older versions of Split the date and edate functions were limited to converting the Julian day to a MM DD format with a syntax of date doy y where doy the element number for the day of the year y the element number for the year This older format is still supported Split will mark the date as Bad Data if the time and date resulting from the conversion will not fit in the specified column width The on screen displa
346. r source has dropped below the minimum power requirement The counter s maximum limit is 99 it can be reset in the datalogger s B mode e Memory Code Mem Code Array based dataloggers only This number is an indication of the amount of memory available in the datalogger The amount of memory represented depends on the datalogger See the datalogger operator s manual for more information e Next Data Collection Next Data Coll The date and time of the next scheduled data collection for the device e Polling Active True indicates that LoggerNet is currently receiving data for this device e Program Overrun Prog Overrun Array based dataloggers only This is the number of table overruns recorded for the running datalogger program This is the same number available from B mode with keyboard displays or through the terminal mode e Total Attempts The total number of communication attempts with the device since LoggerNet was started or retries were reset e Total Failures The total number of communication attempts with the device that have failed since LoggerNet was started or retries were reset e Total Retries The total number of communication attempts with a device after the original attempt failed since LoggerNet was started or retries were reset e Values In Last Collect Vals Last Collect The number of values that were collected during the last data collection attempt Used in combination with the Value
347. r Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 5 Logical Expression Evaluation 9 20 9 5 1 What is True Several different words get used to describe a condition or the result of a test The expression X gt 5 is either true or false However when describing the state of a port or flag on or off or high or low is more intuitive In CRBasic there are a number of conditional tests or instruction parameters the result of which may be described with one of the words in Table 9 5 1 The datalogger evaluates the test or parameter as a number 0 is false not equal to 0 is true TABLE 9 5 1 Synonyms for True and False Predefined Constant True 1 False 0 Synonym Low Synonym On Off Synonym Yes No Synonym Trigger Do Not Trigger Number 0 0 Digital port 5 Volts 0 Volts 9 5 2 Expression Evaluation Conditional tests require the datalogger to evaluate an expression and take one path if the expression is true and another if the expression is false For example If X gt 5 then Y 0 will set the variable Y to 0 if X is greater than or equal to 5 The datalogger will also evaluate multiple expressions linked with and or or For example If X gt 5 and Z 2 then Y 0 will set Y 0 only if both X gt 5 and Z 2 are true If X gt 5 or Z 2 then Y 0 will set Y 0 if either X gt 5 or Z 2 is true see And and Or in the help A condition can include multiple and and or links 9 5 3 Numeric Results of Expression Evaluation The datalogger
348. r and respond to A 1 Appendix A Glossary of Terms A 2 C Call back When a datalogger is programmed for Call back it will automatically call the host computer when a specified condition is met The computer must be set up to look for such an incoming call Call back ID Number A three digit number that is used to identify what datalogger has called the host computer Not available for Table based dataloggers Cancel Choosing Cancel from a dialog box will ignore any changes made and close the box Carrier An electrical signal used to convey data or other information For example radio and phone modems use carrier signals Phone modems attempt to detect carrier when the call is placed The red LED on the RF9ST lights when the modem detects a carrier Child Node See Node A node that is accessed through another device parent node For example a remote radio RF site is accessed through the base RF232T All nodes are child nodes of the PC Client a software application designed to connect to a server Usually provides some type of user interface or data acquisition Coaxial cable Special type of cable with two conductors center conductor and outer shield conductor Classified by size impedance and loss characteristics Used to connect MD9 modems and to connect radios to antennas Collection see Data Collection COM Port A computer s serial communications port Cables and other interface dev
349. r the application did not maintain the connection to the server Try restarting LoggerNet This message can also be seen in connection with the NL100 LAN interface This is normally associated with the NL100 and occurs because the last connection did not have enough time to close before a new connection is requested Slow down the low level polling delay interval This occurs with remote connections to a LoggerNet server running on another computer The requested host name can t be found 15 3 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide 15 1 3 Data Collection Issues Problem Scheduled data collection is enabled but no data is being saved in the data files or data is not updating on numeric or graphical display Remedy 1 Make sure that communications are enabled for the datalogger and all the devices in the communications link Remedy 2 For table based dataloggers make sure tables are included for collection and the table definitions are current For array based dataloggers make sure the correct final storage areas are included for collection Remedy 3 Check communication state on Status Monitor An indication of Primary or Secondary retry indicates that LoggerNet is waiting for the next collect time Ifthe station is waiting in Secondary Retry mode open the Connect Screen and click the Collect Now button This will force collection from the datalogger and will return the datalogger to the normal collection state Invalid Table D
350. r while holding the Ctrl key and dragging them to a new position A group of components can also be selected by dragging a box around them fg StatusB ar Status Bar is used for displays such as a thermometer where the height of the colored bar is based on the data value You can set high and low values bar color and placement on a background graphic 12 3 Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC awe Numeric D Alarm H Slider fso Label gt Toggle V Graph a ComCheck OME Time 12 4 Numeric displays the selected data value as a numeric value You can set the font size and type along with the number of decimal points and a units label Alarm is used to set up a display component that changes appearance when an alarm condition occurs You can set the normal and alarm graphics the alarm set point and a sound file to play when the alarm occurs In run time mode right clicking the component with your mouse and selecting Acknowledge Alarm will disable an audible alarm Slider is used to display a value as a point on a scale It can also be used to set the value of an input location or Public variable You can set the color background graphic and the upper and lower limits Label is text that can be used to put titles or labels on the graphic components Toggle is used to display the value of flags ports or other boolean data that can take one of two values In run time mode it can be used to set
351. rage labels see Section 8 3 Assign a parameter a star 4 value for information on star 4 values refer to your datalogger operator s manual Open the on line help system 8 15 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog 8 1 5 2 Renumbering the Instructions When Automatic Renumbering is enabled the instructions are automatically renumbered whenever instructions are inserted or deleted By default Automatic Renumbering is enabled Automatic renumbering can be turned off if you have a very large program and auto renumbering is slowing down editing 8 1 5 3 Compress VIEW 8 1 5 4 Indention When Display Compress View is selected only the first line of each instruction is displayed The compressed view makes it easier to see the program structure and to move around in the program Instructions cannot be edited in the compress view mode Use Display Uncompress to switch back to the full view or use the lt F7 gt function key to toggle between the compressed and full views Indention is typically used with If Then Else sequences and loops to provide a visual key to program flow Indention is a visual aid it has no meaning to the datalogger If the programmer chooses to use indention it can be done automatically or manually The settings for indention are found under Options Editor Turn on Automatic Indention by checking the box next to it The distance for each indention in spaces is set on the same dialog box
352. ram instructions that deal with measuring sensors controlling outputs or are time sensitive are placed in the measurement task The instructions that deal with data processing including calculations data storage averaging minimum and maximum tracking and data I O operations are placed in the processing task The measurement task is executed at the precise specified scan rate and stores the raw data into a memory buffer As soon as the measurement task has completed filling the buffer for the current scan the processing task starts the data processing on the buffered data There are at least two memory buffers allowing the measurement task to fill one buffer while the processing task is working with the data in the other The data processing task stores data as records in final storage data tables LoggerNet can collect the records from these data tables either manually or with scheduled data collection The datalogger program can also make some or all of the variables used for measurement storage or calculations available to LoggerNet These variables are found in the Public table which is similar to the Input Location table in CR10X or CR10X TD type dataloggers Final storage tables are made up of records and fields Each row in a table represents a record and each column represents a field The number of fields in a record is determined by the number and configuration of output processing instructions that are included as part of the Da
353. raphed or displayed in comma separated tabular or hexadecimal format However since View is primarily a file viewing utility a file cannot be edited or saved using this program 11 2 Opening a File View provides two ways to open a file The one you use depends on the type of file Use File Open Zl to open a data file and File Open as Text Ei to open other types of files Files with a particular extension can be configured in Windows to be opened by View automatically when double clicked in Windows Explorer Refer to Section 11 6 2 Assigning Data Files to View for more information 11 2 1 Opening a Data File NOTE To open a data file click the File Open E icon or select File Open from the menu Any data file type stored by LoggerNet can be viewed comma separated printable ASCH binary or Table Oriented ASCII TOA The default file extension is DAT but PRN and CSV files can also be opened in this mode Opening files of types other than these may cause unexpected results in View View will try to assign a time date stamp automatically when opening a data file Therefore it may take some time to completely open a large file When an array based data file is opened in this mode View will automatically associate an FSL file with a matching name if one exists in the active directory see Final Storage Label below If a matching FSL file does not exist a box will appear asking whether or not you want to select one When an
354. rator 4 An expression with an operator does not have either a number or label before the 5 There is nothing between a pair of parentheses e g the expression contains this 6 A number is immediately followed by a label or function without an operator e g an expression containing 8label gets this error message Floating Point Numbers Limited to 5 Digits All fixed numbers are limited to five digits not including negative signs and decimal points Function Expected Letters that are immediately followed by parentheses are assumed to be a function If the letters are not on the function list see section 2 3 3 2 this error message occurs 8 11 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog 8 12 New Line Expected Indicates one of the following situations 1 An expression contains more than one equal sign 2 There is no operator between two sets of parentheses For Example This error message is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions zee label1 label2 ex 5 ARCTAN data eee em see 2 These are correct ways of entering the above expressions zee label1 label2 ex 5 ARCTAN data eee em see 2 3 There is no operator between a set of parentheses and a number For Example This error message is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions tee 5 2 mu nu 103 bee 10 52 ef 2 sigma 17 RCP alpha These are correct way
355. re not met A reading will not be included in the average if the disable variable is not equal to 0 the example has 0 entered for the disable variable so all readings are included in the average TABLE 9 3 1 Formats for Output Data Code Data Format Size Range Resolution FP2 Campbell Scientific floating point 2 bytes 7999 13 bits about 4 digits IEEE4 IEEE four byte floating point 4 bytes 1 8 E 38 to 1 7 E 38 24 bits about 7 digits LONG 4 byte Signed Integer 4 bytes 2 147 483 648 to 1 bit 1 2 147 483 647 9 3 2 The Scan Measurement Timing and Processing Once the measurements and calculations have been listed and the output tables defined the program itself may be relatively short The executable program begins with BeginProg and ends with EndProg The measurements processing and calls to output tables bracketed by the Scan and NextScan instructions determine the sequence and timing of the datalogging 9 18 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor BeginProg Scan 1 MSEC 3 0 PanelTemp RefTemp 250 TCDiff TCQ 6 mV50 4 1 TypeT RefTemp RevDiff Del Integ Mult Offset CallTable Temp NextScan EndProg The Scan instruction determines how frequently the measurements within the scan are made Scan Interval Units BufferOption Count Scan 1 MSEC 3 0 The Scan instruction has four parameters The Interval is the time between scans Units are the time units for the interval The BufferSize
356. re the files are where you want them and in the right format For table based dataloggers if no table names appear on the Data Files Tab click the Get Table Definitions button The data collection schedule should be set up next Set the initial date and time to when you would like the first data collection attempt to occur and set the interval at which subsequent data collection attempts should occur Make sure that communications are enabled for all devices in the communications path and that scheduled collection is enabled If the initial date and time is set to a time that has already passed data collection will normally begin immediately The Status Monitor screen Section 7 can be used to ensure that data collection is occurring on the defined schedule If data is not being collected check the following e The Scheduled Collection Enabled box on the Schedule tab for the datalogger must be selected This turns the schedule on You can temporarily disable data collection by clearing this check box and applying the change e The tables or final storage areas from which you desire data should be enabled for collection in the Data Files or Final Storage Area tab of the Setup Screen e All devices in the communications path to the datalogger must have the Communications Enabled check box on the Hardware tab enabled e Unsuccessful attempts to communicate with the datalogger may exhaust the number of Primary Retries specified so th
357. received from the datalogger 6 11 Section 6 Connect NOTE NOTE Input locations ports and flags for array based and CRXX TD PB type dataloggers and public variables for the CR5000 CR9000 CR200 are automatically retrieved from the datalogger when selected for display These do not have to be added to scheduled data collection to be viewed Updates to the displays can be suspended by clicking the Pause Displays check box This will stop the updates to all displays even though new data may be coming in to LoggerNet If clock updates and display updates are paused while connected to a datalogger the connection may time out and terminate the connection There are three Numeric Display screens and three Graphical Display screens Each screen is launched as a separate window that can be moved or resized as needed The display screens are not minimized if the Connect screen is minimized but they can be minimized independently 6 5 1 Graphical Display Screens 6 12 NOTE Data values collected from the datalogger can be plotted on a line graph in the Graphical Display Up to three Graphical Display screens can be active The settings and selected data values are retained as part of the graph settings even when the graph or Connect screens are closed The settings for each datalogger are saved independently so a different datalogger will have different settings Clicking one of the three numbered buttons next to the Graphical di
358. reen Remedy 3 On RF networks make sure that the extra response time is sufficient for the reply to come back especially if there are repeaters in the network Use the minimum value necessary to make the link function usually less than 5 seconds 15 4 Terminal Emulator to Test Communications Terminal Emulator is a utility to test communications with the devices in the datalogger network Terminal Emulator is accessed from the Test menu of the Toolbar The operation of a ComPort and the connection to a phone modem can be tested The Terminal Emulator utility is available from the main toolbar to help troubleshoot communications problems When you choose a device with the Select Device field the Terminal Emulator will attempt to establish communications with that device The Terminal Emulator will use the lowest baud rate among all of the devices involved in the link For example if choosing a COM port the baud rate will typically be 115 200 baud and LoggerNet simply opens the port For a phone modem the baud rate will be set to the value in the Setup screen for that phone modem the COM port will be opened and the DTR line will be asserted to enable the phone modem For a datalogger on a phone link the baud rate will be set for the lower of the phone modem or datalogger baud rates in the Setup screen AND LoggerNet will try to dial the phone modem and get a prompt from the datalogger You can also use terminal emulation to send commands to
359. reens 9 7 Parameter Types Instruction parameters allow different types of inputs These types are listed below and specifically identified in the description of the parameter in the following sections or in CRBasic help Constant Variable Variable or Array Constant Variable or Expression Constant Variable Array or Expression Name Name or list of Names Variable or Expression Variable Array or Expression Table 9 7 1 lists the maximum length and allowed characters for the names for Variables Arrays Constants etc TABLE 9 7 1 Rules for Names Name for Maximum Length number of Allowed characters characters Variable or Array Letters A Z upper or lower c 99 Constant case underscore _ and Alias numbers 0 9 The name must Data Table Name start with a letter CRBasic is Field name not case sensitive 9 21 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor 9 7 1 Expressions in Parameters Many parameters allow the entry of expressions If an expression is a comparison it will return 1 if the comparison is true and 0 if it is false Section 9 5 3 An example of the use of this is in the DataTable instruction where the trigger condition can be entered as an expression Suppose the variable TC 1 is a thermocouple temperature DataTable Name TrigVar Size DataTable Temp TC 1 gt 100 5000 Entering the trigger as the expression TC 1 gt 100 will cause the trigger to be true
360. reference to the output flag are P83 If Case P86 Do P88 If X lt gt Y P89 If X lt gt F P91 If Port Flag and P92 If Time If any of these instructions set the output flag high the instruction can be replaced with Instruction 84 Table Data Instruction 84 is used to define a table of final storage data New records of data are stored in the table based on time interval data or when a user flag is set event data Time based output intervals are specified in seconds Instruction 18 Time Instruction 18 is used to store the current time into an input location Parameter 1 designates what format will be used when Appendix B Table Based Dataloggers storing the time There are differences in this instruction s Parameter 1 for the two datalogger types e Instructions 73 and 74 Maximum and Minimum These instructions are used to store the maximum or minimum for a value over a period of time Parameter 2 in these instructions is used to designate a time option There are differences in the instructions Parameter 2 for the two datalogger types e Instruction 77 Real Time Instruction 77 is used to store the current time in final storage for array based dataloggers This instruction is not included in table based dataloggers since the time is assigned to records automatically when data is retrieved see Section 5 3 for information on how data is time stamped e Instruction 80 Set Active Storage Area Instructi
361. removed NOTE Section 12 Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC Rename Screen brings up a dialog to change the name of the current screen This is the name that appears on the screen tab in run time mode Component Menu The Component Menu is used to set the component properties placement and alignment The Component Menu is also available by right clicking any of the components in the workspace Component Properties brings up the Properties window for the selected component Rename Component lets you change the name of the component in the list tree Delete Component Selection removes the selected component from the workspace Insert brings up a submenu allowing you select one of the components to insert on the screen When the component is added to the screen the Properties window for the new component will come up Align provides some options for lining up a group of components with the first component selected Select two or more components by using the cursor to click and drag a bounding box around the desired components Components can also be selected by selecting the first component and then selecting the other components while holding down the lt ctrl gt key With the components selected choose one of the alignment options The components will be aligned based on the first component selected The first component is identified by the dark red boundary The other selected components have a light red boundary Be careful
362. removed E datalogger preventing Null program The server has sent a sent an older datalogger emulation mode Server shut The server is being If a new server started down shut down message is seen without the shut down message before it this is an indication that the server or the PC crashed without exiting properly LgrNet restore On server startup the The network setup and failed network description configuration will have file csilgrnet dnd to be restored from a could not be read backup or re entered Try to determine what corrupted or removed the network description file B security manager the computer or database could not be operating system If restored rebooting the machine does not get it working get help from someone who can troubleshoot computer problems 75 76 77 null program to get 78 Server started The server version The server has been started 79 83 84 Security On server startup the There is a problem with manager restore failed D 12 Message Text Data restore failed Manual poll transaction started Manual poll transaction complete Manual poll aborted Selective manual poll begun Selective manual poll complete Selective manual poll aborted Polling started on collect area Message Parameters Client logon name Collect area name Collect area name Collect area name Collect area name Message Meaning On server startup the data broker data s
363. riable and pressing the DEL key It is also reset upon compiling a new program Low12VCount Keeps a running count of the number of occurrences of the 12VLow signal being asserted When this condition is detected the logger ceases making measurements and goes into a low power mode until the system voltage is up to a safe level Appendix B Table Based Dataloggers Table B 1 Example of Status Table Entries CR10T StartUpCode A code variable that allows the user to know how the system woke up from poweroff CommActive A variable signaling whether or not communications is currently active increments each time the autobaud detect code is executed ProgErrors The number of compile or runtime errors for the current program ErrorCalib A counter that is incremented each time a bad calibration value is measured The value is discarded not included in the filter update and this variable is incremented VarOutOfBound Flags whether a variable array was accessed out of bounds SkippedRecord Variable that tells how many records have been skipped for a given table Each table has its own entry in this array SecsPerRecord Output interval for a given table Each table has its own entry in this array SrINbr Machine specific serial number Stored in FLASH memory Rev Hardware revision number Stored in FLASH memory CalVolts Factory calibration numbers This array contains twenty values corresponding to the 20 integration range combinatio
364. rical data press the Print Preview button or select File Print Preview from the menu From Print Preview you can browse among the pages that will be printed and change the paper orientation if desired You can zoom in on a particular area of the previewed page by left clicking the page To return to normal view right click the page or choose the Page Width or the Full Page icon Simply press the print button E B on the toolbar to print one or more pages See the online help for details of the Print Preview options 11 5 2 Printing Graphs With the Chart Panel window opened click the Print Preview to preview the printed page and then select the Print button to print the graph You can also right click the graph to bring up a menu from which you can select Print Preview The preview screen allows you to set options for the margin on the page and whether to use portrait or landscape paper orientation 11 6 Advanced Topics 11 6 1 Assigning Data Files to View NOTE Windows will let you assign the program with which a particular file type will be opened based on that file s extension When a file with an assigned extension is double clicked it will be opened with the associated program You may want to associate DAT files with the View program for quick opening of data files This association can be made by selecting View Options File Types from the Explorer menu Only one association can be made for each file type If the DAT
365. ring of alphanumeric characters that are sent to a device such as a modem to prepare that device for communications InLocs Abbreviation for Input Locations This entry in the status table shows the number of input locations allocated for the program Input Location Storage Each time a measurement or calculation is performed the resultant value is stored in an Input memory Location sometimes abbreviated as InLoc Input Output Instructions Datalogger program instructions used to make measurements or send data automatically to other devices Intermediate Storage Datalogger memory used to temporarily store values typically to be used for output calculations The datalogger uses Intermediate Storage to accumulate sensor readings until output L Link Communications route between two devices for example the phone link between two phone modems Log Files Log files are text files that are stored on the host computer s hard drive They contain information about communications between the LoggerNet server and other devices in the datalogger network Log files are typically used for troubleshooting purposes LoggerNet has four types of log files Communications Status Object State Transaction and Low Level I O Refer to Appendix D for information on these log files A 5 Appendix A Glossary of Terms A 6 M MD9 An MD9 or multi drop modem is a communications device that uses twisted pair cable for conne
366. rkspace Displays are often a combination of a background graphic and data display objects in front Objects added to the workspace are by default placed on top of any existing objects These operations are used to determine the order in which objects are displayed T Bring to Front brings the selected component in front of all other display objects Ra Send to Back places the selected component behind all of the other display objects m Move Forward in areas where multiple objects are layered brings the selected object forward ahead of display objects in the next layer up Sh Move Backward in areas where multiple objects are layered moves the selected object in back of display objects in the next layer down Run Time Menu is used to Save and Run Current Project This will save the project and start RTMC Run Time to display the project Help Menu provides access to help for all of the features of RTMC In Contents you can find an introduction and overview of RTMC as well as detail descriptions of all of the display properties and operations The Index allows you to look up help topics based on a key word 12 2 4 Expressions RTMC has a built in expression interpreter that allows the user to condition the data or create displays based on calculations on a data point The components that display data values Status Bar Numeric Graph and Gauge can be processed using mathematical expressions For instance a temperature readin
367. rmined by the datalogger And as with the other dataloggers the size of event driven tables should always be entered by the user or else the datalogger will calculate the amount of memory for the table based on the execution interval The CR200 Series dataloggers have a Public table in which the current scan s measurements are held However the CR200 Series does not have the ability to store multiple programs and program processing takes place in a linear fashion similar to the TD family of dataloggers e g each programming instruction is performed sequentially one instruction must finish before the datalogger proceeds with the next The CR200 Series dataloggers do not have an on board compiler Programs must be precompiled by LoggerNet or when using the CRBasic Editor before they are sent to the datalogger Refer to Section 6 4 2 for additional information about sending programs to CR200 dataloggers B 2 Converting an Array Based Program to a CR10X TD Table Based Program using Edlog NOTE The following information is provided for those users familiar with writing programs for array based dataloggers or users who have existing array based datalogger programs that need to be changed to table based programs PakBus versions of the CR10X family of dataloggers generally use the same programming instructions as TD table based dataloggers B 3 Appendix B Table Based Dataloggers B 4 B 2 1 Steps for Program Conversion If yo
368. rnet 2 1a Data CA1O TD_Status dat c campbellsci loggernet 2 1a Data CR1QXTD_TimeSet dat b b Start Collection E Close Help Collect Options Newest Number of Records will retrieve the number of records specified in the Starting Record Information area going back from the last record collected Specific Records will retrieve the specified number of records beginning with the Starting Record as specified in the Starting Record Information area Data Since Last Collection will retrieve the data stored since the last time a custom collection was performed LoggerNet keeps track of the records collected from each table every time a custom collection is executed This option will work even if the last custom collection used a different option All the Data will get from the datalogger all the data available from all of the selected tables If the datalogger is full this could take a long time especially with large memory dataloggers or over slow communication links Data From Selected Date and Time uses the starting and ending time and dates to get the data from the datalogger stored between those times If the datalogger does not have data for the specified time range a blank file will 6 5 Section 6 Connect be created CR200 Series dataloggers do not support this collection option Starting Ending Date and Time The Starting and Ending Date and Time are used to specify the timestamp ran
369. ructions Datalogger instructions that modify the sequence of execution of other instructions in the datalogger program also used to set or clear user flags Program Signature A program signature is a unique value calculated by the datalogger based on program structure Record this signature in a daily output to document when the datalogger program is changed A 7 Appendix A Glossary of Terms A 8 Program Table The area where a datalogger program is stored Programming can be separated into two tables each having its own execution interval A third table is available for programming subroutines which may be called by instructions in Tables 1 or 2 The length of the tables is constrained only by the total memory available for programming PROM Programmable Read Only Memory PROM integrated circuit chips are used to store the datalogger Operating System OS in the CR10T datalogger The PROM can be replaced to install a new operating system see EEPROM Pulse Channel Some sensors output voltage pulse signals Such sensors can be connected to Pulse Channels for measurement labeled as P1 P2 etc on the datalogger s wiring panel Q Quiescent Mode Often referred to as sleep mode The datalogger is in a low power state between program execution intervals R Real Time Clock All dataloggers have an internal clock The date and time information from this clock are used in the time stamp for stored data The datalog
370. rval is synchronized with the datalogger s real time clock Execution Time The time required to execute an instruction or group of instructions If the total execution time of a Program Table exceeds the table s Execution Interval the Program Table will be executed less frequently than programmed Each time this occurs a Table Overrun occurs Table Overruns are considered to be errors and are reported in the datalogger status information table Excitation Channel Many sensors require a precise electrical voltage to be applied The excitation channels marked as E1 E2 etc on the datalogger wiring panel provide this required voltage F Fault Message relating to network activity where repeated problems or errors have occurred Repeated faults usually indicate a failure of some kind F1 In most instances pressing the F1 key will provide context sensitive help for the highlighted object on the screen Final Storage Final Storage is an area in the datalogger s memory where data is stored for collection to a PC When you collect data from the datalogger you are collecting data from a Final Storage table Flag Memory locations where the program can store a logical high or low value These locations called User Flags are typically used to signal a state to another part of the program G Ground Connection Most sensors require one or more ground connections in addition to excitation or signal inputs Ground connec
371. s Data storage follows a fixed structure in the datalogger in order to optimize the time and space required Data are stored in tables such as 1995 02 16 15 15 04 61 1995 02 16 15 15 04 62 1995 02 16 15 15 04 63 1995 02 16 15 15 04 64 The user s program determines the values that are output and their sequence The datalogger automatically assigns names to each field in the data table In the above table TIMESTAMP RECORD RefTemp_Avg and TC_Avg 1 are fieldnames The fieldnames are a combination of the variable name or alias if 9 16 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor one exists and a three letter mnemonic for the processing instruction that outputs the data Alternatively the FieldNames instruction can be used to override the default names The data table header may also have a row that lists units for the output values The units must be declared for the datalogger to fill this row out e g Units RefTemp degC The units are strictly for the user s documentation the datalogger makes no checks on their accuracy The above table is the result of the data table description in the example program DataTable Temp 1 2000 DataInterval 0 10 msec 10 Average 1 RefTemp fp2 0 Average 6 TC 1 fp2 0 EndTable All data table descriptions begin with DataTable and end with EndTable Within the description are instructions that tell what to output and the conditions under which output occurs D
372. s Pull gently on the cable to make sure the connectors are still attached securely e The antenna is used in proximity of metal which is reflecting the signal back to the radio e Transmitting inside a building e The cable is worn cut or damaged so that not all of the radio energy can travel through to the antenna e The antenna design frequency does not match the radio frequency If the VSWR is below 1 5 1 then power transmission is good However be sure the antenna is oriented properly While at the station check the voltage on the 12 V port of the datalogger both with and without the radio transmitting Regardless of the battery type the datalogger requires a minimum of 9 6 Volts 15 11 Section 15 Troubleshooting Guide 15 12 15 5 3 Troubleshooting With Attenuation Pads This test is used to measure the signal strength of the radio signal between two radios There are situations where the signal from one radio can be heard by the other but the signal is not strong enough to establish communications In general a signal strength of greater than 95 dBm must be maintained for good communications There are many factors than can contribute to inadequate power in an RF system e Line of sight may be marginal or poor e Vegetation on trees or other obstacles e Corroded connectors or connections not made properly e Inadequate antenna gain e Improper antenna alignment e Outside interference on the channe
373. s a problem with the number of records and their record numbers reflected by the Data Information table It is possible for the oldest record to have a record number higher than the newest record This is due to a combination of events Tables in dataloggers are configured as ring memory Eventually they will fill and the oldest records will be overwritten with newer ones The LoggerNet data cache too is configured as ring memory but sized to hold twice the number of records that can be stored in the datalogger default size When the datalogger compiles its program it starts with record number 0 therefore if something causes the datalogger to recompile its program such as sending a program to the datalogger or using a keyboard display to alter the program slightly all of its tables will start with record number 0 again Therefore the record numbers reflected in the Data Information table may appear to be incorrect As an example if the datalogger s internal table size were 100 records LoggerNet s cache would be sized at 200 records If both had rung around and LoggerNet s cache now held record numbers 201 400 and someone re sent the same program to the datalogger LoggerNet would not clear its data cache but would continue to store the new records These record numbers however would start at 0 After a short while as the new records were put into the data cache and old ones overwritten the earliest record in the data cache might be 2
374. s consist of letters numbers and the underscore _ The device name must be unique in the network and the first character must be a letter Device names can reflect a location layout or physical location of network devices Think carefully when naming the devices since these names are used throughout LoggerNet to refer to the devices 5 2 Device Configuration Settings When you highlight any device on the network shown on the left side of the Setup Screen configuration tabs appear on the right side with the relevant settings These settings are different for different devices and are described in detail below As with changes to the network map the changes made to the device settings are not used until they have been applied 5 2 1 Serial Port 5 4 The serial port has only a Hardware tab to configure Communications Enabled Before communications can take place all devices in the communications chain must be enabled The default setting for this check box is Enabled Call back Enabled Enabling call back tells LoggerNet to watch for a call back from the datalogger on this port If there is a phone modem attached it will be set to accept incoming calls NOTE Section 5 Setup ComPort Connection This field designates the communications port through which you will be connecting to the datalogger Select the arrow to the right of the field with a mouse to display a list containing the ComPorts that are set up on your com
375. s given in Table 10 3 1 in the Input Files section The Custom file format uses the regional settings in the Windows operating system to determine the decimal symbol and the separator used with data values In the Regional Settings for Numbers the decimal symbol uses the character specified in the Decimal Symbol field the separator uses the character specified in the List Separator field These settings are typically found in Control Panel Regional Settings or Options Numbers tab This allows users who are used to the comma as the decimal and the period as a data separator to see the output data in that format 10 39 Section 10 Split Default Column Widths The Default Column Widths field is used to set the default width of the columns Valid entries are 6 7 8 and 9 The initial width is 8 High Resolution Final Storage data requires a minimum column width of 8 Entering a number in the Width row for each column overrides the default settings and sets the width of individual columns If this field is left blank the Default Column Widths field is used Screen Display The Screen Display field controls writing the processed data to the screen To write to the screen check the box For faster execution uncheck the box to omit writing to screen The data will then be written to the file only Report A report with page and column headings can be sent to a file or printer There are three report options File Printer
376. s have two signal wires and the measurement is reflected in the voltage difference between them This type of sensor requires two analog connections The channels marked DIFF on the datalogger wiring panel are used to connect differential sensors DLD File The DLD file is an ASCII file that can be sent to program the datalogger Dataloggers must be programmed to perform measurements convert data to final units and to save data for retrieval Edlog is used to create these files that are saved to disk with a DLD file name extension A program must be sent to the datalogger before the datalogger will begin to collect data E Edlog Campbell Scientific s editor application to create new or edit existing datalogger programs A 3 Appendix A Glossary of Terms A 4 EEPROM Electrically erasable read only memory The memory CR10X TD CR510 TD and CR23X TD dataloggers use to store their operating system A new operating system can be transferred to the datalogger using a special software package see PROM Execution Interval The periodic interval on which the datalogger program is run The execution interval is sometimes referred to as the Scan Interval For example when an execution interval of 60 seconds is set the datalogger will execute its program table every 60 seconds Between executions the datalogger enters a sleep quiescent mode This conserves battery power and creates predictable measurement intervals The execution inte
377. s of entering the above expressions tee 5 2 mu nu 103 bee 10 52 ef 2 sigma 17 RCP alpha 4 A label or function is immediately after a set of parentheses without an operator For Example This error message is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions result ex 2 data gamma 10 omega SIN psi dee 17 number These are correct ways of entering the above expressions result ex 2 data gamma 10 omega SIN psi dee 17 number Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog Equal Sign Expected An equal sign MUST immediately follow the label of the Input Location that stores the results e g label expression An expression that contains no equal sign causes compiler error 202 unrecognized text For Example Equal sign expected is displayed when a program contains any of these expressions zee 2 bee datat number volt1 volt2 These are correct ways of entering the above expressions bee zee 2 data volt1 volt2 number 8 1 2 Editing an Existing Program To edit an existing file load it into Edlog by choosing File Open from the Edlog menu Changes can be made as desired and then the file can be saved and compiled under the same File Save or a new name File Save As Table 8 1 2 provides a list of keystrokes that can be used in editing programs and moving around in Edlog TABLE 8 1 2 Editor Keystrokes lt Ctrl gt Right Arrow Move Instruction 1 Tab Right
378. s tenran Reads aes 12 1 12 2 Development Mode vesiccescs see cede case cineris iij e i EE 12 1 12 2 1 The RTMC Workspace cccccescesseesseeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeneenseenaes 12 2 12 2 2 Display Component cccccsceesseesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeneeneenseenees 12 3 122 3 RTIMC Operations lt cc cca i ae hk ee 12 5 12 24 EXPreSSlOMS oseere iire tinii E E AEE escesucedebeaess 12 8 12 2 5 Remote Connection esssssesssesessesersresersessteresseseeeresseseesse 12 11 123 R n Pini ext set sentient veces teas teashug Sele statanestthevaiouseteacenabbonionsmeveny 12 12 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 1 BI OVE Wta is ihe wie basses stots 13 1 13 2 Getting Startede an aeeoeia asal asana eee he ete 13 2 1323 The Setup Screcik rren ica hank E E EE 13 3 13 2 2 Establishing Communications ccccecceesceesceeeeeseeeteenseeeees 13 4 13 3 Status Information ssena a a a a a e 13 7 13 3 1 Status Box Update Status cccccsecseeesceeseeescesecesecsseenseenaes 13 7 13 3 2 Advanced Status Information cccesceesceeceeeceteceteeeseenees 13 8 13 4 Programs is cece ec o e E E E E RARE EEE T ETs 13 11 13 4 1 Program Location esseesseeesssesesssesersessrsessteressesresresseseesse 13 12 VG AE E E E E E AE AT O A anne 13 12 TIA Store E N EA 13 12 VIAA ROA orccain aeiee EE AEE ARE EN 13 12 Toa DAE OAE N E AE N E E S 13 13 SA FileFormat ennonn tees we Re eat 13 13 13 5 2 File Naming Options
379. s the hour minute The Start Condition directs Split to begin processing data when the time is one day prior to the current PC time and when the hour minute value is equal to 50 The 1 106 in the Copy Condition specifies the array from which the data should be copied The 3 60 10 indicates that the interval for the time stamp is 60 minutes and designates a 10 minute time window on each side of the top of the hour in which Split should look for the hour minute data 10 minutes before the hour 10 minutes after the hour The second file s Copy Condition should include only the array from which to copy the data No interval is necessary 10 3 3 Stop Condition The Stop Condition is expressed with the same syntax as the Start Condition If the Stop Condition parameter is left blank Split will execute until the end of the file Logical and and or statements can be used when specifying the Stop Condition Section 10 3 2 The Stop Condition specifies when to stop processing data This feature allows segments of data to be removed from large data files For instance if a data file contains one month of data and just one day is desired the start and stop values allow the user to get just that day s data The array containing the Stop Condition is not included in the output file If the stop value is not found Split will display a dialog box that gives the option to select a new file and continue processing the data This feature is useful whe
380. s to Collect the user can get an idea of how much data is left to collect e Values to Collect Vals to Collect The total number of values to be collected When LoggerNet first contacts the datalogger it finds out how many data values are waiting to be collected e Watchdog Error Watchdog Err Array based dataloggers only This is the number of Watchdog Errors being reported by the datalogger This is the same number that is available from B mode with keyboard displays or using the remote keyboard See the datalogger operator s manual for more information 7 2 2 Toggle Collection On Off Pressing the Toggle On Off button toggles scheduled collection on or off for the selected datalogger The change to scheduled collection is reflected on the Setup screen for this datalogger The function is only enabled when a datalogger is selected in the network map Collection can be toggled either by clicking the button or selecting Options Toggle Collection On Off 7 5 Section 7 Status Monitor 7 2 0 Reset Device Resets all of the statistics for the selected device Reset Device is done either from the button or selecting Options Reset Retries 7 2 4 Collect Now Stop Collection Collect Now starts data collection for the selected datalogger This is the equivalent of the Collect Now button on the Connect screen Data collection will use the file settings from the Data Files or Final Storage Area 1 or 2 tabs on the Setup screen
381. s to help make creating and editing programs easier 9 1 Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor O CRBasic Editor C Campbellsci LoggerNet CSIOPCMod CR5 _ O X 5 5 File Edit Search Precompile Template Instruction Options Window Help laj x aldean ae e Program mame CSIOPCMod crs Veriables Public BattVolt Panell Units BattVolt Volts Public air 2 sound 2 mvolts LEDxZmvolts counter curve Units air 1 DegF Units air 2 DegF Units Panel Deg Units mvolts mV Units counter none Units curve none Units busserV mV Public emptyl emptyZ empty3 DataTable ONESEC True 1 DataInterval 0 1 Sec 100 Average 1 BattVolt FPZ False eee a ee R A cr ee S Y C Campbellsci LoggerNet CSIOPCMod CR5 Compiled OK Line 4 Col 22 93 lines written to C Campbellscii LoggerNet CSIOPCMod CRS Insert 9 1 1 Inserting Instructions An instruction can be easily inserted into the program by highlighting it in the Instruction Panel list and pressing the Insert button or by double clicking the instruction name If an instruction has one or more parameters a parameter dialog box will be displayed Complete the information in the parameter fields and press Insert to paste the instruction into the program You can filter the list of instructions available in the Instruction Panel by clicking the drop down arrow to the right of the text box above
382. sed on time Each table is completely independent of any other tables and all records in a given table have the same number of fields Appendix B Table Based Dataloggers B 4 Default Tables Each table based datalogger has a set of default tables plus the tables created by the datalogger program The four default tables in the CR10X TD family of dataloggers are Timeset Errorlog Inlocs and Status The default tables in CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 dataloggers are Status and Public e Timeset Table The Timeset table contains a history of clock sets for the datalogger It includes three fields TimeStamp RecordNumber and OldTime TimeStamp is the time and date the clock was set RecordNumber is incremented each time the clock is set When the datalogger is reset or a new program is loaded RecordNumber is reset to 1 OldTime is the datalogger s clock value before the time was set CR10X TD family dataloggers only e Errorlog Table The Errorlog table contains any errors that occur in the datalogger It includes three fields TimeStamp RecordNumber and ErrorCode TimeStamp is the time and date the error occurred RecordNumber is incremented each time an error occurs When the datalogger is reset or a new program is loaded RecordNumber is reset to 1 ErrorCode is the code returned by the datalogger when an error occurs Refer to the datalogger user s manual for a list of all error codes CR10X TD family dataloggers only e Inlocs Ta
383. selection of the wrong COM port or a loose physical connection between the storage module and the computer 13 3 Status Information 13 3 1 Status Box Update Status When successful communication has been established a set of values will appear in the StatusBox at the right hand side of the screen This screen shows the current status values for the card or module Some typical values are shown in Figures 13 1 and 13 3 above The information in the main StatusBox is relatively straightforward and is similar for all modules The SM192 716 and SM4M SM16M modules have an additional Switch Settings information box that shows the settings made using the ADVANCED SETTING screen Further information on each item in the STATUS screen can be obtained by clicking that item and pressing F 1 Additional information is also available in the appropriate Storage Module Manual 13 7 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 8 The status information can be updated at any time by clicking the Update Status button 13 3 2 Advanced Status Information CSM1 MCR1 Display Pointer NOTE Card Format Type PROM Details SM192 SM716 The ADVANCED STATUS screen is different for each type of module and provides extra information and configuration facilities The Display Location Pointer DLP indicates the location which holds the first value that will be read when extracting data from the card The pointer can be positioned anywhere within
384. ses scripts can be created with other scripting language tools that would call the CoraScript interpreter and send commands to the LoggerNet server This provides an alternate means of controlling data collection hole collection and maintenance functions such as clock check and set F 3 Appendix F CoraScript F 4
385. sesseesreseesresessee 9 3 9 1 3 Right Click Functionality s sesseeseeeesseseessrseesseeesseseessesreseesersessee 9 4 9TA Tool baT oiio on it r E N EE E N E a aa 9 5 9 1 5 Compilers einir R EEE i i nre 9 6 SAO Templates cis A E E EE E E ee es 9 7 9 1 7 CRBasic Editor Options cccecccsseeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeceeenseeseeeneeenes 9 8 9 1 8 Available Help Information cccccccccseeseeneeeeceesceeteenseenees 9 12 9 2 CRBasic Programming occse iii 9 12 9 2 1 Programming Sequence ccesccesceseessecsseeseeeseeeeeeseeeeseeseensees 9 12 9 2 2 Program Declarations c cccescceseceseeetecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeesees 9 14 9 2 3 Mathematical Expressions cecccsceesseesseeseeeeceeseeseeeseeeeensees 9 14 9 2 4 Measurement and Output Processing Instructions 006 9 15 9 2 5 Inserting Comments Into Program ccccecesseesseeeeeseeeteensees 9 15 LoggerNet Table of Contents 9 3 Example Program i225 nist a cutie hance Misihe garish aha 9 16 93 1 Data Tables so cccccccicccsccsscede dic Sissies ces n Qc i i R 9 16 9 3 2 The Scan Measurement Timing and Processing 6 9 18 0 4 Numerical A Dia E TSA AE E E E E thee b Sects 9 19 9 5 Logical Expression Evaluation cccccccsceesseessceseceeeceeeceseeneeeseeeaeeenes 9 20 OS Whatass re rengn e eit akties 9 20 9 5 2 Expression Evaluation cccccccccesessceesceesceeecesecesecsseeseeeseeeeeeeas 9 20 9 5 3 Numeric Resu
386. shed between the computer and the storage module see Figure 13 2 4 Note however that the CR10 X CR500 and CRS510 dataloggers can only support a maximum baud rate of 9600 SC12 PC sc32q P cR10 x 7026 SC25PS or equivalent SM192 cable or SM716 FIGURE 13 2 4 Connecting the SM192 716 to a PC anda CR10 X Datalogger SMS can automatically detect if a datalogger that supports direct communication is present and request that a connection be made to the Storage Module In these circumstances the Via Datalogger check box can be used for connection This sets the baud rate to 9600 and enables the Target Address check box If this Via Datalogger is not selected and you attempt to connect to a storage module SMS will detect the datalogger s presence and adjust the baud rate accordingly The Target Address selector is disabled unless you check the Via Datalogger box because this is the only mode that simultaneously supports multiple storage modules An appropriate datalogger can be connected to up to eight storage modules simultaneously each having a different address The address selector is used to specify the address of the module to which you wish to connect Note however that any module having a high address may answer to a call of a lower address if no module of the lower address is present Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS For example if only one storage module with
387. sing Last Count CAUTION 10 10 Each time Split runs a parameter file it keeps track of the number of bytes it read from the input file and saves this information in the parameter file Split can then start where it last left off This is done by clicking the Offsets button and selecting the Last Count option see Example 1 This feature may be used to process only the new data from a file in which new data are being appended periodically to the data file using the scheduled data collection option of LoggerNet Start and Stop offsets Specified in number of bytes Start Offset Stop Offset C None C Specific Start Stop condition M Midnightis 2400 hours Number of values in each burst Cancel Example 1 When using the Last Count option if the Start and Stop Conditions Sections 10 3 2 10 3 3 are specified they must exist in the newly appended data or Split will never begin execution Because Last Count keeps track of the number of bytes in the file if you delete data from the beginning of a file Last Count will not work properly Section 10 Split By selecting the Specific option and entering a number Split will seek that position in the file This option saves time by starting part way through a large data file The number specifies the number of characters into the file to seek before processing data A positive or negative number can be entered If th
388. splay area will bring up a Graphical Display screen An example of one of these screens is shown below Ifa Graphical Display screen is already active but hidden behind other windows clicking its number will bring it to the front Final storage data must be collected by LoggerNet before it can be graphed The timestamp for the right side of the graph is displayed above the configuration buttons on the right side of the window This indicates the timestamp for the most recent data G1 Graph G1 Section 6 Connect i oOo Oan WO SE OD ODO OO 1 55 04 PM 1 57 01 PM 1 59 09 PM 2 01 17 PM 2 03 25 PM Clear Graph Help Battolt 13 13 IntTempE 25 32 TCTempF 74 62 Count 17 00 SineOut 0 29 Right edge time stamp 2 7 2002 2 05 03 PM Start i Rescale Stop 6 5 1 1 Add When first opened the Graphical Display is initially blank the fields to be plotted must be selected Press the Add button to bring up the Available Fields dialog box that lists the data fields for the available datalogger tables or final storage Selecting a table name or final storage array ID will bring up a list of data fields in the right hand window Select the fields to add by clicking the data field names Multiple data fields can be selected by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking additional names The selected data fields can be added to the graph either by
389. ss of data a system crash or destruction of the network map There are no user editable files in this directory System administrators concerned about security and system integrity should use Windows NT and its directory access tools to control access to the working directories C 3 2 C Program Files CampbellSci LoggerNet Directory Program File Directory CI Program Files a CampbellSci C LoggerNet All files necessary for running the LoggerNet programs are stored in the C Program Files CampbellSci LoggerNet subdirectory No other files are saved to these program file subdirectories in order to protect the integrity of the LoggerNet communication server and the clients C 3 3 Backing Up Critical Information Since after installation no files are stored in the programs directory C Program Files Campbellsci LoggerNet all you need to back up is the working directory c Campbellsci LoggerNet We recommend that you back up this entire directory with all of its files and subdirectories on a regular basis Appendix D Log Files D 1 Event Logging As LoggerNet performs its work it will create records of various kinds of events The log files are very useful for troubleshooting problems and monitoring the operation of the datalogger network See Section 7 2 10 for information on saving the logs to disk D 1 1 Log Categories The LoggerNet server logs events in four different kinds of logs as follows Transaction Status TranX
390. ss of its format This permits storage of raw ASCII data Raw ASCII data will take up much more storage space than encoded data and so it is generally recommended that data are always stored as binary This shows the actual address of the Storage Module Changing the actual address will not change the selected target address See Target Address for further details This has exactly the same function as the Display Pointer for the CSM1 MCR1 see above 13 9 Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS 13 10 Storage Mode Two methods of memory allocation for storage of data are provided Ring Mode and Fill and Stop as explained below Ring Mode When the storage module is set to Ring Mode data are stored sequentially When all memory locations become full the ring memory wraps around and new data are then written over the oldest data stored in memory To avoid data loss retrieve all data from the storage module before this occurs Fill and Stop When the storage module is set to Fill and Stop data are stored sequentially but data storage stops when all memory locations become full When multiple storage modules are used each should be assigned its own address and set to Fill and Stop When one module is filled data will then be stored in the module with the next highest address Test Battery Unloaded Test Battery Loaded CAUTION SM4M SM16M The value shown under Test Battery is for the sta
391. stics e Instruction 128 SHEF Data Transfer to TGT e Instruction 189 SDM LI7500 e Instructions P190 199 PakBus control e Indexed input locations in a loop See Edlog Help for each instruction to get a detailed description of input location usage You can also refer to the datalogger user s manual for more information on these instructions When these instructions are used in a program the Toggle Manual feature can be used to manually mark Input Locations for use by the program 8 3 Final Storage Labels 8 20 When output processing instructions are added to the datalogger program Edlog creates final storage labels for the each of the values that will be stored The default labels are normally the input location label with a suffix indicating the type of output processing instruction that created it In the example below BattVolt_AVG is the average battery voltage that is stored as part of array 112 For array based dataloggers the final storage labels are stored in an FSL file when the program is compiled as well as in the DLD files For table based dataloggers the final storage labels are included as part of the datalogger program in the DLD file no FSL file is created LoggerNet gets the final storage labels as part of the table definitions from the datalogger Split the Graphical and Numeric Displays View and the LoggerNetData applications use the final storage labels The user can create a custom label to reflect the
392. t Recently Logged Arrays This option is used when you are most interested in only the most recently stored data When this option is selected you can specify how many arrays back from the most recent array should be included when data is collected from the datalogger 5 2 5 4 Data Files Tab Table based and PakBus dataloggers only Table based dataloggers include the CRIOT CRS510TD CR10X TD CR23X TD CR5000 CR9000 and CR200 Series Data output to final storage is stored as records in tables The Data Files tab is used to define what data tables will be collected from the datalogger along with the output file name and format 5 12 Section 5 Setup Tables to be Collected All of the available tables in the datalogger are listed in the column on the left If no tables are listed click the Get Table Definitions button The tables selected for collection are shown with a green check mark and the excluded tables are shown with a red X Data from the selected tables will be collected from the datalogger during scheduled data collection Fora description of the built in tables see Appendix B 3 The individual tables can be highlighted by clicking the table name The settings on the right side of the window apply to the highlighted table The name of the highlighted table appears at the top of the settings Double clicking a table name will toggle collection of that table on or off Output File Name This setting defines the file
393. t be transmitted at the specified interval unless LoggerNet is actively communicating over the PakBus Port 5 2 5 Datalogger Dataloggers have several different tabs Similar to the serial port a hardware tab is completed to specify communications settings There are also tabs to define the data to be collected how often data should be collected and whether to automatically update the datalogger s clock Note that not all dataloggers will have all the settings described below 5 2 5 1 Hardware Tab 5 8 Communications Enabled Before communication can take place all devices in the chain must be enabled When this box is selected the datalogger is enabled for communication Maximum Time On line A time limit can be set for the length of time LoggerNet will stay connected to the datalogger on any scheduled call Once this time limit has been exceeded communications with the device will be terminated Setting the time to zero will disable this time limit This setting can be set to zero for most communications links without serious repercussion However with phone modem communication you may wish to leave this setting at the default of 10 minutes to avoid costly phone bills NOTE NOTE NOTE Section 5 Setup Maximum Time On line only applies to scheduled communications Using the Connect screen to connect to the datalogger will stay connected until terminated by the user Maximum Packet Size Data is transferred in ch
394. t with different options to find which methods work best for you To keep the manual as concise and readable as possible we will not always list all of the methods for getting to every function Typically each function will have two methods and some will have as many as four The most common methods for doing things are Menus Text menus are displayed at the top of most windows Menu items are accessed either by a left mouse click or using a hot key combination e g Alt F opens the File menu When the menu is opened the desired item can be selected by clicking it or using arrow keys to go down to it and pressing the Enter key or typing the underlined letter If there is an arrow to the right of the menu item there is a submenu with more choices Clicking or selecting the item will bring up the submenu By convention menu items that bring up dialog boxes or new windows will be followed by an ellipsis Other items execute functions directly or can be 1 5 Section 1 Introduction 1 6 switched on or off Some menu items show a check mark if a function is enabled and no check mark if disabled Items with Program Focus On each screen one button text area or other control is selected or has the focus Focus is indicated when the item is surrounded by a dotted line Focus can be moved from item to item by pressing the tab key A selected text edit box can be changed by typing A selected check box can be toggled b
395. ta Table definition The number of records to be kept in a table before the oldest data is overwritten can be limited by the user or left for the datalogger to determine automatically The datalogger tries to set the sizes of automatically allocated tables such that all of the tables will fill up at about the same time Once the sizes of the tables are determined the datalogger allocates the available memory to these tables NOTE Appendix B Table Based Dataloggers If the amount of memory requested for the data tables exceeds the available memory the program will not run Event driven tables should have a fixed size rather than allowing them to be allocated automatically Event driven tables in CR5000 CR9000 dataloggers that are automatically allocated are assumed to have one record stored per execution interval in calculating the length Since the datalogger tries to make the tables fill up at the same time with programs using short execution intervals these event driven tables may take up most of the memory leaving very little for other longer interval automatically allocated data tables B 1 3 CR200 Series Dataloggers CR200 Series dataloggers are similar to the CR5000 CR9000 dataloggers regarding the format of final storage Data is stored in final storage tables that are made up of records and fields As with the other table based dataloggers the user can specify the number of records for each table or table size can be dete
396. talogger s clock will be set if it varies from the LoggerNet server s clock more than the amount of time specified in the Allowed Clock Deviation field Because it is important to maintain accurate time stamping of your data there are a few things to take into consideration when setting up a clock check schedule For the CR10X TD family of dataloggers when an instruction P84 Output Record is executed in the datalogger program to create an interval based table and a record is stored the time stamp is not stored along with the record Instead when data is retrieved from the datalogger the datalogger uses the time stamp of the last record stored and the table interval to calculate the time stamp for any previous records This calculated time stamp is then stored by the server as part of the data record along with the other data values when data is collected Because of this time stamping method if the datalogger clock is changed such that it passes an output interval a discontinuity could occur in the records that could cause the time stamps to be incorrect Event based data storage does not rely on a calculated time stamp Data stored to a table based on an event includes a time stamp in the table Your datalogger clock should deviate no more than 1 minute per month Typically this drift is less than what will be experienced with a personal computer Therefore unless you have a scheduled task on your computer which synchronizes your
397. tasks that have been defined in the Task Manager Section 7 Status Monitor Task Master iof x Last Time Executed Next Time Task_2 Scheduled 00 01 00 00 Interval 05 05 03 11 05 54 AM 05 05 03 12 00 00 PM Task_3 Failed Call CR10x N A Run Task Pause Tasks Task Setup Task Status The window shows the type of task the last time it was run the interval if it is scheduled or the event that triggers it if it depends on data collection The Run Task button will run the selected task and can be used to test the operation of a task The Pause Tasks check box will suspend the execution of all tasks 7 2 8 Show Stations Only Checking Show Stations Only will hide all of the devices in the network map except the dataloggers and storage modules This can make the display easier to view especially when there are many dataloggers in the network or the communication paths are complex This option can also be accessed by selecting the Options Show Stations Only menu item 7 2 9 Pause Schedule Checking Pause Schedule suspends scheduled data collection for all of the dataloggers in the network This can be useful when trying to isolate specific problems This option can also be accessed by selecting Options Pause Schedule 7 2 10 Log Settings Log Settings allows you to control whether the logs are saved to files along with the size and number of log files that are created One set of log files is created for each of the thre
398. te of the battery when compared to a 2 5V DC reference without any load on the battery The battery can be checked when a 100 ohm load is connected for 1 second This test shortens the overall battery life by approximately 3 minutes but it is a much better test of the battery s integrity It is particularly important to carry out a Loaded Battery Test if the battery is more than four years old and you are intending to leave the Storage Module unattended to collect data for several months or you are leaving the module unattended to collect data in cold weather Failure to check the battery can lead to data loss in the above conditions Many options on the SM4M SM6M ADVANCED STATUS tab are similar to the other modules Options unique to these two types of modules are explained below Data Block Size The data block size is the physical size in bytes of flash memory blocks Data Memory Size The data memory size is the total amount of memory in bytes for the storage module Each low resolution data point uses 2 bytes therefore the SM4M can store 2 million data points and the SM16M can store 8 million data points a high resolution data point uses 4 bytes and reduces the number of data points that can be stored in half 13 4 Programs Section 13 Storage Module Software SMS Max Program Size The Max Program Size is the amount of memory in bytes currently available for datalogger program storage Program Area Size The
399. tem Requirements 2 1 Hardware and Software LoggerNet is a collection of 32 bit programs designed to run on Intel based computers running Microsoft Windows operating systems The recommended computer configuration for running LoggerNet is Windows NT or Windows 2000 because they offer the most stable operating environment LoggerNet may also run on Windows 95 and Windows 98 if operations such as open screens are limited so as not to exhaust the operating system s resources All installations require at least a Pentium II or equivalent processor a minimum of 32 MB of RAM a minimum of 45 MB free space on the hard disk and TCP IP support installed 2 2 Configuration of TCP IP Services NOTE TCP IP services must be running on the computer for LoggerNet to run Following are the procedures for enabling TCP IP communication on a Windows 95 98 or NT system For Windows 2000 the same things need to be set up but they are accessed in different ways See the documentation and help for Windows 2000 to add a dial up connection and associate it with TCP IP Before beginning this procedure make sure that you have your Windows installation CD ROM or floppy disks as appropriate handy As you install these options you may be prompted to insert various disks or the CDROM to complete the installation 1 Click the Start button and select Settings Control Panel 2 When the Control Panel window comes up double click the Add Remove Programs ic
400. that line will be highlighted in the program editing window To move the highlight to the next error in the program press the Next Error button or choose Next Error from the Compile menu To move the highlight to the previous error in the program press the Previous Error button or choose Previous Error from the Compile menu The error window can be closed by selecting the Close Message Window menu item NOTE 9 1 6 Templates NOTE Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor For CR5000 and CR9000 dataloggers this function only verifies the integrity of the program Actual compilation of the program takes place in the datalogger For CR200 dataloggers a compiled binary image is created Refer to Section 6 4 2 for additional information on CR200 program files The use of templates can be a powerful way to quickly create a set of similar datalogger programs All or part of a program can be saved so that it can be used when creating new programs These files are called templates The Template menu provides access to create and use templates Save File as Template Saves the comments and instructions in the active file as a template To save part of a program as a template copy the selected part to a new program file and then Save File as Template Save as Default Template Saves the comments and instructions in the active file as a template that will be used each time File New is selected for that type of datalo
401. the desired option Right click another type of parameter to bring up help for that parameter Right click a block of text that is highlighted to bring up a short cut menu with the following options Section 9 Datalogger Program Creation with CRBasic Editor Comment Uncomment Block Only one of these options will be available depending upon the status of the highlighted text If the text has been marked as a Comment you can choose to uncomment it If the text is not commented you can chose to make it into a comment Commented text has a single quote at the beginning of the line Comments are ignored by the datalogger s compiler Decrease Increase Indent You can increase or decrease the indention of the selected text The spacing is increased or decreased by one Cut Copy Paste Delete Standard editing functions can be accessed through this menu 9 1 4 Toolbar The toolbar of the CRBasic Editor provides easy access to frequently used operations ole ae Alesle Slalel T 5 New Creates a new program window to start writing a new program If you have defined a default template the new program will start with the defined template instructions Open Brings up a File Open dialog to select a program file to open File extension filters are provided to list only files of a certain type such as cr5 files for CR5000 programs Data files dat can also be opened Save Saves any changes to
402. the display when data is collected by LoggerNet on a schedule If scheduled data collection is not set up in LoggerNet or the selected data value is excluded from scheduled collection the values will not update Input locations ports and flags for array based dataloggers are collected at the scheduled collection interval or any time a custom collection is done After a component s properties have been set select Apply to enable the changes or Apply amp Close to enable the changes and close the Properties window Once the link to the data value has been applied if there is data available from LoggerNet for the component the value on the display will update To make changes in display component settings the Properties window can be invoked by double clicking the component If you make changes to a component s properties but then decide to reject those changes press the Cancel button to return the properties to the last applied state If Cancel is selected when a component is first placed in the work area and Apply or Apply amp Close has not been pressed the display component will be removed from the screen Available Components The following is an overview of the display components available The online help has detailed information about each of the components and their properties amp Pointer Pointer returns the cursor to a normal selection tool Several components can be moved as a group by selecting each with the pointe
403. the install utility If a different working directory was used then the files will be contained in the same set of subdirectories under the main working directory By default data files are stored to the c CampbellSci LoggerNet directory you can however choose a different directory The maximum interval for backing up data files depends primarily on the amount of data maintained in the datalogger memory The datalogger s final storage is configured as ring memory that will overwrite itself once the storage area or table is full If the data is backed up more often than the oldest records in the datalogger are overwritten a complete data record can still be maintained by restoring the data from the backup and then re collecting the newest records from the datalogger A command line utility called CoraScript can be used to back up the network map and all of its settings There is a function available to save a script file containing all the commands to rebuild the network map and restore the configuration settings for all of the devices This can be used to restore the network after a computer failure causes the network map or configuration files to be corrupted It will not however restore the data cache or the system state For more information on CoraScript see Appendix F 3 3 Section 3 Installation Operation and Backup Procedures 3 4 3 4 2 Loss of Computer Power The LoggerNet communications server writes to several files in
404. the menu e Type the instruction number onto a blank line and press enter The first three options will invoke the Insert Instruction dialog box Insert Instruction es Instruction Number 1 Instruction Name olt SE Volt Diff Pulse Excite Delay SE 4C Half Bridge Full Bridge 3W Half Bridge Ex Del Diff Full Bridge w mvy Excit Batt Voltage Temp 107 R H 207 Thermocouple Temp SE Thermocouple Temp DIFF Dart Serial TKN To insert an instruction into the program select and then choose OK or double click the entry in the list If you need more information on an instruction select the instruction and click the Help button Note that to the right of each instruction name is a code for the instruction type T O for input output Process for instructions that calculate new values Output for instructions that write to final storage or Control for instructions that affect program flow 8 1 1 4 Entering Parameters for the Instructions When an instruction is inserted the cursor moves to the first parameter Type the parameter s value and press lt enter gt to move to the next parameter There are two ways to get help on a parameter e Select the parameter with your mouse and press the right button This brings up a dialog box from which to select a value or a pop up description of what should be entered Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog e With your cursor anywhere within the instructi
405. the screen if the Screen Display box is checked If Screen Display is not enabled no data will be displayed on the Split RUN screen Section 10 Split CAUTION The Output file name cannot be the same as the Input file name Split will display an error message if this condition occurs Several output options may be specified to alter the default output to the file Some are located on the main OUTPUT FILE screen and some are made available by pressing the Other button Split SPLITMAN PAR File Edit Labels Run Printer Help Input File s 7 Output Data File File Format Report Browse hourly prn Comma I File Other I Printer I Append File HTML Default Column Width g Screen Display Report and Column Headings Report Heading Hoba a ee sf Element Feet aneen anette Sorte enone Filename _ MSTSPLIT DAI MSTSPLITDA MSTSPLITDA MSTSPLITDA MSTSPUT Dal Year ATM Day ATM Hour_Minute Battery BattVolt AirT emp Volts Min Average gt Time Series Heading Insert Delete Add FIGURE 10 3 1 Output File Template 10 3 7 1 Description of Output Option Commands File Format There are five File Format options to choose from No File Field Comma Printable and Custom If No File is chosen then only the PRN file is saved to disk The Field Comma and Printable options produce files formatted as Field Formatted Comma Separated and Printable ASCII respectively An example of each of these file types i
406. them within the limits 6 5 1 5 Start Stop While the graph is running any new data received from the datalogger will be automatically plotted on the graph and the graph scrolled forward The graphing can be stopped to capture some event to a graphics file by clicking the Stop button Clicking the Start button will start the graph again including filling in historical data values for final storage data Section 6 Connect 6 5 1 6 Clear Pressing the Clear button erases all the trace plots from the Graphical Display area The graphing of data continues at the right side of the graph as data is collected To graph the historical data again click the Stop and then the Start button 6 5 2 Numeric Display Screen Data values collected from the datalogger can be displayed in numerical format on the Numeric Display Up to three Numerical Display screens can be active The settings and selected data values are retained as part of the display settings even when the display or Connect screens are closed The settings for each datalogger are saved independently so a different datalogger will have different settings Clicking one of the three numbered boxes next to the Numerical display area will bring up a Numerical Display screen An example of one of these screens is shown below If a Numerical Display screen is already active but hidden behind other windows clicking its number will bring it to the front NOTE Final storage data must be col
407. ther to overwrite append or create a new file and the tables you want to collect With table based dataloggers you also have the option of choosing specific records or a time interval to collect Each table is saved in a separate file so there will be one file created for each table that is selected While retrieving data from the datalogger using Custom Collection scheduled data collection will be suspended The default data file names for custom collection are separate from the files for scheduled collection data and by default are placed in a Data directory under the LoggerNet directory Section 6 Connect Custom Collection Eg Collect Options gt f Starting Date Time Newest Number of Records Specific Records Date Time 04 23 03 z 12 00 00 AM C Data Since Last Collection Ending Date Time i i C Allthe Data pale Us p 04 23 03 E 10 55 17 AM C Data From Selected Date and Time Starting Record Information p e roe Append to End of File TOACI Starting Record Number of Records esas Eerie C TOAS fo fioo C Create New File C TOBI Data Collectio Select All Change File Name Reset Tables CO OneMinute O OneSecond O SistyMinutes O Status O TimeSet c campbellsciloggermet 2 1a Data CR10 TD_OneMinute dat c campbellsci loggernet 2 1 a Data CR10 TD_OneSecond dat c campbellsci loggernet 2 1 a Data CR10XTD_SixtyMinutes dat c campbellsci logge
408. thout Deleting T ables Run on Start up Run Now and on Start up Stop Program halts execution of the currently running datalogger program 6 7 Remote Keyboard CAUTION The datalogger can be put into a remote terminal mode so that the user can send low level communication instructions to the datalogger Often this is used for troubleshooting applications such as viewing memory settings in the datalogger or changing the program execution interval temporarily When terminal emulation is active all other communication with the datalogger is suspended including scheduled data collection Information on communicating with the datalogger in terminal mode is provided in the datalogger user s manual To activate the remote keyboard select Tools Remote Keyboard from the menu The Remote Keyboard function should be used with care It is possible to affect the settings of the datalogger such as changing the datalogger program and tables Changes of this type will cause data collection to be suspended and possibly result in lost data 6 8 Program Association 6 24 A table based datalogger maintains final storage table information internally this is referred to as the datalogger s table definitions The LoggerNet server uses this information for the Add dialog box when you select values to view on a Numeric or Graphical display and for the LoggerNetData applications Array based dataloggers do not store final storage information intern
409. time stamp for a table based datalogger is all one string and therefore read by Split as one element the syntax is somewhat different All elements in the time stamp are specified by a 1 if the time stamp is the first item in each row of data The 1s in the string identify the position of the time stamp in the line of data Each colon represents a portion of the time stamp The format is 1 year 1 day 1 hour minute 1 seconds The colons in the time stamp must be present or the function will not work correctly Time synchronization can only be done for data from a single year It will not work over a year boundary Section 10 Split Time elements can be identified without specifying a starting time e g 2 3 When no starting time is specified Split assumes the starting time to be 0 and inserts carriage return line feeds CRLF at the start of the Output File The number of CRLFs equals the time between 0 and the time of the first array selected divided by the interval specified in the Copy condition When time synchronizing if multiple input files are given starting times Split starts the Output at the earliest specified starting time In a PRN file Blanks or the comment entered in the Replace bad data with field are inserted for values from other input files until their starting times are reached In a RPT file only blanks are used NOTE When using time synchronization with an array based data file with a midnight time
410. tions may serve any of several purposes e areference for a single ended SE analog voltage e a power return path e a connection for cable shield wire to help reduce electrical noise Appendix A Glossary of Terms H Highlight Text or objects can be highlighted by positioning the cursor where you want the highlight to begin holding the left mouse button and dragging it across the words or group of objects to be highlighted A single object can be highlighted by clicking it once with the left mouse button Highlighted items can then be edited or activated Holes Because Data Advise always get the most recent data records there can be sequences of older data available from the datalogger that have not yet been collected to the data cache The server tracks and optionally collects these holes This entry in the status table shows the number of data points in missed records for the data storage tables in that station Hole Collection The process used by the server to collect from the datalogger data records missing from the data cache If Hole Collection is delayed or disabled the memory in the datalogger can ring around and overwrite the missing data records resulting in an Uncollectable Hole Host Computer The machine where the LoggerNet communication server software is running I INI Files Configuration files that are used to preserve the last known setups of a program or device Initialization String A st
411. to automatic The upper and lower limits will depend on the range of values in the selected data You can set the graph s Y scale to a fixed value using the Customize Chart option right most icon C o Big A ER Be Max Points To Display foo x C CampbelilscitLoggerNet20 CR23X dat Array 109 Count F Array 109 SineOut 2002 0207 2002 0207 2002 02 07 12 55 00 13 00 00 13 05 00 Graph Panel Options The following options are available to set up how the Graph Panel displays the line graph These options are available by clicking the buttons at the top of the graph Let the mouse cursor hover over a button for a few seconds to see a pop up hint describing the button s function E Graphs two traces on the same Y axis Graphs one trace on the left axis and the other on the right Invokes the Print Preview screen Paper orientation and margins can be adjusted and the graph can be printed Ek Forces the Chart Panel to be on top This button is toggled on or off to keep the Chart Panel in front of other windows Forces the Data Panel to be on top This button is toggled on or off to keep the Data Panel in front of other windows 11 5 Section 11 View Saves the graph to a file in BMP WMF or EMF format The file type is selected using the Save as Type option at the bottom of the Save As dialog Brings up the Customize Chart dialog that allows you to set the properties of the Y axes Chart
412. to correct simple errors without a call to Campbell Scientific technical support This section also includes descriptions of some of the tools such as Terminal Emulator and Data Table Monitor that can be useful in troubleshooting LoggerNet problems When things stop working the most important thing to ask yourself is What s changed A new computer new software especially non Campbell Scientific software different communication peripheral such as a new modem new datalogger program etc can all interrupt communications If you can t deduce the nature of the problem go back to the original configuration If a phone telecommunications or socket link starts to fail for no apparent reason ask someone else to try it from a different computer Try swapping out components one at a time from a link in the network that you know works or from spare equipment that you are certain is functioning correctly Sometimes the smallest thing a cable or a new PC utility program can cause widespread havoc If using TCP IP or cellular telephone communications check with the network administrator to see if anything changed that coincided with the loss of communications 15 1 LoggerNet Server Problems The following sections identify problems that have been observed with operation of the server If you are experiencing problems with the server look through the following conditions to see if any of these match the problem you are having
413. torage area could not be created The listed client is starting a manual poll operation according to the scheduled collection settings A manual poll is initiated from the Collect Now button on the Connect screen The manual poll operation has received the data from the datalogger The manual poll operation was stopped or failed to complete due to communications failure or a timeout A user specified poll has been started for one of the datalogger collect areas The user specified manual poll has completed The user specified manual poll failed Data has been requested for the specified collect area This message is always associated with another message indicating whether this is scheduled manual or selective manual polling Appendix D Log Files User Response to Message This is a computer problem The files are either not present or are corrupted See notes for message 83 Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Check communications with the datalogger by trying to check the clock If that fails follow the steps for message 14 Collect areas can be table for table mode dataloggers final storage areas ports and flags or input locations Appendix D Log Files Code Message Text Collect area poll data Collect area polling complete Collect area polling failed Scheduled polling begun
414. ture The National Weather Service includes wind chill in reports only when temperatures drop below 35 F 1 7 C The formula is for example purposes and is not endorsed by Campbell Scientific as a standard When this PAR file is executed the following output is displayed on the screen 10 36 Wind Chill Report from Mt Logan Temp deg C 14 756 14 156 13 806 13 639 13 65 12 961 13 306 14 511 15 439 16 161 16 3 15 894 16 117 16 072 16 833 17 639 18 972 19 628 19 217 18 067 15 467 13 439 13 044 12 9 Reference Wind Chill Errors Edwin Kessler Bulletin of the American Meteorology Society Vol 74 No 9 September 1993 pp 1743 1744 Wind Speed m s 2 6172 3 6967 3 4643 3 3972 4 6533 4 0185 4 2554 2 9448 2 4397 2 066 2 6489 3 0463 3 7325 4 8812 3 7682 3 9694 3 5626 3 0208 3 1648 3 9157 5 2791 6 9821 7 6526 5 3014 438 06 489 58 491 34 493 4 529 57 530 58 528 27 456 04 414 97 383 21 402 08 425 2 439 59 468 26 421 85 405 59 361 39 331 76 345 62 393 08 493 51 584 71 607 86 566 29 Section 10 Split Wind Chill deg C 13 148 10 813 10 733 10 64 9 0005 8 9547 9 0596 12 333 14 194 15 633 14 778 13 731 13 078 11 779 13 882 14 619 16 622 17 965 17 337 15 186 10 635 6 5016 5 4526 7 3368 Wind Chill deg F 55 666 51 463 51 319 51 151 48 201 48 118 48 307 54 199 57 55 60 14 58 601 56 715 55 541 53 202 56 988 58 314 61 92
415. twork The telephone modem has only the Hardware tab This device must be properly installed and configured in the operating system to use one of the computer s ComPorts before it can be used by LoggerNet Communications Enabled Before communications can take place all devices in the chain must have the Communications Enabled box checked When this box is selected communications to the phone modem are enabled Section 5 Setup Modem Type Use the drop down list box to select the type of modem that is attached to the server computer s communications port In most instances the lt default modem gt should work Edit Modem Database The modem connected to the server computer may not be listed in the database or the user may desire to change the modem configurations When the Edit Modem Database button is selected the reset and initialization strings for the selected modem are displayed You can change these settings or add a custom modem to the list If you change the settings for one of the standard modems you will have to save it to a new name to use it The only modems that can be deleted from the list are modems that have been added by the user Maximum Baud Rate Select the arrow to the right of this field to choose a maximum baud rate for communication with this device Note that the actual rate of communication may be limited by the capability of other devices in the communications chain Extra Response Time In this fiel
416. u are converting a program for the same series of datalogger e g a CR10X program to a CR10X TD program you can edit the existing program in Edlog If you are converting a program from one datalogger series to another e g CR10X to CR23X TD you may need to start the program from scratch To convert a program for the same series of datalogger 1 Des Open the CSI file in Edlog The first line of the file will read CR10X Change this line to CR10X TD Review all of the instructions provided in the section below If any of these are included in your program format them as a comment or delete them from the program Save the file to a new file name but do not compile the file when prompted Open the newly created file in Edlog It will be opened using the CR10X TD datalogger template instead of the CR10X Make any changes necessary to replace the commented or deleted instructions Save and compile the program correcting any errors that may be found by the compiler B 2 2 Program Instruction Changes Several programming instructions have changed or are not used in table based datalogger programs Make sure you comment out any of these instructions before you try to convert the array based program These are listed below Check any instructions that may set the Output Flag Flag 0 high or low by using the Command Code Options The output flag is not used in table based programming Instructions that may include
417. u can choose either or both options by clicking the check box next to the option name 5 25 Section 5 Setup gt What Task_1 Does V Call Station Iv Execute File File Name Ic Program Files Campbellsci LoggerNet SPLITR EXE ey Command Line Options Je Campbellsci LoggerN et CR10T par Working Directory C Campbellsci LoggerNet D ata El Call Station will attempt to collect data from the selected datalogger when the task is triggered Data will be collected according to the configuration set for scheduled data collection Click the triangle next to the drop down list for a list of all the dataloggers in the network Execute File will run the listed program or script file Click the button to the right of the File Name to browse the computer for applications or scripts Any file types that are registered with Windows such as audio text or graphic files will bring up the associated application This will allow you to put in a wave file that will automatically announce the trigger condition Any command line parameters that are needed for the program can be listed on the second line as Command Line Options If the application needs to have a working directory specified for other resource files the directory path is specified in the Working Directory box Clicking the Browse button to the right will bring up a directory list to choose from existing directories 5 6 Convert from PC
418. ulian day 189 Element3 hour minute Element4 average temperature in deg F Element5 average soil temperature in deg F Element6 average wind speed in mph Element7 wind direction in degrees TABLE ORIENTED ASCII TOACIL CR10T 15Minute TMSTAMP RECNBR TCTempF_ MAX BattVolt_MIN 2002 02 26 10 30 00 0 73 97 13 99 2002 02 26 10 45 00 1 74 03 13 98 2002 02 26 11 00 00 2 74 53 13 98 2002 02 26 11 15 00 3 74 82 13 98 2002 02 26 11 30 00 4 75 23 13 98 Element Timestamp Element2 Record Number Element3 temperature in degrees F Element4 minimum battery voltage 10 9 Section 10 Split A maximum of eight input files may be processed by Split at one time Additional input files are added using the EDIT ADD DATA FILE menu option Split defaults to a file extension of DAT if no extension is specified If the Input File does not exist an error message is displayed when RUN GO is selected from the menu options For instance to process two files named TEST DAT and TEST_1 DAT the user would select TEST DAT and TEST_1 DAT as Input Files Two blank input file templates will be generated To change from one template to the other click the appropriate tab on the bottom of the screen Both templates must be completed before Split will process the data To merge different output arrays from the same input file into one array open the data file once for each different array 10 3 1 1 File Offset U
419. umber of records entered in the Number of Records field and retrieving all data forward Specific Records Allows you to specify a beginning record number and the number of records to collect after that record The range of records to retrieve is specified by completing the Starting Record and Number of Records fields Data from Selected Date and Time Allows you to specify a span of time for data collection When this option is selected the Starting Date Time and Ending Date Time fields will be enabled File Mode This option is used to determine how data will be stored in relation to existing data files with the same name Append to End of File Adds new data to the end of the existing data file Overwrite Existing File Replaces the existing file with a newly created file Section 14 DataFiler Create New File Renames the existing file with a bak extension and stores the new data with the specified file name Subsequent bak files will be named bak1 bak2 etc The most recently bak file will have the highest number File Format This option is used to determine the format in which the data file will be saved TOAS Data is stored in a comma separated format Header information for each of the columns is included along with field names units of measure if they are available and output processing types average sample total etc CSV Data is stored in a comma separated format without any header
420. unks called packets For most devices the default value is 2048 byes The value entered in this field can be changed in 32 byte increments If a communications link is marginal reducing the packet size may improve reliability Extra Response Time In this field specify the additional time that LoggerNet should delay before terminating the communications link if there is no response from the datalogger Additional time may be needed in instances where the communications link is noisy or network traffic is heavy LoggerNet waits a certain amount of time for a response from each device in a communications path The extra response times defined for the communications link are cumulative Therefore the amount of time spent waiting for a device to respond is the sum of all Extra Response Times defined plus the default response time for each device in the link Add the minimum time necessary since very long response times can delay other scheduled events while waiting for a device that is not responding Maximum Baud Rate Select the arrow to the right of this field to choose a maximum baud rate for communication with this datalogger Note that the actual rate of communication may be limited by the capability of other devices in the communications chain Security Code A datalogger can have a security code to restrict access to the datalogger This helps prevent inadvertent changes to the datalogger s program or memory A valid security cod
421. unning in the datalogger can be retrieved and saved to a file by connecting to the datalogger and clicking the Retrieve button You will be prompted for a name and directory in which to store the retrieved file CR5 and CR9 files can be opened directly in the CRBasic Editor A retrieved did file can be imported into Edlog for editing by using Edlog s Document DLD feature Section 8 1 4 The binary image files bin for the CR200 Series dataloggers cannot be retrieved This feature is useful if the original file has been corrupted lost or erased Note that programs may not be reliably retrieved over noisy or slow communications links NOTE CR5000 and CR9000 dataloggers have a built in file system much like a computer hard disk Multiple files can be stored in the datalogger memory including data files and datalogger programs The user can choose a new program to run stop execution of the active program or select a program to be run on power up of the datalogger This is done from the Connect window s Tools File Control menu See Section 6 6 for details 6 5 Data Displays The Connect screen s Data Displays provide display screens to monitor numeric values or view graphs of the collected data Both types of displays get their data from the LoggerNet data cache so the data must be collected from the datalogger before it can be displayed Active scheduled collection will supply updated data for these displays automatically as it is
422. uter bring up the server connection dialog from the Project Change Server Connection menu The Server IP is the network computer name or IP address The computer name is defined by the network administrator A connection can also be made over the Internet or local area network using the 4 number Internet Protocol IP address This is a number that will have four digits between 0 and 255 separated by decimal points An example would be 192 168 4 32 Do not put leading zeros with the numbers The User Name and Password are only used if you are connecting to a LoggerNet server that supports security LoggerNet version 1 1 and the network administrator has implemented security The Port Number should always be 6789 Clicking the Save Login Info will save the computer address user name and password as part of the RTMC file so the screen can be run without requiring the user to know the address LoggerNet must be installed with the Allow Remote Connections option enabled for RTMC to be able to connect remotely The run time operation allows you to run the real time graphic display screen that was created in the developer mode From the RTMC Development window you can test the operation of the display screen using the Runtime Save and Run Current Project menu or clicking the Run Time icon on the toolbar This will close the development window and start the project window with RTMC Run Time as shown in the window below When the run ti
423. vice configuration file failed This is a message from the RF base indicating that a BMP 1 message didn t make it to the data logger This is an indication that the configuration file has been corrupted Check the network map and the computer file system This may be due to a problem with directory permissions or a corrupted directory Codes 1 and 3 are rare If ever seen contact an application engineer at Campbell Scientific Code 2 indicates that the RF base has lost the network map and doesn t know how to route the message The server automatically resends the network map Code 4 is an indication that the RF base was not able to communicate with the RF modem attached to the datalogger These will happen occasionally as part of normal operations Message Text Unexpected change in datalogger table definitions A device setting value has changed A LgrNet setting value has changed Client defined message Socket listen Device renamed Message Parameters Setting Identifier Client s logon name New value of the setting Setting Identifier Client s logon name Client defined message Message Meaning As part of data collection the server has detected a change in the datalogger s table definitions A client has changed one of the device configuration settings A client has changed one of the server configuration settings These messages are placed in the transa
424. w a report generation tool Split and a data display program RTMC e A set of miscellaneous utilities let you work with other Campbell Scientific hardware such as storage modules SMS 1 1 2 LoggerNetData 1 2 LoggerNetData consists of application programs that can be installed and run from a remote computer connected by TCP IP to the computer running LoggerNet This connection could be a local area network LAN or the Internet This allows you to either remotely monitor the collected data or retrieve the data and view or process it on the remote PC The applications included with LoggerNetData are e Real Time Monitor and Control RTMC provides tools to create and run real time graphic display screens Also ships with LoggerNet e View displays stored data files and provides limited graphing capability Also ships with LoggerNet e Split processes a stored data file to create reports combines and separates files and changes formatting of data Also ships with LoggerNet e DataFiler collects data from LoggerNet s data cache and saves it to a file on the remote PC Note that you must have LoggerNet installed on a computer that is communicating with the datalogger network to use any of the LoggerNetData applications Section 1 Introduction 1 2 LoggerNet Applications 1 2 1 Setup Section 5 4 The Setup screen is used to add dataloggers to the network define the communications paths between th
425. w Data Info button to display a Data Information table that indicates the number of records and range of record numbers in the LoggerNet data cache for each table in the datalogger These are the records that are available for collection and storage by the DataFiler The Data Information table is retrieved from LoggerNet when the window is opened It can be updated by pressing the Refresh button Table Name The name of the data storage table in the datalogger of Records The number of records in LoggerNet s data cache for the table By default the size of the data cache for each datalogger table is set 14 3 Section 14 DataFiler 14 4 NOTE to two times the size of the table in the datalogger Once a datalogger table in the data cache has reached its defined size the oldest record is deleted from the data cache when the newest one is written Earliest Timestamp The time stamp of the first record in the data cache Latest Timestamp The time stamp of the last record in the data cache Earliest Record The record number of the first record in the data cache Latest Record The record number of the last record in the data cache Because the data cache is updated based on data collection from the datalogger there could be additional records stored in the datalogger s memory which have not yet been retrieved to the data cache 14 2 3 1 Record Number Anomalies Under certain circumstances it may appear there i
426. xt_out_message hole collection 2002 02 07 12 04 30 325 CR10T Bmp1 Bmp1Tran get_next_out_message hole collection 2002 02 07 12 04 30 495 CR10T Bmp1 Bmp1Tran get_next_out_message hole collection 2002 02 07 12 04 30 685 CR10T Bmp1 Bmp1Tran get_next_out_message hole collection 2002 02 07 12 04 31 006 CR10T Logger on_selective_manual_poll_cmd 66 9559 2002 02 07 12 04 31 446 CRIOT Bmp1 Bmp1Tran get_next_out_message hole collection 2002 02 07 12 04 31 807 CR10T Dev shouldGetOffLine communication disabled 2002 02 07 12 04 31 807 CR10T Dev cmdFinished BMP1 Low Level Serial 2002 02 07 12 04 31 807 CR10T Dev onNextCommand Ending 2002 02 07 12 04 31 837 ComPort_1 Dev relDevice CR1IOT 2002 02 07 12 04 31 837 CR10T Dev cmdFinished BMP1 low level serial end 2002 02 07 12 04 31 837 CR10T Dev goingOffLine Reset off line counter 2002 02 07 12 04 31 837 ComPort_1 Dev onNextCommand Ending 2002 02 07 12 04 31 867 ComPort_1 Dev cmdFinished Comm Root end_command_type 2002 02 07 12 04 31 867 ComPort_1 Dev goingOffLine Reset off line counter 2002 02 07 12 04 31 867 ComPort_1 SerialProvider execute thread stopping 2002 02 07 12 04 31 907 CRIOT Dev shutDown Shutting down 2002 02 07 12 04 31 997 CRIOT Dev shutDown Shutting down 2002 02 07 12 04 32 047 ComPort_1 Dev shutDown Shutting down 2002 02 07 12 0
427. y and the report file will precede the date with asterisks In the PRN output file Split uses the Bad Data string Date Format Examples Assume that in an array based data file element 2 is Year element 3 is Day of Year element 4 is Hour Minute and element 5 is Seconds String Entered Output date mm dd yy h nn 5 4 3 2 02 25 02 4 10 edate mm dd yy hh nn 5 4 3 2 02 25 02 04 10 edate dddd mmmm d yyyy 5 4 3 2 Monday February 25 2002 edate Date mmm d yyyy 5 4 3 2 Date Feb 25 02 If a time element is missing from an array based data file use a valid constant instead If processing a table based data file use a 1 for all time elements assuming the time stamp is the first element in the data file For the examples above date mm dd yy h nn 1 1 1 1 02 25 02 4 10 edate mm dd yy hh nn 1 1 1 1 02 25 02 04 10 edate yyyy dayofyear hhnn 1 1 1 1 2002 56 0410 Notice that this last example essentially creates an array type of timestamp 10 33 Section 10 Split 10 34 NOTE When processing a data file from an array based datalogger if the time stamp uses midnight as 2400 with today s date the date function will convert that time stamp to 0000 hours with tomorrow s date The No Date Advance function can be used to stop the date from rolling forward Other button No Date Advance check box edate format S H D Y edate functions identically to date
428. y instructions that dynamically change the number of data values in a record or the size of the record need to be removed e g don t change data resolution from low to high based on a conditional B 3 Table Data Overview In the datalogger all data is organized into tables with fixed data records Each of these tables has a definite number of records that is either fixed by the datalogger program or allocated when the program is compiled by the datalogger Once the maximum number of records for a table have been stored B 5 Appendix B Table Based Dataloggers B 6 NOTE the next record stored will overwrite the oldest record in the table The record number will continue to increment and the oldest record will drop off the top Tables that are automatically allocated in the datalogger program are allocated a number of records based on the time interval for the records The datalogger attempts to allocate these tables so that all of the automatically allocated tables fill up at the same time For example two tables with records stored every 30 minutes and 60 minutes would have twice as many records allocated for the 30 minute table Event driven tables should have a fixed size rather than allowing them to be allocated automatically If automatically allocated event driven tables in the later versions of the operating systems of CR10X TD type dataloggers are assumed to have one record stored per execution interval in cal
429. y pressing the space bar A selected button can be clicked by pressing the Enter key The tab key is used to move the focus to each of the buttons and controls on the screen Buttons Buttons are an obvious way to access a function They are normally used for the functions that need to be called frequently or are very important Clicking the button executes the function or brings up another window Button functions can also be accessed from the keyboard using the tab key to move among items on a screen and pressing the enter key to execute the button function Right Click Menus Many areas have pop up menus that bring up frequently used tasks or provide shortcuts Just right click over an area and then left click the menu item you want Hot Keys or Keyboard Shortcuts Many of the menus and buttons can be accessed using Hot Keys An underlined letter identifies the hot key for a button or function To get to a menu or execute a function on a button hold down the Alt key and type the underlined letter in the menu name or the button text Pop Up Hints Hints are available for many of the on screen controls Let the mouse pointer hover over the control text box or other screen feature the hint will appear automatically and remain visible for a few seconds These hints will often explain the purpose of a control or a suggested action For text boxes where some of the text is hidden the full text will appear in the hint Section 2 Sys
430. yV Input Locations are sampled with one sample P70 instruction with the REPS parameter of 2 10 Temperature 107 P11 01 02 03 04 05 06 11 Battery Volt P10 01 2 REPS Channel Excitation Channel Loc TempC Mult Offset Loc BatteryV 8 17 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog If time is P92 01 minutes into interval 02 minute interval 03 Set high Flag O output 13 Sample P70 01 2 Reps 02 1 Loc TempC When the program is executed the datalogger will perform the same instruction twice The first time it will sample the value stored in the TempC location The second time it will sample the value stored in the battery location NOTE If an Input Location is inserted between the TempC and BatteryV location the inserted location will be sampled instead of BatteryV 8 2 3 Input Location Editor Input Location labels can be entered and edited by using the Input Location Editor To access the Input Location Editor select Edit Input Labels Location number Program Use R Read Label W Written to M Manually marked Flags Reads Writes Blocks Ref Temp or TCA TC_2 TC_3 TC_4 TC_5 eesesssesrs Number of Instructions in the program that read the location Reps or Manual Block Start First of Rep End Last of Rep Number of Instructions in the program that write to the location 8 18 Section 8 Datalogger Program Creation with Edlog

LoggerNet User's Manual - Bad Request

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents